Home

PCBoards User's Guide - Del-UFMS

image

Contents

1. 3 Click the Display button Note The Display button is disabled if the chosen a ae attribute cannot be displayed Parameters EE lava Height 62 5mil TEXT_STD Clear from Layer Angle 90 Weight Smil 22 4 In the Layer list box select a layer 1 32 Using the Layout Editor Set the text display parameters in the Parameters section by either selecting a text style in the Styles list entering custom values in the Height Angle Weight and Justification controls or a combination of both Choose e Assign to Layer to assign the current text properties to the current layer selection e Clear from Layer to void the text parameter controls and indicate the attribute is not to be visible on the currently selected layer Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each layer affected Click OK to return to the Attributes dialog box Click OK to exit Using the Message Viewer 1 33 Using the Message Viewer Occasionally while editing the layout PCBoards displays the Message Viewer with text describing status warnings errors or fatal errors For example warnings and error messages occurring during netlist read in appear in the Message Viewer MicroSim Message Viewer C MSIMX SAMPLE1 File Edit View Tools Window Help C MSIMX SAMPLE1 Severity Origin Time MessageTet o el PCBoards 11 36AM PCBoards 11 36AM Every component needs a footprint The following comps don t have one P
2. Adding Connections on page 4 21 discusses how to add connections if you are adding components or creating a layout on the fly Deleting Connections on page 4 22 explains how to disconnect a connection Hints and Tips on page 4 23 gives you helpful suggestions concerning material discussed in this chapter Understanding Connectivity 4 3 Understanding Connectivity Logical Connections A logical connection is a connection between two pins Rats and ratsnests A logical connection is a rat You create rats in one of two ways e automatically as they are loaded in from the schematic netlist e interactively using the mouse A collection of rats is a ratsnest The following illustration shows rats between pins 0000000 Figure 4 1 Logical Connections rats Between Pins Before routing a rat appears on the layer tagged Ratsnest corresponding to each logical electrical connection in the design Layout objects cannot be directly placed on the Ratsnest layer When your layout gets full and complex it can be difficult to follow the rats from connection to connection You can make them easier to follow by optimizing them 4 4 Arranging Components Optimizing the rats recalculates the ratsnest for the entire board so that connections are displayed showing the most efficient path among components See Optimizing Rats on page 4 8 for procedures Physical Connections Physical connections
3. 14 8 Updating Existing Jobs 2 ee ee 14 9 Exporting Job Definiti0NS s s sissa ea o o e 0 0000 14 9 Importing Job Definitions 6 5 acy e a oe ee 14 10 PHONE cerrada CRE Ow SPER Ge e See 14 12 Seine Up the Job sge sa ahh a ks Beale ae doe Bae ae oe wears i 14 12 Choosing the Output Device 0 000004 14 13 Setting the Output for Color or Monochrome 14 13 Choosing the Print Method o o 14 13 xii Contents Photoplotting s lt easg 6 4 Sek ha se PERE OS a EEE Ge wa OR HS 14 15 Seine Upthe JOD sierra iaa SS Be ek SA HR HE a 14 16 Setting up the Aperture Table 2 04 14 16 Automatically creating new aperture definitions 14 17 Interactively creating new aperture definitions 14 17 Modifying or deleting existing aperture definitions 14 19 Exporting aperture definitions 0 14 19 Importing aperture definitions 008 14 20 Setting Up the Format aora ee be Ge we Boa Gee eee Ew ae 14 20 Verifying Gerber Output as es ses ba eee we OHS Bee ew PES a 14 22 Generating NC Drill Piles soseo Soe ba eles BGS How BSS OES oo 14 24 Setting up the JOD ie mece Bh aw oe a ew eR a Ee A we 14 24 Setting up the Drill Table usc cee we eee eae RE we 14 25 Automatically creating new tool definitions 14 25 Interactively creating new tool definitions 14 27 Modifying or delet
4. Table 1 4 Zoom Commands continued Out View menu Reduces object size while maintaining the position of the objects relative to the work area centerpoint Select Options from the Tools menu and change the Zoom Scale value to set the reduction factor Fit View menu Adjusts the size of all objects so that the entire layout is visible in the work area Select Options from the Tools menu and change the Zoom Fit value to control the scale of the work area Previous View Incrementally steps back through the menu previous zoom states up to twenty To zoom the display Select the zoom command of your choice from the View menu toolbar button or shortcut keys To magnify an object or area Drag an outline border around the object or area you want magnified Redrawing the Display You have control of the way the layout editor displays solid objects solid or outline and whether it redraws layers randomly or in a bottom to top sequence To redraw the display Select Redraw from the View menu To set redraw options 1 From the Tools menu select Options Changing Views 1 21 E o Gao By ua Ctri 0 Shortcut S or CtrI 1 Shortcut 1 22 Using the Layout Editor Options Interaction Preferences Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold E Smil C mm Rotation Increment 30 Deg I Best Rep Y Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y On Line DRC Tf
5. Changing the Ratsnest Display The ratsnest display is used to tailor the visibility of logical electrical connections within the work area All nets within the layout database are shown in the Net Names list box All or a subset can be selected for viewing To select logical connections for viewing 1 From the Configure menu select Ratsnest Display Managing Rats 4 9 4 10 Arranging Components Subsequent clicks on the deselected items reselects them Subsequent clicks on the selected items deselects them Ratsnest Display Net Names 2 Select the logical connections you want to view according to the options below If you want to see all logical connections in the database click the Select All button If you want to omit only one or a few connections click the Select All button then click the ones in the Net Names list you want to deselect If you want to select only one or a few connections click the Unselect All button then click the ones in the Net Names list you want to view Cross Probing 4 11 Cross Probing If you created your PCBoard layout by loading a Schematics netlist you can easily find nets and components by cross probing Cross probing allows you to select an object in the PCBoards layout and see its corresponding object highlighted in Schematics It also works from Schematics to PCBoards Table 4 1 shows which objects are highlighted in Schematics when you cross probe selected objec
6. DRC Sound e V Crosshair I Optimize Rats Y Auto Loop Remove Fill Y Auto Netlist Check A Outline One Pass c ic Zoom Pan Delta Formal Iv Current Last Scale B Coarse 25 Fit so 2 Fine 1 Autopan gt Autosave MT Enable MT Enable Sensitivity fi 000 ms Every fi 5 Min oK K Hot Zone ua E I Save Settings Cancel Choose in the Repaint frame Fill to display solid objects such as traces areafills and pins in solid colors with their actual dimensions Outline to display solid objects as an outline Though Outline reduces redraw time of a large layout it does not depict trace width This feature is most useful for preparing check or pen plots Choose One Pass to redraw objects in the order it reads them from the layout database Though One Pass reduces redraw time of a large layout it gives no assurance that objects on one layer are consistently redrawn before objects on other layers Formal to redraw the display sequentially from the bottom most to the top most layer Select or clear Current Last Selecting Current Last causes the layout editor to redraw the current layer shown in the Layers drop down list last Click OK to exit Changing Views 1 23 Note When combined One Pass and Current Last provide the recommended compromise between performance and aesthetics 1 24 Using the Layout Editor If you change the properties of
7. Enter Name f 10 10 Creating and Editing Footprints Setting Unit of Measure Data books present component properties in either units of millimeters mm or thousandths of an inch mil To set the unit of measure Shortcut 1 Select Options from the Tools menu m Interaction Preferences gt Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold E Smil C mm Rotation Increment so Deg I Best Rep Y Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC Tf DRC Sound e Fill IV Crosshair IV Auto Netlist Check I Optimize Rats Y Auto Loop Remove C Outline One Pass Zoom r Pan Delta C Formal Scale 2 Coarse 25 x IV Current Last Fit so Fine fi es a Autopan Autosave T Enable I Enable Sensitivity fi 000 ms Every fi 5 Min Hot Zone fi T Save Settings Cancel If a measurement is entered in units other than the current units the footprint editor automatically 2 Inthe Units of Measure group click on either mil or mm as converts the value to the current appropriate units For example if the current units are mil and you enter 1 27mm the measurement is converted to 50 mil Setting Grid Spacing The snap grid should be enabled and set to have spacing equal GriaiSpacing to the pin spacing in the component footprint To set grid spacing 1 Select Snap Grid from the Configure menu 2 Setthe Grid Spacing text box to the pin to pin distance
8. PCBoards saves new definitions locally to the current layout If you want to use them in other layouts you must save them into a library It is best if you save them to a user defined library rather than to libraries supplied by MicroSim Installation of new software versions overwrites the system supplied libraries Applying Forward and Backward ECOs Overview When using MicroSim Schematics as the input to PCBoards you can use the Engineering Change Order ECO process to track and make changes between the two programs This chapter covers the ECO process throughout the following sections Understanding the ECO Process on page 12 2 explains the ECO process and the conditions that must exist Working with Backward ECOs on page 12 4 gives you procedures for performing a Backward ECO Working with Forward ECOs on page 12 7 gives you procedures for performing a Forward ECO Comparing Netlists on page 12 10 describes how you can check for an out of sync condition between Schematics and PCBoards Hints and Tips on page 12 12 gives you helpful suggestions concerning material covered in this chapter 12 Note You can use the ECO process only if you are using MicroSim Schematics as the input to PCBoards 12 2 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs Understanding the ECO Process Changes made to Schematics after its netlist was input to PCBoards are tracked and applied to PCBoards through the forward ECO p
9. e e 10 9 Simple Pit Patter he ais 60d a o AA AAA 10 14 Pi Grid Atay sr ar 10 16 Offset Pin Grid AAY sick a og es a enoe si Bo da 10 16 Marking the Footprint Orientation o o e 10 19 Subset ofthe SOS SOIC ss oy dae rre a Gees es Hew e 10 21 MicroSim Library Structute 4 4 04 e s m eae ee as 11 4 Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 7 1 Table 14 1 Table 14 2 Table 14 3 Table A 1 Toolbar Buttons o o es edea errar eo Se Re ed woe wee oe hee S 1 8 Toolbar Drop down Lists 4 sro ceca 26a 6h oa ed oe eee bm eGR 1 10 COSO SES 1 paa ek ed Gd Oe ee ap eed ee 1 12 Zoom Commands y 655 04 dvs Giai dd E amp Beis Ba a Bed Bane aS 1 20 Indicated Severity es sec 64 68644 A ORE A GUA 1 34 Configure Layout Editor Commands in Schematics 2 3 Typical Netlist Footprint Errors 2 o o o 2 7 Layer Tag Assignments 2 4 a cod Gas Sd ee arn Be ae eek eo we 3 29 Layer Properties 6 4 6 2 44 Pa ae dds He me eR oda we A 3 32 Implicit Layer Pats s imss 6 aoe A 3 34 Layer Place Codes 2 6 644 6 oooh 24 2 Gd DAG we oe a Oe Ge BE er 3 35 PCBoards Schematics Object Relationships when Cross Probing 4 11 Layer Flag Codes 246446245 8444548 25 65 44 Ba Se aOR OR 5 3 Minimum Manufacturing Values o o 5 17
10. 045 drill sq 075 040 square thru 075 pad 040 drill sq 1 00 square smt 1 00mm 2 Select the padstack name you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button Changing Padstack Assignments 9 19 Changing Padstack Assignments Once components and vias are placed either interactively or in the case of vias by autorouting it can be necessary to customize associated padstacks For example test points often use larger pads on the probing layers To change the padstack used for a pin or via 1 Double click on a via or component pin Attributes x Name Value NETNAME INET 0004 New Change NET_FIXED NO VIA_START_LAYER Component Delete VIA_END_LAYER Solder VIA_PADSTACK md 040 020 a 1450mil z g 1187 193mi Display VI4_PROTECTED NO Cancel 2 Change the relevant padstack attribute e Fora via click on VIA_PADSTACK e Fora pin click on PIN_PADSTACK 3 Enter a new definition name in the Value text box If the padstack definition that you need does not exist create a new padstack definition using the procedures outlined in Creating Padstacks on page 9 10 Click the Change button 4 Click OK 9 20 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks PadStack Definition Padstack Name rect 1 20x1 40 Description rect smt 1 20mm x 1 40mm Cancel Pad Definition Width Height Clearance r Thermal Relief 47 2441 mil Drill rail Clearance Ornil
11. 551181mi M Masks Solder Swell 3mil Spoke Width Orientation Match Template 10mil Abe oI Paste 101 Shunk fora IV Remove NonFunctional Pads on Inner Layers Hints and Tips To define a via for blind or buried use ensure Always Through in the Padstack Definition dialog box is not selected If you change a padstack definition in your layout PCBoards overwrites the original library definition with your changes when you save the layout To maintain the integrity of the std ps1 library make a copy of it and save the copy with a different name Use the new name as the default library Subsequent definition changes then affect only the copied library You should do the same for other libraries that you want to remain unchanged PCBoards saves new definitions locally to the current layout If you want to use them in other layouts you must save them into a library For them to be automatically available to all layouts without having to import them save them into the library named in the msim ini file Creating and Editing Footprints Overview When a design requires a component that is not provided in the standard libraries both package and corresponding footprint definitions must be created This chapter presents the steps required to create a component footprint using the footprint editor The following sections are in this chapter Understanding the Library Structure on page 10 3
12. PCBoards allows you to name a user defined library as the default library if you choose The Setting Up the Padstack Library section in this chapter lists the procedures for doing that No matter which library you use as the default you can also import other user defined definitions from external files into each layout PCBoards saves these definitions with the current layout and lists them in the padstack definitions list but because they are not an actual part of the default library they will not be listed in the padstack definition list in a different layout The Loading Padstacks section in this chapter lists the procedures for importing external definitions Understanding the Library Structure 9 5 However PCBoards gives you a method for retaining any combination of the default library and user defined files for use in other layouts You can export all of the definitions in a layout into a separate library file that you create it must have the ps1 extension You can then name that library file as the default in the msim ini file PCBoards then loads that library for all layouts The Exporting Padstacks section in this chapter lists the procedures for exporting definitions Since padstack definitions get assigned to component pins and vias the padstack library must also work with the footprint libraries Library Definitions Library definitions for padstacks are maintained in the padstack libraries The layout editor co
13. Use Options from the Tools menu to configure the Snap To Pin Threshold to adjust the snap ring so that during normal use the ring does not span two or more pin centers or trace segment end points If the snap ring encompasses more than one object at a time then this ambiguity will cause unpredictable behavior Mastery of object snap is key to effective trace drawing and editing Object snap is also available while pasting objects While pasting use the backspace key to cycle through the possible snap to reference points Experiment with this and become familiar with its use Turn off the snap grid when editing off grid traces such as those placed by the autorouter see Hints and Tips below Use cut and paste to draw repeating patterns Fan outs for connectors and SMT pins are efficiently accomplished with cut and paste When pasting trace elements that contain one or more vias use a combination of the backspace key and cursor movement to position the snap ring around the pin or trace segment to which you want the pasted elements to connect The Smart Functions provide powerful time saving ways to select move and route traces Once you become familiar with Smart Function behavior trace editing becomes much more predictable and efficient iala Understanding the Smart Functions on page 8 2 B 22 Tutorial Hints and Tips For efficient editing of off grid traces after autorouting using Snap Grid in the Configure menu dis
14. Y Enable Graphics Other IED I Auto Extend Selection Alt T Limit to Current Layer Ctrl Cancel 3 8 Defining the Circuit Board Displaying the Grid You can display the grid with or without the snap function enabled To display the grid 1 Select Display Display when selected enables display of the grid during layout activities When cleared the grid is not visible even if the snap function is enabled Graphic Objects In PCBoards you can place graphical objects arcs circles lines and rectangles on all graphic layers except the DrillSymbol DRC and Ratsnest layers Arc Arc from the Draw menu lets you draw an arc and define the centerpoint radius startpoint and endpoint To draw an arc 1 From the Draw menu select Arc Click on a centerpoint position for the arc Establish the radius and startpoint a Move the cursor away from the centerpoint the distance of the desired radius A vector extends from the centerpoint through the cursor b Click to establish the radius and startpoint A circle arc perimeter is displayed as established by the radius To undo this step press Bksp Establish the endpoint a Move the cursor counter clockwise to create the desired b arc angle The circle disappears and an arc the length of cursor movement replaces it Click to establish the endpoint arc angle Repeat steps 2 through 4 to place additional arcs Click r
15. a Define a text height b Select the relationship of the letter to the sign cC Define the scale of the sign If the scale of the sign is 1 it appears on the drill layer the exact size of the drill diameter Any scale size you enter changes the size of the sign by that scale factor d Define the weight of the sign Weight determines the thickness of the lines used to draw the sign Click OK to exit the Format dialog box Click OK to exit the NCD Tool Definitions dialog box Click OK to exit the Drill Output dialog box Modifying or deleting existing tool definitions To modify existing definitions 1 Select the appropriate entry in the list 2 Change the tool parameters according to the procedures covered in Interactively creating new tool definitions 3 Click OK To delete a definition 1 Select an entry 2 Click Delete Exporting tool definitions Export allows tool definitions maintained in the layout database of the current design to be copied to an external tool definition file t df extension A standard Save As dialog box allows either a new file or an existing file to be opened To export a tool definition Select the tool definition you want to export Click Export Enter a tool definition file name PCBoards assigns the t df extension automatically 4 Define the directory where you want the tool definition file to reside 5 Click Save Generating NC Drill Files 14 29 Note A tool de
16. e clicking the Change button to modify an existing style When exiting the definition in the Styles text box becomes the current style for lines and arcs Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles 1 25 To Delete 1 Point to Styles in the Configure menu and select Lines and Arcs 2 In the Styles text box type the name of the line arc style or select a name from the list 3 Click Delete Text Styles To Define or Modify 1 2 Point to Styles in the Configure menu and select Text In the Styles text box type the name of the text style or select a name from the list In the Height text box enter a dimension Height defines the rise of the text character The format is height valuelunits In the Angle text box enter a dimension Angle defines the amount of rotation in a counterclockwise direction The format is angle in degrees In the Weight text box enter a dimension Weight defines width of the lines that form the text characters The format is weight units Set the justification property by clicking the button that reflects the desired justification Justification defines the point of reference or justification point for the box that bounds the text string in terms of vertical position top middle baseline bottom and horizontal position left center right When placing or moving text the justification point defines the point at which the text rectangle repositions to the grid if enabled Add
17. 050 Right click to close the polygon and end the Draw mode 5 Select Save from the File menu Hints and Tips To add or delete layers use Layers from the Configure menu To turn a specific layer display on and off use Layer Display from the Configure menu You can change layer color in either dialog box If you simply want to change to a different layer and make it the current layer click on the Layer drop down list and select the desired layer Tutorial 2 B 5 A Adding Holes on page 3 24 PA Drawing a Board Signal Keepin on page 3 25 B 6 Tutorial The autorouter uses the Signal Keepin boundary to contain trace routing within the board outline The autorouter will not start if the Signal Keepin is missing Any traces or components outside the Signal Keepin generate DRC errors You can change line thicknesses or add new ones by pointing to Styles in the Configure menu and selecting Lines amp Arcs The current line style is shown in the Style drop down list This same Style drop down list is used to select Trace amp Text styles as well as the Padstack type for placing pins depending on the current mode By definition holes are non plated drills passing through all layers of the design To place a plated through hole with an annular ring you must place a specific padstack using Add Via from the Draw menu or the Add Via toolbar button second from the left on the bottom toolbar Y
18. 4 8 Arranging Components Shortcut Managing Rats As your board becomes more complex rats can become difficult to trace from connection to connection They can also become so numerous that they dominate the display You can alleviate much of this confusion by optimizing the rats and selectively displaying only the nets you want to see Optimizing Rats Optimizing rats recalculates the ratsnest for the entire board so that connections are displayed showing the most efficient path among components There are two methods for optimizing rats e interactively when you choose to do so e automatically as the you move components and place new connections To optimize rats interactively 1 From the Tools menu select Optimize Rats To use the automatic feature for optimizing rats 1 From the Tools menu select Options Options M Interaction Preferences gt Units of Measure gt mil Snap to pin Threshold E Smil C mm Rotation Increment so Deg T Best Rep M Rubberbanding Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC JT DRC Sound Fill IV Crosshair IV Auto Netlist Check Dutline FT Optimize Rats IV Auto Loop Remove One Pass Scale 2 Coarse 25 Current Last Fit so Fine fi 4utopan gt Autosave T Enable FT Enable Sensitivity 1000 ms Every 15 Min Hot Zone FT Save Settings Zoom 7 Pan Delta Formal 2 Select Optimize Rats 3 Click OK
19. Ctri 0 View Out Ctri P File Print C Edit Find Layout Editor Ctri R Edit Rotate R Ctri S File Save Ctri T Draw Trace Ctri U View Previous Ctri V Edit Paste O Shift Insert Ctri W Draw Add Connection C Edit Cut Ctri Y Edit Redo Ctr Z Edit Undo Scale complete design to fit into the work area Reduce the items around the center point of the work area Output current design to the configured printer Select objects with attributes that match the listed search criteria Rotate current selection Write current design to the Layout Database file Layout Editor or Footprint Library file Footprint Editor Add a trace segment Display layout at the last zoom setting Paste the buffer contents into the work area Draw a logical connection rat between two pins Copy the current selection to paste buffer and remove from the work area Restore action removed by last Edit Undo repeated use will step consecutively forward through Edit Undo actions Remove last action repeated use will step consecutively backward through earlier actions Repeat last command shown in status bar A 4 Using the Keyboard Table A 1 Keyboard Shortcuts continued Shortcut Key s Equivalent Menu Item Function Menu Navigation menu letter Display a Windows menu where menu letter is underlined in the menu item name command letter Activate command where command letter is und
20. EA a eS B 27 Tutorial 8 ECOs Between Schematics and PCBoards B 29 Forward Annotation s aa a ssc eee eR he ee ss B 29 Backward Annotation 2 2 0020000000000 08 B 29 Hints and Tipse s s e pros a Bok bee woke Soe es io B 30 Tutorial 9 Post Processing in PCBoards B 31 Gerber RS 274 X format s o s bcd doe dee Ge HEH aT aw Reo B 31 Gerber RS 274 D format oo e e B 31 NC Drill Mes s a oeo 9 alae kh 8 BS rr AAA AA B 33 Hints and TIPS buses 2 sooo cee amp CO GOS AIDA B 33 xiv Contents Glossary Index Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 6 1 Figure 9 1 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 11 1 Layout Editor Window e 1 7 PCB Design Flow Using PCBoards with Schematics 2 2 Logical Connections rats Between Pins o o 4 3 A Trace Replaces a Ral s aos A A Bar BOY 4 4 Net NamMES or poda chaos a e e Rie oe ar Slee w ae a 4 5 A Merged Net ziropa ss et a a A AR 4 6 Selective Display Of Nets e s se s PGS as OEM BESS A Pa wes 4 6 An Island inan Areata o iss lts Bias Bw dE are Balk oe Sa Bowe Be 6 23 MicroSim Library Structure 2 ee es 9 6 MicroSim Library StrUCtULE s ese eaaa o o ee 10 4 Footpint Didiami sica aa a DE A A AA So 10 8 Footprint Editor Window e
21. If specified in other than the current units of measure be sure to specify the units X Snap X Display Format is space between grid points units Creating a New Footprint 10 11 To modify existing definitions 1 Select the appropriate entry in the list 2 Change the spacing value 3 Click Change To add snap grid definitions to the list 1 Type the spacing value and units in the Grid Spacing text box 2 Click the Add button To remove definitions from the list 1 Select an entry 2 Click Delete Turning the Snap Grid On To turn the snap grid on Select or clear Snap x indicates enabled When selected Snap causes objects placed in the work area to be positioned to the nearest grid point The object s current reference point is placed on the grid When Snap is cleared the snap grid is ignored Displaying the Grid To display the grid Select or clear Display x indicates enabled When selected Display enables display of the snap grid during footprint editing activities When Display is cleared the snap grid is not visible 10 12 Creating and Editing Footprints Shortcut Select a new style from the padstack drop down list Assigning a Padstack Every pin should have a padstack assigned to it If you don t assign a specific padstack style the current padstack drop down list style is assigned If you don t want to use the drop down list style you can assign your choice of styles To a
22. Options x M Interaction Preferences gt Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold fi Smil C mm Rotation Increment 80 Deg I Best Rep Y Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC JT DRC Sound E Fill Y Crosshair Y Auto Netlist Check I Optimize Rats IV Auto Loop Remove C Outline One Pass C Formal Zoom Pan Delta Scale fa Coarse js V Current Last Fit 90 Fine 1 a a gt Autopan gt Autosave T Enable I Enable Sensitivity foo ms ok Hot Zone fi T Save Settings Cancel 2 In the Every Min text box enter a time interval 3 Select the Enable check box to turn the automatic save function on Hints and Tips 50 Hints and Tips 2 11 You can load any circuit diagram drawn in MicroSim Schematics into PCBoards If the corresponding package and footprint definitions are not available for each symbol Interactive Netlist Readin will assist you in solving the problems To generate a netlist from Schematics for a layout system other than PCBoards click on Configure Layout Editor from the Tools menu and select the appropriate file format Then click on Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu You can import netlists from other schematic capture programs if they are in the PADS format To load a PADS netlist in PCBoards point to Netlist from the File menu and select Import PADS Defining the Circuit Board Overview Th
23. Sha pe Rectangular Diameter fom 47 2441 mi Clearance Omil Height 55 181 mil T Always Through Clearance femi SS Thermal Relief pete Solder Spoke Width romit Swell 3mil C i5 3G Paste Shrink Omil V Remove Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers 3 Follow the procedures outlined for creating a new padstack definition beginning with Assigning Default Properties on page 9 12 Editing Padstacks 9 17 Shortcut Shortcut Double click on the padstack entry in the Configure Padstacks dialog box 9 18 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Deleting Padstacks To delete a padstack definition Shortcut 1 Select Padstack from the Configure menu Configure Padstacks Padstack Name Description rnd 060 039 rnd thru 060 pad 039 drill rnd 060 040 rnd thru 060 pad 040 drill md 063 043 rnd thru 063 pad 043 drill md 065 045 rnd thru 065 pad 045 drill md 075 040 rnd thru 075 pad 040 drill rnd 080 040 rnd thru 080 pad 040 drill rnd 080 050 rnd thru 080 pad 050 drill rnd 081 061 rnd thru 081 pad 061 drill md 085 065 rnd thru 085 pad 065 drill md 095 060 rnd thru 095 pad 060 drill md 095 065 rnd thru 095 pad 065 drill rnd 100 075 rnd thru 100 pad 075 drill rnd 2 03 1 52 rnd thru 2 03mm pad 1 52mm drill md 350 217 rnd thru 350 pad 217 drill sq 050 030 square thru 050 pad 030 drill sq 065 045 square thru 065 pad
24. concerning the material covered in this chapter Understanding the Library Structure 10 3 Understanding the Library Structure A footprint library ps1 extension is a single file repository containing system supplied and user defined footprint definitions Library Definitions Library definitions for footprints are maintained in the footprint libraries When a component is placed the layout editor copies each uniquely referenced footprint definition into the layout database If another object is placed that references the same definition the original local copy is used Figure 10 1 shows how the MicroSim libraries relate to each other and to the programs that use them 10 4 Creating and Editing Footprints Layout Netlist PCBoards package name footprint name nets Package Footprint Padstack Library Library Library plb flb psl symbol name gt package name gt footprint name gt padstack name part a pkg type pin no pkg type pin name pin no padstack pin name NOUR WN 22O0008 Figure 10 1 MicroSim Library Structure Managing Footprint Library Files 10 5 Managing Fooiprint Library Files When a component is placed in a layout the layout editor searches through the configured footprint library files for a corresponding footprint definition A new footprint library file is not automatically available to the layout editor until it is configured into this list using Set
25. counterclockwise direction Format is angle in degrees e Weight defines line width Format is weight units e Justification defines the point of reference or justification point for the box that bounds the text string 10 24 Creating and Editing Footprints in terms of vertical position top base bottom and horizontal position left center right When placing or moving text the justification point defines the point at which the text bounding box will reposition to the snap grid if enabled To set this click on the desired justification point For instance click the middle button to ensure that the text bounding box always has its centerpoint positioned on the snap grid if enabled 2 Define the reference designator text style to be rotated 90 degrees and centered in the text bounding box a b c d Enter REFDES in the Styles text box Enter 90 in the Angle text box to rotate counterclockwise the text to read sideways Optionally set the Height and Weight text boxes Click on the center button in the Justification section 3 Define component type name text style to be centered in the text bounding box a oao fF Enter COMPTYPENAME in the Styles text box Enter zero in the Angle text box Optionally set the Height and Weight text boxes Click on the center button in the Justification section Click OK Creating a New Footprint 10 25 Positioning the templates REFDES Template The reference de
26. degrees between neighboring pins Click on the centerpoint of the circle Click on the appropriate grid point to establish the reference pin Creating a New Footprint 10 17 Draw Radial Pins Lx Reference Pin on grid 1 T SMT Angle Between Pins 45 0000 i Al Cancel Once placed pin properties can be changed using Attributes from the Edit menu 10 18 Creating and Editing Footprints Drawing the Part Outline The part outline provides a graphical representation of the component shape Part outline graphics are typically placed on the SilkTop layer To draw the part outline 1 Select the SilkTop layer named SilkTop by default in the Layer drop down list in the toolbar To add another value use Snap 2 Select the desired grid spacing from the Grid drop down list Grid from the Configure menu in the toolbar If necessary reset the snap grid to avoid overlapping the part outline with component pins 3 Draw an element of the part outline using commands from the Draw menu Position the element in the footprint and click to place Pressing repeats the last 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 joining graphic elements until the command outline is complete Marking the Footprint Orientation It is good practice to mark the footprint orientation using graphic selections in the Draw menu Two examples are shown below e a square drawn proximal to pin 1 within the part outline e a notch adjoining the part outli
27. eliminating the fill pattern only boundaries will be 1 From the File menu select Exit to quit PCBoards drawn Be sure to reset this attribute to SOLID before generating artwork 3 In the PCBoards section find the statement using the CCTPlanePCT keyword and set a new value for minimum areafill coverage using the format e Set the areafill attributes as required see Editing Areafill Attributes on page 5 9 To change the areafill coverage percentage Use a text editor to open msim ini e g Notepad CCTPlanePCT lt new value gt 4 Save and close msim ini Adding a Keepout Keepouts are special purpose electrically inert areas used to define regions in which other electrical object types areafills segments holes and vias must be excluded The shape of the keepout is defined by creating segments and vertices To define a keepout 1 2 3 N oO E From the Draw menu select Keepout Click on the first vertex position Move the cursor to the location for the second vertex A rubberband polygon appears Click to establish the second vertex point Repeat steps 3 and 4 to place additional sides of the polygon Click right to complete the keepout boundary Click right to end draw mode Editing a Keepout Boundary The procedures for editing a keepout boundary are the same as for editing areafill boundaries See Editing areafill boundaries on page 5 11 Adding a Keepout 5 15 Text object
28. of the layout and schematic e Output parameters direct the netlist compare summary either to disk File chosen or to a hard copy device Printer chosen e Print generates the output summary to the specified device When File is chosen a standard Open dialog box prompts for the name of the output file e Perspective Options define the synchronization approach to use e Apply Schematic Changes to PCB when selected defines a forward annotation perspective When Preview is chosen the Forward ECO dialog box is displayed e Apply PCB Changes to Schematic when selected defines a back annotation perspective When Preview is chosen the Backward Annotation dialog box is displayed Select a perspective Click on the Preview button Preview displays either the Forward ECO or Backward Annotation dialog box depending on the chosen Perspective The decision to continue or cancel the ECO process is made here To apply a forward ECO see Applying Forward ECOs on page 12 7 for procedures To apply a backward ECO see Applying Backward ECOs on page 12 5 for procedures 12 12 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs a ints and Tips All ECOs made in Schematics and applied to PCBoards forward annotation will be made automatically to the layout ECOs made in PCBoards and applied to Schematics back annotation must be made manually based on the report file that is generated The only ECOs that are made automatically to the
29. pin 1 defined earlier see To calculate boundary parameters on page 10 20 For example the S08 SOIC component land pattern diagram in Figure 10 8 on page 10 21 specifies the horizontal and vertical outside pin to outside pin distances i e D 3 81 mm and C 5 00 mm respectively The center mark coordinates are D 2 C 2 1 905 mm 2 500 mm Select Machine Center by Coord from the Draw menu Enter the computed coordinate values into the X and Y text boxes 4 Click OK A circle appears at the center of the footprint Creating a New Footprint 10 23 Defining the Reference Designator and Component Type_Name Style Setting text styles For each template the character presentation text string justification within the text bounding box and page orientation must be defined To set text styles 1 Point to Styles from the Configure menu and select Text Shortcut Configure Text Style Lx Height 60mi Add Anale fo Change Weight femi Delete Justification eee cer seo Cancel Text is used to manage the creation and editing of text style definitions composed of name height weight and justification e When exiting the dialog box the definition named in the Styles text box becomes the current style that will be applied to text subsequently placed in the footprint e Height defines the height of the text character Format iS height value units e Angle defines the amount of rotation in a
30. select Open from the File menu and select tutor1 pca 1 Configure the layer display Shortcut F3 A y a iala Configuring Layers on page 3 28 b Click Unselect All Cc Select layers BOARDOUTLINE BOARDSIGKEEPIN SILKTOP COMPONENT SOLDER RATSNEST a Select Layer Display from the Configure menu d Click OK lala Creating the Board Outline 2 Draw the board outline on page 3 18 a Click on the Layer drop down list and select the BOARDOUTLINE layer to make it current a b Select Out from the View menu c Select Polyline from the Draw menu or click on the third toolbar button from the right d Draw the board outline at the following coordinates 0 0 250 0 250 450 1650 450 1650 0 1850 0 1850 2250 0 2250 0 0 Note At this stage it is okay to draw the outline through the parts The components will be selected later in Tutorial 3 e Right click to end Draw mode a f Select Fit from the View menu 3 Add mounting holes a o ao fF f Select Add Hole from the Draw menu Define 125mil diameter Define a 15mil DRC clearance Click OK Place holes at the following coordinates 100 100 100 2150 1750 2150 Right click to end the Place mode 4 Draw the signal keepin a Click on the Layer drop down list and select the COMPONENT layer to make it current Select Board Signal Keepin from the Draw menu Draw the keepin boundary 50mil inside the boardoutline starting at 050
31. template test point through holes T junction tool definition trace Glossary 7 Surface Mount Technology components and pins reside entirely on the top or bottom surface of the board without the use of through holes for mounting The SPECCTRA autorouter Do file command syntax uses SMD Surface Mount Device to mean the same thing Placement grid used for uniform positioning of objects in the layout Small Outline Integrated Circuit SMT package for ICs A photographic stencil which describes areas that are to remain exposed to the soldering process during fabrication Typically a coating is applied to the entire PCB surface then exposed to light which passes through the transparent areas of the solder mask results are chemically developed and exposed sections are etched away to reveal the desired metal areas A filled metal rectangle connecting a via or pin to an areafill on the same net Trace segment leading from the edge of a pad or pin to a junction on the same net Definition used to initialize the properties of graphics lines and arcs text traces Layout Editor or pins Footprint Editor when they are added to the layout Required enlargement in size of a pad when generating a corresponding mask The swell value is used to derive solder masks see pad template A pin or via assigned to a net for the purpose of testing the PCB during manufacturing When autorouting test points can be positioned on
32. the snap grid is enabled Horizontal trace in a vertical direction When you select and move a horizontal trace in a vertical direction PCBoards maintains the x axis positions of both ends of the trace even if the trace lies between grid points X axis coordinates maintained even though they lie between grid points TERT Segment move completed N Horizontal TT segment being moved vertically during vertical move after vertical move Vertical trace in a horizontal direction When you select and move a vertical trace in a horizontal direction PCBoards maintains the y axis positions of both ends of the trace even if the trace lies between grid points Understanding the Smart Functions 8 9 Y axis coordinates maintained even though they lie Segment move completed between grid points N l Vertical segment Ymmi being moved horizontally during horizontal move after horizontal move Oblique angle with a horizontal trace When you select and move a trace that is at an oblique angle and has a horizontal trace connected at either or both ends PCBoards maintains the y axis positions of both ends of the oblique trace even if the trace lies between grid points Y axis coordinates Oblique segment being maintained even moved horizontally i Segment move completed though they lie between grid points HHM ii gt im gt mm M A gt imm gt imm during oblique horizontal move a
33. the spoke is eliminated Match Template when clicked sets all of the pad definition properties for the currently selected layer to values defined for the Template layer 9 14 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Note Pins have their start and end layers defined in the footprint editor as determined by the type of pin through hole SMT on the Top layer or SMT on the Bottom layer 3 Define the Solder Bottom layer pad a Select the layer name for the Bottom layer Solder by default in the On Layer list box b Click on Match Template to assign the Template pad properties to the Bottom layer Defining Drill Parameters To define drill parameters 1 Define the drill diameter a Enter drill dimensions in the Diameter text box Diameter defines the finished hole diameter Format is diameter value units 2 Define a clearance value for DRC a Entera clearance value in the Clearance text box Clearance defines the required space between the drill hole and layout objects other than those associated with the padstack Format is DRC value units 3 Select or clear Always Through When selected Always Through initializes the start and end layers for vias to the layers tagged Top and Bottom i e through hole vias When cleared a via s start and end layers are set from either the current layer pair or extent of a trace segment being routed between layers Depending on the start and end layer
34. unplated holes 3 24 unrouted nets and pins 13 10 Unrouted Nets report ucr 13 10 _14 39 updating already placed footprints 10 37 existing job definition 14 9 User Defined layer 3 29 creating 3 35 5 2 deleting 3 38 5 6 limit 3 29 repositioning 3 38 _5 5 Index 12 V via blind 6 16 deleting 8 13 through hole 6 16 VIA_PADSTACK attribute 6 18 VIA_PROTECTED attribute 6 18 VIA_TESTPOINT attribute 6 18 View Area command 1 20 Fit command 1 21 In command 1 20 Out command 1 21 Previous command 1 21 viewing error messages 1 33 views changing 1 19 voids drawing 6 20 editing boundaries 6 20 W work area 1 11
35. 1 27 editing boundaries areafill 5 11 board signal keepin 3 25 footprint 10 19 keepout 5 15 voids 6 20 electrical rules handling 5 16 entity DXF considerations 3 19 types 3 19 error handling 1 33 severity 1 34 errors footprint netlist readin 2 7 examining DRC errors 13 13 Export Padstacks command 9 9 exporting an AutoCad DXF file 14 41 aperture definitions 14 19 job definitions 14 9 padstacks 9 9 tool definitions 14 29 extending an existing selection 1 15 F fabrication files 14 43 file apr 14 36 atr 14 39 bco 12 4 blg 12 4 bom 14 33 dre 14 39 dxf 3 18 14 41 flg 12 7 fpr 14 39 glg 14 15 hdr 14 36 loc 14 35 nlf 2 4 pad 2 4 psl 9 7 sta 14 40 ucr 14 39 Find command 1 17 flipping SMT components while dragging 4 12 while static 4 12 Index 5 footprint appending a definition to a library 10 29 boundary drawing 10 19 browser 10 30 changing assignments 10 2 10 38 copying 10 32 creating 10 8 editing 10 30 getting 10 30 machine placement center identifying 10 22 netlist errors 2 7 orientation marking 10 18 origin identifying 10 19 outline drawing 10 18 printing 10 35 removing from a library 10 34 saving a definition to a library 10 28 updating already placed 10 37 Footprint Editor multiple windows 10 9 starting 10 8 window 10 9 footprint library adding 10 5 browser 10 30 definitions 10
36. 3 rearranging the search order 10 7 Footprint Statistics report fpr 14 39 format photoplotting setting up 14 21 formatting drill symbols 13 15 forward ECO 12 7 applying 12 7 full screen crosshair 1 12 G gate type definitions more than one 11 11 one 11 10 generating an AutoCad DXF file 14 41 NC drill files 14 24 reports 14 32 Gerber output verifying 14 22 Gerber RS 274X format 14 17 getting a footprint 10 30 graphic layers 3 29 graphic objects arc 3 9 Index 6 arc center amp radius 3 13 arc coord amp radius 3 13 arc thru 3 points 3 12 circle 3 10 line 3 10 line coord 3 14 polyline 3 11 rectangle 3 12 rect coord 3 15 rect coord amp deltas 3 15 rect corner amp deltas 3 16 grid 1 11 displaying 3 8 _10 11 snap to pin threshold 6 10 8 4 grid spacing adding a new value 3 6 changing an existing value 3 7 setting 3 6 10 10 grid toolbar drop down list 1 10 H help context sensitive 1 33 highlighting nets 6 3 highlights clearing 6 4 hole adding 3 24 plated 3 24 plated adding 10 28 unplated 3 24 unplated adding 10 28 Hole Drill Schedule hdr 14 36 identifying footprint origin 10 19 machine placement center 10 22 importing a netlist from Schematics 2 5 a PADS format netlist 2 6 aperture definitions 14 20 DXF file 3 18 3 22 job definitions 14 11 tool definitions 14 30 input PADS format pad file 2 4 schematic nlf file 2 4
37. 3 Click Tools 4 Click Auto 5 Click Export 6 Type the filename for the tool definition ta file 7 Click OK to exit the NCD Tool Definition dialog box 8 Click OK to exit the Drill Output dialog box This initiates the NC drill file processing Hints and Tips e The Gerber files can be processed in two formats RS 274 D or RS 274 X The 274 D format is an earlier version and requires a separate aperture table file adf The 274 X format includes the aperture definitions within the Gerber files themselves e The following checklist identifies the files that will be Deliverables on generated from PCBoards which are typically required for page 14 43 the fabrication of the printed circuit board filename g01 Gerber files extension is the page gnn number filename glg Gerber Log File report of formatting information filename adf Aperture Definition File required with RS 274 D format B 34 Tutorial filename d01 Drill file filename tdf Tool Definition File maps drill sizes with tool codes filename hdr Hole Drill Report gives drill quantities amp plating information y Verifying Gerber Output e To confirm the accuracy of the Gerber output use the on page 14 22 Gerber readin function in PCBoards Create a new graphics layer using Layers from the Configure menu and make that the current layer Then point to Photoplot from the File menu and select Import Graphics to read in a particular Gerber file
38. 3 an Bae a EAE DAE ee abo Sow we a 2 4 Importing a Netlist from MicroSim Schematics 2 5 Importing a PADS format netlist 2 6 Using Interactive Netlist Readin o 2 6 Moditying an Existing Layout s 405 s sors age of Gk Se ee asiu 2 9 Creating a Layout On the Fly o o o oo o 2 9 Chapter 3 Contents v Saving Your Layout Automatically 0 2 0040 2 10 Hints and Tips 2 so eek aS ee ee AR EA RG eS 2 11 Defining the Circuit Board OVEIVIEW cio esos See gb Bw Oe eo ee e Bw a EE 3 1 Setting the Unit of Measure os ocs s sxe aca e ORR ES RRS Be EO 3 3 Sete Styles a ii 6 5 Baek eed hee fears Bed a OS ee Ge 3 4 Lime a d Are Styles s lt 44 444444464884 0484 288 248 4 2 3 4 TEXUS IES hs ee ee ho oS Hw A ees 3 4 Definim GdS gt soe aos poe FOG ed OO EEO PRE CES eS 3 6 Setting the Space oi seaca aoea Sadada decade eay Saga 3 6 Turning On the Snap Grid 2 2 2 200 2000 e 3 7 Displaying the Grid o se cc setesi asst eddar Re HE ea 3 8 Graphic OBJECTS s sig a sok ao Guar Bake e Bok Seok em Gk ek ea 3 9 AIC 6 ae 8 PR AE EES Fae oC ORNS Hae PERSE a dS Pe SESE ES 3 9 Ciele sortea eS os hE LS Se SE as eb Ss we 3 10 LINE ohh 8 AR ODA HER ES RAGS ER ee ee E 3 10 POLLS s s sose eo 4s oh AAA AAA 3 11 Recta gle am ara 2 ding hoe eo Sako ae ee Ga wae ee 3 12 More GraphiEs cisma Roo Ae Gee Ae ee a a AS 3 12 Atc Thri3 poms s e race cma
39. 4 0 04 6482864 2 8 oe ooo es 3 29 Layer Tag Assignments 2 2 a e eee eee eee 3 29 Layer Properties s 3 664 88 4 oe 4 ES Be EGO Be eR os 3 32 Layer Palts s ios 6 3 amp ar acti Bork QA de hee Soe 3 33 Creating a User Defined Layer o ooo o 3 35 Editing an Existing ayer 03 604 aca e os 3 37 Repositioning User Defined Layers 0 3 38 Deleting a User Defined Layer so oe cc ecs 6 6 4 an web amp BS 3 38 Creating Layer Pair 655442 6 2 owe we eRe wR SR OS 3 39 Deleting a Layer Pat s secca 646 4 06 4 6 ewe Pee ew RS 3 40 Changing the Layer Display sa cima Ds bes OSG eR SEO A 3 41 Turning Specific Layers On seon 4 rea tae aten Pe ee ee 3 41 Changing Layer Color o e e e 3 42 Making a Layer Current o e 3 42 Hints and TIPS s 0 e a Hae ew Gok id Be 3 43 Chapter 4 Arranging Components OVEIMICW 06 darisia reido ri a oa a 4 1 Understanding Connectivity e e 4 3 Logical Connections aee io a e A E 4 3 Ratsiand ratsmestS 46d 044 44494 a a 4 3 Physical Connections s ssr eas ds Bae rs Bane a 2S 4 4 NEIS so pt tek RR ADS ee Goh ao Ooo an a Oe ls 4 5 Floating Copper sos s shka eab da b 48 ob Soke eat Ge a we 4 6 Managing Rats 2 os gras RE GS ewe OEE Ha ee CREE a OEY aS 4 8 Optimizing Rats s s 3 5 2 6 op AGB es Qe ss Bee BS Bare E 4 8 Changing the Ratsnest Display 000 4 9 Cross Probim 2c ba wae be da
40. 4 04 204 oi oo G2 Wed eo RAE wa A 1 3 Configuring the PCBoards Environment 1 3 Initializing and Editing the Design o o 1 3 Validating the Desig s e eso no a A AA 1 4 Library Editing of Package Footprint and Padstack Definitions 1 4 Producing Manufacturing Output o o 1 5 Layout Database 2 64 2 8 8244 erada wi edd a 1 6 The Layout Editor Window s e o esce asoa e ci e enep ee ss 1 7 Men Bar secas duopa ea ke we ere Ba ds a E ds Se Rs 1 7 Toolbar Buttons 24 gas e PSS Oe Se PES ESE ESe Sw GS 1 8 Toolbar Drop Down Lists e uats cs Bab Ee are Baw Oe SS Be we 1 9 Work Afea o uscar Rae Oho RR oe Oo Dw ER ete eo 1 11 Coordinate SYSTEM oye ue dase a eH Res SD Ee Se He eS 1 11 GHG efe ds Ge her Re Eh OS es Oe A Gre 1 11 SAWS BaP Sus a ada a ud ALS MAS AS Sok a ee BO Bok wes 1 11 CURSOR SIVIGS 2 3 4 6 72 56R 6546 68028 e BAS OC 1 12 Full screen crosshait 4 4 0 2 meaa e a Soon whew 1 12 ElEGHING ObJEC S sopa po pei he Beds Hecke Gm dads es See dole aie owe ies 1 14 iv Contents Chapter 2 Selecting Objects One ataTime 2 2 00 1 14 selecting Groups OF Objects ss doc eu ci Ee SR WS ES 1 14 Using the Selection Filter 0 o edenneet 1 15 Using the Find Command o o e 1 17 Usine the Keyboard e satis a a ee A 5 1 18 Changing Views lt s r poccu on gone 4 RR He ESO A 1 19 PADEL ia Gok BS ES OS Ge a o 1 19 ZOO
41. 5 16 disconnecting pins 4 22 8 16 display layout object colors changing 3 37 5 5 redrawing 1 21 displaying the Grid 3 8 _10 11 drawing arc center amp radius 3 13 arc coord amp radius 3 13 arcs 3 9 arc thru 3 points 3 12 areafills 5 8 board outline 3 18 board signal keepin 3 25 circles 3 10 footprint boundary 10 19 footprint outline 10 18 keepouts 5 15 line coord 3 14 lines 3 10 polyline 3 11 rectangles 3 12 rect coord 3 15 rect coord amp deltas 3 15 rect corner amp deltas 3 16 voids 6 20 drawing pins in a radial pattern 10 17 individually 10 13 DRC 1 37 5 16 Batch 13 12 error examining 13 13 manufacturing minimums 5 16 On Line 13 11 setting areafill clearances 5 18 setting pad clearances 5 19 setting trace segment clearances 5 18 using Batch 5 21 using On Line 5 20 DRC Errors Report drc 13 13 _14 39 DRC layer 3 32 drill symbols formatting 13 15 drill table 14 25 DrillSymbol layer 3 32 DXF entity considerations 3 19 entity types 3 19 importing 3 18 3 22 layer 3 19 messages 3 21 E ECO applying backward 12 5 applying forward 12 7 backward bco 12 4 forward 12 7 editing AKO package definitions 11 14 an existing footprint 10 30 areafill attributes 5 9 existing layer properties 3 37 _5 4 line and arc styles 1 24 package definitions 11 16 padstack definitions 9 17 REFDES and Type_Name text display 13 4 text styles 1 25 trace styles
42. 6 6 SEG_WIDTH 6 6 attributes via VIA_PADSTACK 6 18 VIA_PROTECTED 6 18 VIA_TESTPOINT 6 18 audit file backward ECO blg 12 4 forward ECO flg 12 7 Auto Netlist Check command 12 10 AutoCAD DXF file 14 41 auto extend check box 1 15 automated assembly files 14 44 Automatic Loop Removal 6 11 8 5 Automatic Spoke Removal 6 24 automatically adding new jobs 14 3 creating new aperture definitions 14 17 creating tool definitions 14 25 reading the route file 7 8 saving layouts 2 10 Autopanning 1 20 autorouting board wide default rules 7 3 setting up 7 3 starting the autorouter 7 8 verifying net rules 7 6 backward ECO applying 12 5 Batch DRC 5 21 running 13 12 Best Rep check box 3 3 bias routing 3 36 5 4 Bill of Materials bom 14 33 user defined properties resistors and capacitors 14 33 blind via 6 16 board fabrication files 14 43 board outline drawing 3 18 layer 3 18 board signal keepin drawing 3 25 editing boundaries 3 25 BoardOutline layer 3 31 BoardSigKeepin layer 3 31 Bottom layer 3 30 boundaries editing areafill 5 11 board signal keepin 3 25 keepout 5 15 void 6 20 BoundaryBottom layer 3 31 BoundaryTop layer 3 29 browser footprint 10 30 buried via 6 16 C CCT Net Rules command 7 6 CCT Setup command 7 4 CCTPlanePCT msim ini file 5 13 centerpoint new panning 1 19 changing an existing grid spacing value 3 7 attribute display parameters 1 31
43. Click e List Components button for a list of components with packaging information e List Footprints button for a list of generic footprints All configured libraries for the list you select display in the Libraries box 4 16 Arranging Components If you You can selected List Edit the package Components definition by clicking the Edit Package button See Editing a Package Definition on age 11 16 for details List Edit the footprint Footprints definition by clicking the Edit Footprint button See Editing an Existing Footprint on page 10 30 for details Select the libraries that contain the components or footprints you need All libraries in the Libraries box are initially selected You can e deselect the ones you aren t interested in e click the Unselect All button and individually select the ones you want to work with All components or footprints in the libraries you selected are displayed in the In Library list In the Component Name box Footprint Name if you select the List Footprints button enter the component or footprint you want to add to the layout You can use a wildcard to narrow the list to a group of components Example Results x lists all component or footprint names that start with x aa lists all component or footprint names containing x tx lists all component or footprint names ending with x x x lists all component or footprint names that s
44. Gate Type Gates ee Change Delete OK Cancel o o Type the number of the gate type in the Gate Type text box for example type 1 is a NOR and type 2 is an ORNOR Type the gate designators A B C in the Gate text box Click the Add button Repeat steps b through d until you have defined all gate types Click OK 11 12 Creating and Editing Packages To define packages with shared pins 1 Define shared pins a Click Edit Shared Pins Pin Name Pin No Save Assignment Delete b Type the pin name in the Pin Name text box Note fyou are using MicroSim Schematics netlist as the input to PCBoards the pin name in the package definition must match the pin name used in the symbol Type the pin number in the Pin No text box Click Save Assignment Repeat steps b through d for each pin in the footprint Click OK 0 Qa 90 Saving the definition To save the new package definition 1 Click OK to exit the New Package Definition dialog box 2 Click OK to exit package library dialog box Creating a New Package 11 13 Creating AKO Package Definitions You can link package definitions to a base definition By linking you can change all linked definitions by changing the base definition A linked definition is called an AKO A Kind Of However to create an AKO definition specific conditions must first be met To create an AKO package definition 1 Ensure that the new
45. Hints and Tips 8 17 Use on the keyboard to move a selected trace or traces one grid at a time By careful selection of specific segments traces can be shifted or relocated easily For instance selecting two joined trace segments allows you to move the corner The Smart Functions are all available anytime you are editing traces They require no special command or mode Remember to take advantage of the ability to add or delete objects to the group of selected items by holding down while clicking with the left mouse button When copying and pasting traces the copies automatically assume the net names of the nets at the new pin locations Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Overview This chapter discusses padstack libraries and gives you procedures for working with padstack definitions The following sections are contained in this chapter Understanding Padstack Definitions on page 9 3 discusses padstack concepts and uses Understanding the Library Structure on page 9 4 discusses the default padstack and user defined libraries Managing Padstack Libraries on page 9 7 explains how to set up the default library It also discusses how to load and export libraries Creating Padstacks on page 9 10 explains how to create a padstack if a definition does not exist Editing Padstacks on page 9 17 tells you how to change an existing padstack Deleting Padstacks on page 9 18 explains how to delete a padstack
46. IV Placement Center VV Areafills T Logical Connections v V Keepouts V Graphics Other Enable P Auto Extend Selection Alt i me I Limit to Current Layer Ctrl Cancel If you want only a few items included 1 Click Exclude All 2 Click only those few items you want included 2 Select options in this dialog box by clicking in the box next to the option If you select Placement Center the machine placement center becomes the reference point during interactive movement of components a i If you want only a few items Note An exception to this rule is if you select one or A a excluded more pins of a component and try to move them the entire component moves and the pin you 1 Click Include All clicked on becomes the placement reference 2 Clear only those few items point you want excluded 3 Select or clear the Auto Extend check box With Auto Extend Selection selected the layout editor selects the entire object even when you click only on a 1 16 Using the Layout Editor When filtering is enabled only selected objects are included in a subsequent select operation constituent element of the object Auto Extend Selection affects object selection as follows e Selects an entire component when you click on a pin reference designator label or component type name label e Selects an entire net when you click on a rat trace segment via or areafill e Selects any entire object when y
47. Interactive Netlist Readin 2 6 interactively adding new jobs 14 6 creating new aperture definitions 14 17 creating tool definitions 14 27 reading the route file 7 9 invoking commands using the toolbar 1 8 islands 6 23 J job adding automatically 14 3 adding from an existing definition 14 8 adding interactively 14 6 ASCII description file glg 14 15 exporting definitions 14 9 importing definitions 14 11 printing definitions 14 12 setup 14 3 updating an existing definition 14 9 K keepin board signal drawing 3 25 keeping board signal editing boundaries 3 25 keepout editing boundaries 5 15 keepout adding 5 15 keyboard controls shortcuts A 1 L lands See pins laser plotters 14 17 layer 3 30 AssyDrwBottom 3 31 AssyDrwTop 3 30 board outline 3 18 BoardOutline 3 31 BoardSigKeepin 3 31 Bottom 3 30 BoundaryBottom 3 31 BoundaryTop 3 29 changing the configuration 5 2 configuring 3 28 destination 3 19 display color changing 3 42 DRC 3 32 DrillSymbol 3 32 DXF 3 19 editing properties 3 37 5 4 graphic 3 29 making current 3 37 3 42 5 5 pairs 3 33 PasteMaskBottom 3 30 PasteMaskTop 3 30 plane creating 5 13 properties Bias 3 33 Color 3 33 Display 3 32 Name 3 32 Protect 3 33 Tag 3 32 Type 3 32 Ratsnest 3 32 routing bias 3 36 _5 4 signal 3 28 SilkBottom 3 31 SilkTop 3 30 SMTAssyDrwBottom 3 31 SMTAssyDrwTop 3 29 SolderMaskBottom 3 31 t
48. Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers 3 Assign a padstack name 9 12 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks The suggested format is shape type pad size drill size additional descriptor Where shape is round square rectangular or oval type is either through hole through or surface mount SMT pad size is one dimension for round and square or two dimensions separated by an x for oval and rectangular drill size is the size of the drill additioinal descriptor is any additional comments or descriptions you want For example rnd 065 031 rnd thru 065 pad 031 drill oval 100x025 oval smt 100 x 025 pad sq 080 040 060 square thru 080 pad 040 drill 060 inner pad Enter a padstack description Assigning Default Properties To assign default properties 1 Define the Template pad Every definition has a Template layer The Template layer is used to define default pad properties that are applied to signal layers that are not accounted for in the padstack definition Also when creating or editing a padstack definition a given layer can be set to match the pad properties of the Template layer Within the Pad Definition frame a Click Template in the On Layer list box On Layer lists the signal layers for the current design When selecting an entry in this list corresponding values are displayed in the pad property dialog box controls Select the pad shape from the Shape drop down
49. Overview xxiii MicroSim packages PCBoards footprints ZA padstacks SPECCTRA Autorouter me reports omum drill files Gerber files xxiv Before You Begin How to Use this Guide This guide is designed so you can quickly find the information you need to use PCBoards This guide assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Windows NT or 95 including how to use icons menus and dialog boxes It also assumes you have a basic understanding about how Windows manages applications and files to perform routine tasks such as starting applications and opening and saving your work If you are new to Windows please review your Microsoft Windows User s Guide Typographical Conventions Before using PCBoards it is important to understand the terms and typographical conventions used in this documentation This guide generally follows the conventions used in the Microsoft Windows User s Guide guide Procedures for performing an operation are generally notated with the following typographical conventions Notation Examples Description R Press Ctrl R A specific key or key stroke on the keyboard monospace Type VAC or Literal commands text font analog slb entered from the keyboard or file names monospace The formatis width Variable text or filenames font value units entered from the keyboard The s indicate optional parameters a y y Y Tip providing advice
50. PIN_PADSTACK attribute whose value is the name of its assigned padstack definition You can change the padstack assignment by changing the value of the attribute to a different padstack name You can also add your own user defined and special system attributes e g Net_Fixed Net_Clearance Adding Attributes To add attributes 1 Select the object in the layout From the Edit menu select Attributes Click New Name A Value Cancel In the Name text box type an attribute name In the Value text box type a value Click OK to exit the New Attributes dialog box Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each attribute you want to add O N Oo fF Click OK to exit the Attributes dialog box Adding and Changing Object Attributes 1 31 Changing Attribute Values To modify attributes for a single object Select the object for which you want to change attributes From the Edit menu select Attributes Select the name of the attribute to be modified In the Value text box type in a new value Click Change oa fF OO N a Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all relevant attributes have been changed 7 Click OK Changing the Display Parameters of Attributes Some attributes have values which can be displayed in the work area For example component instance has a REFDES attribute which defines a unique identifier To modify display parameters 1 From the Edit menu select Attributes 2 Choose an attribute
51. TIPS e se ora as e ad id omg id a t 7 10 Editing Traces OVEIVIEW uti AAA ls Aa 8 1 Understanding the Smart Functions o e 8 2 Understanding Smart Snaps seres ros as aw ae 8 2 Snap threshold id e oa e a A A OE 8 4 Using Automatic Loop Removal s sea cpad cara sek pisies 8 5 Understanding Smart Select o o ar asedh 8 6 Understanding R bberbanding se soz rica Sk Gee e 8 7 Understanding Smart Move oo ay a 8 8 Cutting Copying and Pasting Traces s e eens iore aora aah a e a 8 11 Cuttin Traces e s e eaa Moe OH ORE RADA 8 11 COPYING Haces pai e eee amp os 4 td a aa 8 11 Pastine WaCeS s 4 orbe de Oe Sa we ede eH HSE DE SS 8 12 Chapter 9 Contents ix Deleting Trace Segments and Vias o o 020004 8 13 Adding Connections e isi s edad Pda tic GS A ES Gre YOR eh oes 8 14 Deletine ConmectionS 24644544848 HP BROKE HARES ESD awd Eos 8 16 Hints and Tips s oai a pona euie 0 904 ocho BS oe dd pale de he os 8 17 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks OVEIVICWs S408 E Pas Bak te Be Bab ade a Bas A 9 1 Understanding Padstack Definitions o o 9 3 Understanding the Library Structure o o e 9 4 Library DElniti0Ns gt 240 duna e a o CH ORG Gd ES 9 5 Managing Padstack Libraries se ocea tedere eraren ai 9 7 Setting Up the Padstack Library suaa e 9 7 Loading Padstacks v s src sra 9 8 Exporting PadstaCkS sa o
52. Trace Attributes Availabletor Edit lt s scce sacer eoret rie t 6 6 Trace Placement Modes oa s ge oa SR ra wd a 6 7 Editable Vid Properties caiste it Bo eh Se ahd Seb B Grae aud 6 18 Board wide Default Rules uc ee Re Re ee a 7 3 Drill Symbol Orders s s sasas a cece aries Gee Ba ae ge a ew ES E 14 25 Files for Board Fabrication lt o oro peda ea dini 14 43 Files for Automated Assembly o o 14 44 Keyboard Shortcuts coco r aros 684864065 08 aaa A A 1 Before You Begin Welcome to MicroSim Welcome to the MicroSim family of products Whichever programs you have purchased we are confident that you will find that they meet your circuit design needs They provide an easy to use integrated environment for creating simulating and analyzing your circuit designs from start to finish xx Before You Begin MicroSim PCBoards Overview What Is MicroSim PCBoards MicroSim PCBoards is PCB layout software that allows you to specify printed circuit board structure as well as the components metal e g copper and graphics required for fabrication After defining the layout PCBoards aids you in the production of artwork used by the manufacturing process including information about the electrical and physical characteristics of the PCB layout To take advantage of all PCBoard s features use it with MicroSim Schematics as a front end MicroSim Schematics reads circuit designs directly into
53. Wire Length Simple Daisy on Mixed Layer 2 Review the default settings in each dialog box section You can route using these values or change them as appropriate to the design requirements For detailed explanation of the various parameters and advanced autorouting commands ADV DFM HYB and FST see the online MicroSim PCBoards Autorouter User s Guide Verifying Advanced Net Rules 7 7 3 Click OK to accept all values 7 8 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter Starting the Autorouter The autorouter evaluates the design based on the rules defined during setup From the evaluation it determines the best strategy for fanout routing and cleanup It then performs the routing using the SmartRoute algorithm In most cases routing is completed without further interaction from the designer To start the autorouter Select CCT Autoroute from the Tools menu After autorouting you can choose the method for reading the route file rte from SPECCTRA into PCBoards You can e have PCBoards read the file automatically e read the file in interactively Reading the route file automatically To have PCBoards automatically read the route file from SPECCTRA every time you run the autorouter 1 Select Options from the Tools menu Options Lx M Interaction Preferences 7 Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold E Smil C mm Rotation Increment 80 Deg I Best Rep
54. Y Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC DRC Sound Y Crosshair Y Auto Netlist Check FT Optimize Rats Y Auto Loop Remove Fill C Outline One Pass Formal Zoom Pan Delta Scale e Coarse 25 I Current Last Fi so 1 Finej ES Autopan Autosave T Enable I Enable Sensitivity foo ms a Ena Hot Zone 1 TFT Save Settings Cancel Starting the Autorouter 7 9 2 Select Auto complete CCT 3 Click OK Reading the route file interactively To read the route file into PCBoards only when you are ready 1 Prior to beginning the autoroute session ensure Auto complete CCT Options dialog box from the Tools menu is cleared Clearing this box causes SPECCTRA to maintain control after autorouting is finished You must interactively exit SPECCTRA You must also interactively read the route file into PCBoards In SPECCTRA select Quit from the File menu SPECCTRA displays a confirmation box Click Quit Activate the layout editor if it is not active Select CCT Read Routes from the Tools menu 7 10 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter Ka ints and Tips When autorouting is completed the routing information will be read back into PCBoards automatically To disable this feature select Options from the Tools menu and clear Auto complete CCT If this is disabled you must use CCT Read Routes from the Tools menu to read in the routes after
55. a library For them to be automatically available to all layouts without having to import them save them into the library named in the msim ini file To not overwrite this library with program updates ensure the name is different from the sta ps1 library When you create new padstacks in the footprint editor PCBoards prompts you to save the definition to an external library file If you create a new definition in the layout editor it does not prompt you You must export the definition using Export Padstacks New padstack definitions require assigning pad shapes and dimensions to the system defined signal and mask layers When creating a definition where all signal layers use the same pad shape and dimensions the Template pad values should be defined first The remaining signal layers can then have these default values assigned to them Lastly solder and paste masks are derived from the Top or Bottom layer pad properties as follows e SolderMaskTop layer mask values are derived from Top layer pads expanded by the swell value e SolderMaskBottom mask values are derived from Bottom layer pads expanded by the swell value e PasteMaskTop mask values are derived from Top layer pads reduced by the shrink value e PasteMaskBottom mask values are derived from Bottom layer pads reduced by the shrink value Creating Padstacks 9 11 Beginning the Definition To start the new padstack definition process 1 Select Pa
56. a specified test grid through hole pins can also be used Test points cannot be covered by components Physical holes which extend through all layers of the board A T shaped intersection of three trace segments belonging to the same net Tool code for a given hole diameter as it relates to a given vendor s NC drill device A conductive path on a PCB composed of one or more segments Glossary 8 trace bias trace grid trombone via via grid void work area Preferred direction for trace routing used primarily for autorouting Uniform spacing used to position traces when autorouting A type of routing pattern that increases the trace length between pins of a connection by causing the trace to reverse or fold back on itself E A conductive transition or plated hole between layers of the PCB Blind vias extend between a surface layer and an internal layer Buried vias extend between two internal layers Uniform spacing used to position vias when autorouting A polygonal area used to define a clear region no metal within an areafill Graphic region within the PCBoards window used to create and edit either the layout Layout Editor or component footprint Footprint Editor Index A adding a keepout 5 15 a new grid spacing value 3 6 components 4 15 connections 4 21 8 14 footprint library 10 5 holes 3 24 new jobs automatically 14 3 new jobs from an existing definition 14 8 ne
57. attribute values 1 31 existing aperture definitions 14 19 footprint assignments 10 2 10 38 layer configuration 5 2 layer display 3 41 layer display color 3 42 layout object display colors 3 37 5 5 line and arc styles 3 4 object attributes 1 30 object orientation 4 12 padstack assignments 9 19 padstack definitions 9 17 pin padstack assignments 10 26 plane layer coverage percentage 5 14 scrollbar movement 1 19 text styles 3 4 the ratsnest display 4 9 tool definition 14 29 views 1 19 checking for unrouted nets and pins 13 10 choosing print method 14 13 printer output device 14 13 circle drawing 3 10 Clear Current Selection box 1 18 clearance manufacturing minimums 5 16 setting areafill 5 18 setting pad 5 19 setting trace segment 5 18 clearing highlighted nets 6 4 codes DCode 14 17 TCode 14 24 colors setting output 14 13 comparing netlists 12 10 Component Description file cdf 14 33 Component Locations report loc 14 35 components adding 4 15 copying 4 18 cutting 4 18 deleting 4 20 pasting 4 19 Configure Styles command 3 4 configuring layers 3 28 Connection command 4 21 8 14 connections adding 4 21 8 14 deleting 4 22 8 16 logical 4 3 physical 4 4 connectivity 4 3 context sensitive help 1 33 Index 3 control codes DCode 14 17 TCode 14 24 controls keyboard A 1 coordinate system 1 11 copying components 4 18 footprints 10 32 trace segments 8 11 Cre
58. can only be paired with a layer appearing below it in the Configure Layers sort order Likewise a layer that is selected as a lower layer can only be paired with a layer appearing above it in the Configure Layers sort order Modifying the Layer Configuration 5 7 If layer order is changed thus invalidating layer pair configurations the offending layer pair definitions are automatically deleted From the Upper list box select one entry From the Lower list box select one entry Click the Add button Click OK a A WO N Deleting a Layer Pair To delete a layer pair 1 From the Configure menu select Layer Pairs 2 From the Layer Pair list select one entry Layer Pair Upper Lower lists the set of configured layer pairs The current layer pair is shown in the Layer Pair text box Click the Delete button Click OK 5 8 Preparing the Layout for Routing The areafill clearance value only establishes the required clearance from other areafills on different nets Drawing and Editing Areafills for Plane Layers Drawing Areafills PCBoards allows you to create solid conductive regions called areafills on signal layers They are useful for creating common regions for power and ground connections As you create areafills PCBoards performs certain requirements automatically e Ifyou place areafills where objects already exist PCBoards automatically pours the areafills around those objects providing proper clearance
59. chipcap flb chipres flb cpga flb cafp flb csdip flb csdipsm flb dip flb dipsm flb dshell flb 3 Select the position in the list above where the new library file should be located To append to the end of the list click on the blank entry after the last file name in the list 4 Either Managing Footprint Library Files 10 7 e type the name of the footprint library file including the 1b extension in the Library Name text box e click the Browse button and select the footprint library file name from the list Click the Add button The library file is added to the PCBOARDS FOOTPRINTS section of msim ini Click OK to exit the Setup Footprint Libraries dialog box Click OK again to return to the layout editor Rearranging the Search Order When adding a footprint placement in the search list is important If there are duplicate footprint names the footprint editor uses only the first one it encounters To rearrange the search order for files 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 as shown in Adding a Footprint Library on page 10 206 Select the entry to be moved and click the Delete button to remove it Select the position in the list above which the library file should be located Type the file name in the Footprint text box or use Browse Click the Add button 10 8 Creating and Editing Footprints Creating a New Footprint There are three distinct design phases when creating a footprint e The footpr
60. cio a poke eta a Gk a ec OR Ga is 9 9 Creating Padstacks os s os 4 4 646 88S be mee PERG ORS OE Ew eo 9 10 Beginning the Definition sassi caos Seas be rs BGs aT aed Boa ahs 9 11 Assigning Default Properties o o 9 12 Defining Drill Parameters si e poes 4 54 8 ar a A 9 14 Defining Mask Properties seme a a dd do 9 15 Removing Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers 9 15 Saving the DELIDII N a acesi os RAE 9 16 Editing Padstacks 2 144 404 4400 4 9d G4n a a 4 e Ode ww de 9 17 Deleuns Padstacks s 4 46 6 a hoe a oS a ww Wk Sr 9 18 Changing Padstack Assignments 000000004 9 19 Hints a d TIPS Soca Soh lo Gees Bok Biers Saat ew Blak bra ee are 9 20 Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Footprints OVEIVIEW ms edb bb dee Me we woe oe AN e eee 10 1 Understanding the Library Structure eos o es swis eesis snsd 10 3 Library Definitions 44 44 4464 4 64642468 484648 bas ai 10 3 Managing Footprint Library Files s o o 10 5 Adding a Footprint Libtaty oir 64 Ge a ee e a a ea 10 5 Rearranging the Search Order gt oea coag o ooo o 10 7 Creating a New Footprint 2 eos Bae Ae are a 10 8 Starting the Footprint Editor s sr ee sacs ea o 10 8 Setting the Name of the Footprint Definition 10 9 Setting Unit of Measure ser cae aa a OR oR e 10 10 Setin Gnid Spacing Sig hog ht Ged Greek AOS RAE Bok o FR Gok 10 10 Turning the Sn
61. complete ive 2 N Converging traces N gt Ymmi and objects being gt moved during trace segment move after trace segment move Understanding Smart Move Smart Move lets you move trace elements orthogonally without Note You must select in the losing the x axis or y axis positions of the trace ends depending middle of the trace you are on trace orientation and direction of movement This is true even moving if the snap grid is enabled and the trace you selected lies between grid points There are four situations in which smart move is effective when the snap grid is enabled Horizontal trace in a vertical direction When you select and move a horizontal trace in a vertical direction PCBoards maintains the x axis positions of both ends of the trace even if the trace lies between grid points 6 14 Routing Interactively X axis coordinates maintained even though they lie between grid points PHH Segment move completed N Horizontal segment gt Ymmi being moved vertically during vertical move after vertical move Vertical trace in a horizontal direction When you select and move a vertical trace in a horizontal direction PCBoards maintains the y axis positions of both ends of the trace even if the trace lies between grid points Y axis coordinates maintained even though they lie Segment move completed between grid points N Vertical segment Ymmi being moved horizontally during
62. connections PCBoards supports different clearance values on individual trace segments within a given net xxii Before You Begin Editing Graphical editing with no extra steps You can select and drag components traces or text to a new location as well as reshape trace geometries using the same techniques In addition PCBoards offers dynamic neck up down rubberbanding and automatic connect for pasted traces Full undo and redo functions to back edits out step by step to the last save of the design Integrated component footprint editing Footprint Editor with automatic generation of simple patterns pin arrays and radial pins Integrated component package editing Integrated padstack editing Design Change Tracking Tracking of Engineering Change Orders ECOs from the schematic design created in Schematics forward annotation Tracking of ECOs from the board layout for application to the design in Schematics back annotation Output Flexible generation of fabrication artwork and informational reports for use by the manufacturer AutoCAD DXF output for dimensional fabrication drawings MicroSim symbols Schematics packages MicroSim PSpice Optimizer PLSyn MicroSim PSpice A D PSpice PLogic MicroSim Parts MODEL BOF models gt or fe evice Probe database MicroSim MicroSim PCBoards
63. continues Creating the Board Outline 3 19 You can associate more than one DXF layer with one destination layer but you cannot associate more than one destination layer with one DXF layer 3 20 Defining the Circuit Board All imported entities are given PCBoards entity attributes The result is that polyline segments with non zero width have rounded line ends Entities with zero width are given a width of 1 mil 3 D Entities PCBoards does not support 3 D graphics Any entities or polylines which contain two or more points with different Z coordinate values will be ignored Only entities on the x y plane or a plane parallel to the x y plane are imported Extruded Entities Entities that have an extrusion direction which is not identical to the positive world Z axis will be ignored Insert Entities PCBoards ignores certain attributes of Insert entities e PCBoards ignores Insert entities with different x and y scale factors A warning message is posted to the Message Viewer for each Insert entity that is ignored for this reason e Z scale factors in Insert entities are ignored e PCBoards has no mechanism of associating drawing entities into a group or block When blocks are imported they lose their block structure and hierarchy though the entities are still imported The result is the same as if all blocks had been exploded before import PCBoards ignores recursive Insert entities in blocks that have them PCBoards will
64. create a new job definition from an existing definition Job Setup r Job Selection Current Job Name puto Photoplot Job ll Auto Photoplot Job Photoplot rc Job Settings Job Type Photopiat y Plot Origin mil Center of Rotation mil x fo x fo T Rotate 90 fo y fo Scale 1 rob Pages o sotoplot Auto Print Job Print Page Lever 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E New Delete 1 Select the existing job from which you want to create a new definition 2 Click Copy Copy creates a new job definition that is a copy of the currently selected job definition The new job name is automatically setto copied job description unique integer number 3 In the Current Job Name box type the name you want to give the copied job Press to put the new name into the job list Enter job settings if needed see Entering Job Settings on page 14 6 for procedures 6 Configure job pages if needed see Configuring Job Pages on page 14 7 7 Click OK to exit the Job Setup dialog box Setting up Jobs 14 9 Updating Existing Jobs To update an existing definition Import Jobs Delete Job Setup Lx rob Selection Job Settings tiren lb Nana T Plot Origin mil Center of Rotation mi OK uto Photoplot Job z j0 0 T Rotate 90 Cancel E opos yfo yfo Scale 1 otoplo m Job Pages Page aver 1 Auto fps 3 4 Filter A Fin ee 7 F Trace Segmen
65. defines properties required to generate device specific control statements Note You should contact your fabrication vendor to determine any formatting concerns Photoplotting 14 21 To set up the format 1 Point to Photoplot in the File menu and select Format Photoplot Data Format Oumpuustangand IX G54 before Aperture Change as 274x X Include Comment Blocks G04 Zero Suppression l Use Metric Units Trailing Digits Integer Decimal E a F Save Settings 2 Select the output file format from the Output Standard drop down list Output Standard defines the photoplot formatting standard RS 274 D Or RS 274 X to be used when generating the photoplot output file 3 Select a zero suppression option Zero Suppression is used to either exclude leading or trailing zeros or to include all zeros in the output 4 Select the number of integer digits to be used in coordinate values Note tis advisable to set this Digits Integer defines the number of digits 1 5 in the to 3 ar h igh er when Use integer portion of a coordinate s decimal number value Metric Units is selected 5 Select the number of decimal digits to be used in coordinate values Digits Decimal defines the number of digits 1 5 in the fractional portion of a coordinate s decimal number value 6 Select or clear G54 Before Aperture Change Selecting G54 Before Aperture Change produces DCodes of the form G54DCode when generati
66. definition from a library 9 2 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Changing Padstack Assignments on page 9 19 discusses how to change the padstack associated with a pin or via Hints and Tips on page 9 20 gives you helpful suggestions concerning the material covered in this chapter Understanding Padstack Definitions 9 3 Understanding Padstack Definitions Pads also known as lands are square rectangular round or oval shaped metal areas on a given layer surrounding a component pin or via Since a component pin or via can extend through multiple layers pads must be defined for each relevant layer Taken together these form a padstack definition A padstack definition defines the properties of the metal pad and drill dimensions for a pin or via on each relevant signal layer This definition also defines the properties of solder and paste masks using swell and shrink values as applied to a given pad respectively Padstack definitions are used within footprint definitions to define pads and masks for the system defined signal and mask layers only Top Bottom SolderMaskTop SolderMaskBottom PasteMaskTop and PasteMaskBottom When a component is placed in a design the padstack definition for any additional user defined signal layers in the board structure is adjusted Every pin and via instance in the layout database must have a corresponding padstack definition The layout editor automatic
67. dialog box 9 Click OK to run the report Component Locations Report Component Locations 1oc file extension lists for each component instance its reference designator layer name origin and machine placement center x y coordinates and rotation angle 14 36 Postprocessing Aperture Information Report Aperture Information apr file extension lists for each layout object in the design its photoplotter mechanism drawn and or flashed shape assigned aperture code DCode height where applicable width and pad rotation angle where applicable Hole Drill Schedule Report The Hole Drill Schedule har file extension takes two different forms depending on the presence or absence of blind and buried vias If there are no blind or buried vias the report lists the total hole count in the layout and for each hole e the drill diameter e the assigned tool code TCode e the total number of holes corresponding to a specific tool definition e the drill symbol associated with the tool definition e spindle speed e feed e whether it is plated Plt or non plated Npt For layouts that use blind amp buried vias the Hole Drill Schedule is a more specific listing broken down by the particular layer stacks that constitute the start and finish layers for each type of blind or buried via The following tables show an example of each format Example 1 Drill schedule with normal vias Tool oe T Pii Pit Tl 20
68. drop down list in the drop down list in the toolbar toolbar To change the clearance value for individual trace segments 1 Select one or more trace segments Shortcut double click on a trace 2 From the Edit menu select Attributes or type FT 3 Change the SEG_CLEARANCE attribute value 4 Click OK Note The clearance value assigned will not override the minimum manufacturing copper to copper clearance The minimum manufacturing clearance is the smallest value used see Setting minimum manufacturing values on page 5 16 Setting areafill clearances When you draw areafills their clearance requirements are initialized from on of two sources e Ifa clearance has been set for the net either from Schematics or the CCT Net Rule dialog box the areafill values will take on the net value Net clearances override the e If no clearance has been set for the net clearances are set currenttrace style showing in the according to the current trace style showing in the Styles Style drop down list in the drop down list in the toolbar toolbar Using Design Rule Check DRC 5 19 To change the clearance value for individual areafills 1 Select one or more areafills 2 From the Edit menu select Attributes Shortcut double click on a trace or 3 Change the FILL_CLEARANCE attribute value type Fil 4 Click OK Note The clearance value assigned will not override the minimum manufacturing copper to copper clearance T
69. duplicate pin names If you have not yet assigned a name to the definition the footprint editor requests entry of a name It displays any other conflicts in an error log 2 Correct any footprint definition errors and return to step 1 If there are no errors proceed to step 3 3 Either click on the name of the file to which the new definition should be appended or type the name in the File Name Text box 4 Click OK to exit the dialog box 10 30 Creating and Editing Footprints Shortcut Editing an Existing Footprint You can edit all entities of an existing footprint by selecting it from its library and using the Edit Draw and Footprint menus from the footprint editor To edit a footprint Select Footprint Editor from the Library menu Select Open from the File menu Select the library that contains the footprint you want to edit bb O N a Select Get from the footprint menu Footprint Browser Lx Footprint Name piPta Footprint Properties Cancel No Pins Technology fia THRU He Statistics lt lt Basic Search Suites Eea Selected footprint is in Dip flb e Footprint name defines the name of the currently selected footprint e No Pins defines the number of pins on the footprint definition e Technology defines the mounting technology used for the footprint THRU SMT or ALL Editing an Existing Footprint 10 31 Select the footprint you want to edit You can search for comp
70. editor use it to add a pin to the footprint definition 1 10 Using the Layout Editor Toolbar Drop down Lists Table 1 2 Snap Grid in the Configure menu List defines the selections in the grid drop down list Grid Layer Clicking cycles the context between single layers and layer pairs in the Layer drop down list see Configuring Layers on page 3 28 Clickin cycles the context a 7 Style among types of styles in the Style drop down list See Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles on page 1 24 for defining the styles shown in the drop down list Use Sets the current grid spacing Sets the work area to a new board layer or layer pair This drop down list changes context depending on the focus of the current task When in single layer mode the displayed value is the name of the current board layer Layers in the Configure menu defines the name and properties of each board layer in the drop down list selection set When in layer pair mode the displayed value is the name of the current layer pair Layer Pairs in the Configure menu defines the name and properties of each layer pair in the drop down list selection set Sets the default properties of graphics lines and arcs text traces layout editor vias and pins Footprint Editor when interactively placing or drawing them This drop down list changes context depending the current task For instance when using Text from the Draw menu the Styl
71. frame choose the line end processing method e Output as BLOCKs QD N Ende Tal one block one polyline e Output as separate entities K gg O Track one polyline one polyline e Do not output ON Endpoints vag not output e one polyli ye In the DXF unit box enter the unit values The DXF file is defined only in units rather than in inches millimeters etc It may be necessary to define a different unit equivalent depending on the CAD tool Click OK The DXF Export dialog box appears so you can name the file and specify a path Deliverables 14 43 Deliverables Certain electronic files are required to generate the artwork and drill instructions that are needed for fabricating a printed circuit board These files the output from PCBoards are the deliverables to the fabrication shop Following is a listing of the output files that are generated by PCBoards These files should be collected and sent to the fabrication shop when you are ready to begin building the circuit board Files Required for Board Fabrication Table 14 2 Files for Board Fabrication File Name Description filename gnn Gerber laserplotting file s required for producing final artwork filename glg Descriptive log file for Gerber laserplotting file s filename apr Aperture table report file containing sizes d codes etc in readable format filename adf Separate aperture file required for plotting Gerber files
72. from the File menu select Exit e double click the Control menu box in the upper left corner of the Message Viewer window Using Design Rule Check DRC 1 37 Using Design Rule Check DRC The electrical integrity of a design can be checked at any time using Design Rules Check DRC function The DRC scans the design for e short circuits e clearance violations between two electrical objects trace segments pins vias areafills and between an electrical object and a hole or text e signal keepout violations trace segments vias and areafills that are totally or partially inside e signal keepin violations trace segments vias and areafills that are totally or partially outside e trace width violations As violations are detected PCBoards displays informative messages in the status bar and an X at the location where the violation is detected Later violation messages can be browsed and corrected See Using Design Rule Check DRC on page 5 16 for a detailed explanation of DRC Starting a New Layout Overview This chapter presents the basic steps and techniques required to create a board layout using the layout editor Topics covered are Starting the Layout Editor on page 2 3 describes the various methods for starting the layout editor Starting a New Layout on page 2 4 discusses various ways to begin a new layout Saving Your Layout Automatically on page 2 10 explains how you can have PCB
73. in the list 3 Change the Value text box to a padstack definition name that has been configured for the footprint editor Click Change Click OK To change assignments for multiple pins Draw an outline border around all of the pins to be modified Select Attributes from the Edit menu or Change the Value text box to a padstack definition name that has been configured for the footprint editor Click Change Click OK Adding Holes You can place unplated and plated holes in the layout A circle reflecting the specified diameter is placed on the uppermost displayed signal layer A corresponding drill symbol graphic is placed on the DrillSymbols layer 10 28 Creating and Editing Footprints DRC Emil Cancel After placing a hole you can edit the Diameter and DRC properties using Attributes from the Edit menu Note PCBoards saves new definitions locally to the current layout If you want to use them in other layouts you must save them into a library It is best if you save them to a user defined library rather than to libraries supplied by MicroSim Installation of new software versions overwrites the system supplied libraries Adding unplated holes To place unplated holes 1 Select Add Hole from the Draw menu 2 Enter diameter and unit values in the Diameter text box 3 Enter clearance and unit values in the DRC text box DRC defines the required clearance between the hole and other layout objects
74. list Shape defines the geometrical form of a normal pad Valid shapes are round oval square and rectangular Enter pad width in the Width text box Width defines the breadth of the pad shape Format is width value units Enter pad height in the Height text box Height defines the rise of the pad for rectangular and oval shapes Format is height value units Enter DRC clearance in the Clearance text box Clearance defines the space required between the pad and other layout objects Format is clearance value units Enter Spoke Width and Orientation properties for areafill connections in the Thermal Relief frame Spoke Width defines the width of the metal connecting to the areafill Format is spoke width units Orientation defines an angular offset in degrees 45 or 90 for spoke placement relative to one of the following e For pins the corresponding component angle e For vias the horizontal axis 2 Define the Component Top layer pad a Select the layer name for the Top layer Component by default in the On Layer list box Click on Match Template to assign the Template pad properties to the Top layer Creating Padstacks 9 13 Thermal Relief Parameters are used to set properties for up to four connections spokes to areafills placed at 90 angles to each other Individual spokes are present if they connect with an areafill of the same net If there is no available connection for the spoke
75. menu These operations delete the markers for prior violations but do not trigger an automatic check To run batch DRC 1 Either e group select the portion of the layout to be considered for DRC e select nothing to check the full board 2 Select DRC from the Tools menu Verifying Design Rules 13 13 Examining DRC Errors After running DRC you can run a report listing every design rule violation in the current layout error type layer on which the error occurred the X Y location of the DRC marker and the two objects involved in the error Objects are identified as e reference designator pin e net name segment via areaFill e Keepin or Keepout To run a DRC Errors report 1 Select Reports from the File menu Available Reports TD Bill of Materials 2260 TT Unrouted Nets I Component Locations MD T Aperture Information a AL ibutes T Hole Drill Schedule I Statistics TF Footprint Statistics I Testpoints MV View Results I Print Results Cancel Select DRC Errors Select or clear View Results If you select View Results PCBoards outputs the report on your monitor 4 Select or clear Print Results If you select Print Results PCBoards outputs the report to the printer 5 Click OK 13 14 Finalizing the Design PCBoards writes a report to a single file named layout database name drc in the same directory as the layout database If you selected the View Results and or Print Resu
76. mm option button e mil sets the unit of measure to thousandths of an inch e mm sets the unit of measure to millimeters 3 Select or clear Best Rep Best Rep displays numeric values in units showing the least number of decimal places 4 Click OK to exit 3 4 Defining the Circuit Board Setting Styles Line and Arc Styles To Define or Modify 1 Point to Styles from the Configure menu and select Lines and Arcs Width 1 Omil Add e 2 In the Styles text box type the name of the line arc style or Delete select a name from the list 3 Inthe Width text box enter a width value Cancel Width defines the line or arc thickness The format is width value units 4 Add or modify the definition by e clicking the Add button to add a new style e clicking the Change button to modify an existing style When exiting the definition in the Styles text box becomes the current style for lines and arcs Text Styles To Define or Modify Shortcut 1 Point to Styles from the Configure menu and select Text 2 In the Styles text box or select a name from the list type the name of the text style Configure Text Style Lx 3 In the Height text box enter a height for the text Height 60mi Ada ell Lts Height defines the rise of the text character The format is Weight amit Delete lt height value gt units Justification gt cee sss EE 4 Inthe Angle text box enter an angle Setting
77. output a photoplot 1 Point to Photoplot in the File menu and select Plot If you have not previously created a photoplot job for the current design PCBoards creates one automatically 14 16 Postprocessing Photoplot Job Description Auto Photoplot Job Job Setup 2 Select the job you want to photoplot from the Job Description list box Setting up the Job To set up a photoplot job Click the Job Setup button if you have not already set up the job See Setting up Jobs on page 14 3 for procedures describing how to set up a job Setting up the Aperture Table To set up the aperture table 1 Click the Apertures button Apertures define the layout object to photoplotter aperture mapping This information is used to generate the photoplotter output data used in the fabrication process Photoplotting 14 17 Layout Items Assignments Width Height mil Item Shape Angle DCode line Round 15mil 15mil line Round 1mil 1mil line Round 10mil 10mil arc Round 5mil 5mil arc Round 10mil 10mil pad Oval 31 496 102 3 pad Oval 102 36 31 49 Definitions A Usage Shape Width Height Angle DCode foo roe BT Round 15mil 15mil Round 1mil 1mil Round 10mil 10mil Round 5mil 5mil Oval 31 496 102 3 A Oval 102 36 31 49 o Rectangular 50mil 300mi 0 Cancel Automatically creating new aperture definitions For laser plotters which support the Gerber RS 274X format the mappings a
78. pin to outside pin distances C and D from the data sheet and knowing that pin 1 is the footprint origin 0 0 you can compute the coordinates for this corner reference from the footprint center D 2 C 2 as follows X corner D 2 AX 2 1 095 mm Y corner C 2 AY 2 1 5 mm These are the values entered into the Corner X and Y text boxes of the Rect Coord amp Deltas dialog box Creating a New Footprint 10 21 10 22 Creating and Editing Footprints Depending upon the pin pattern center coordinates can be derived from data book information or pin spacing values Machine Center by Coords X 1 0mil Y 2 5mil Identifying the Machine Placement Center To accurately insert the component onto the board Automatic Component Insertion ACT machinery must know the position of the center of the component The footprint editor provides two methods for marking the center When the center of the footprint is obvious and can be placed on the grid the center mark can be interactively positioned If not the center mark can be placed by coordinate value To position the center mark interactively 1 Select Machine Placement Center from the Draw menu A circle appears 2 Drag the circle to the grid position at the center of the footprint 3 Release to place the circle To position the center mark by coordinates 1 Calculate the X and Y coordinates for the center of the footprint relative to the footprint origin
79. post a warning to the Message Viewer for each block containing an ignored recursive Insert External reference Blocks are not supported When an external reference Block is found a warning is posted to the Message Viewer and the external reference is ignored Any other information within the block is imported however Text Text is imported in the font native to PCBoards regardless of what font the DXF file specifies All Text entities are interpreted as having a uniform weight consistent with its vertical size Creating the Board Outline 3 21 PCBoards maintains the following characteristics e correct orientation e vertical size e placement angle e inversion e justification PCBoards does not support the following characteristics e varying fonts e oblique angles e varying horizontal scaling e vertical text letters arranged one on top of another When vertical text is encountered normal text is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise so that it lies in the same space that the vertical text occupied When this happens a warning message is posted to the Message Viewer ASCII control characters within text are left in their expanded form for example Control G or BEL are written as G Messages Each time PCBoards detects an error within the DXF file it posts a message to the Message Viewer but continues processing the file It is possible to encounter several file errors and still retrieve all of the necessary d
80. schematic are resequencing of the reference designators and updates to the component values The ECO annotation process is based on the netlist file n1 generated from Schematics Any time a change is made to the schematic you must select Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu in order to update the netlist file with the new information Once in PCBoards the netlist comparison function will determine what if any differences exist between the current layout and the current netlist file Changes made to the layout are continually recorded in a log file b1g which is then checked by Schematics To disable the automatic netlist comparison function in PCBoards select Options from the Tools menu and clear Auto Netlist Check Finalizing the Design Overview This chapter discusses the tasks and procedures to perform to finalize your design in preparation for generating the fabrication artwork and artwork control files Sections included in this chapter are Reannotating the Reference Designators on page 13 3 explains how to reannotate the reference designators if needed Editing REFDES and Type Name Attribute Text Display on page 13 4 discusses editing REFDES and Type_Name text display in case you need to adjust the residing layer or appearance of the text Setting Areafill Fill and Island Properties on page 13 6 tells you how to make final preparations to areafills and islands Setting Up Test Points on page 13
81. snapping their placement center to the grid or by snapping the pick point to the grid The default is set to pick up components by their placement center To change this click on Selection Filter from the Configure menu or press F5 and clear the Placement Center e Remember that PCBoards offers full unlimited Undo and Redo functions These are accessible three ways the curved left and right arrow toolbar buttons Undo and Redo under the Edit menu hotkeys Ctrl Z and Ctrl Y These functions can be very helpful when experimenting with different placement configurations 4 24 Arranging Components To improve the display of the ratsnest connections click on Optimize Rats from the Tools menu after relocating parts This simplifies the ratsnest display If you wish to have this function enabled permanently click on Options from the Tools menu and select the Optimize Rats box This is the recommended setting during parts placement Move Delta is ideal for placing off grid components such as critical connector locations or mounting holes Select the component place it at the origin 0 0 select Move Delta from the Edit menu then type in the exact placement coordinate for that part Preparing the Layout for Routing Overview This chapter provides information for preparing your layout for routing whether you intend to route interactively or with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter The following sections are in this c
82. so they are all vertical line up U1 U2 U3 and U4 in a horizontal row starting with pin 1 of U1 at coordinate 2700 2000 The square pin is pin 1 on these parts a Select U1 by clicking on pin 1 b Drag U1 to coordinate 2700 2700 c Place U1 by releasing the mouse button Since Placement Center is disabled in the Selection Filter PCBoards uses pin 1 as the placement reference point and positions it on coordinate 2700 2700 d Repeat steps a through c for U2 U3 and U4 using any coordinates you want Window select U1 U4 by dragging the cursor around all four parts Click anywhere on one of the highlighted parts to pick up and drag the whole group to a new location Experiment with this group selection and move feature using other components You can also apply the rotate and flip functions to a group of components 11 Right click to end the selection process 12 Select Fit from the View menu Moving components by delta increments The following steps assume you have not moved P1 previously If you have click the Undo button until P1 is back in its original position 1 O a DON Select P1 by holding down the key and clicking on the center of one of the pins Select Move Delta from the Edit menu Type 350 in the Delta X box Type 750 in the Delta Y box Click OK Experiment with Move Delta to accurately place other parts Moving components by RefDes 1 Select Move by RefDes from the Edit me
83. suomi ma After placing a line s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Graphic Objects 3 15 Rect coord Rect Coord lets you draw a rectangle by specifying the coordinates for two diagonal vertices To draw a Rect Coord rectangle 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Rect Coord First Corner 2 Type the x y coordinates for the first vertex e Y Omil 3 Type the x y coordinates for the diagonally opposite vertex eae Note All coordinate values are measured from the layout x 1000mil Cox origin 0 0 Y 1000mil 4 Click OK to exit and draw the rectangle Rectangles are treated as four individual line segments After placing a rectangle s you can change the line width of all four lines individually or as a group if you group select them see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Rect coord amp deltas Rect Coord amp Deltas lets you draw a rectangle by specifying the left corner coordinates and a diagonally opposite vertex using delta coordinates measured from the left corner To draw a Rect Coord amp Deltas rectangle 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Rect Coord amp Deltas Corner Type the x y coordinates for the left corner x mit Y 0mil Type the x y delta coordinates Delta Click OK to exit and draw the rectangle X 1000mil Y 1000mil Rectangles are treated as fo
84. the Set button Display Color defines your preferred color for displaying layout objects on a specific layer You can create custom colors by choosing the Define Custom Colors button and filling in the RGB hue saturation and luminosity values Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for more information Choose the routing bias Routing Bias defines the preferred direction for trace routing Valid values are Horiz horizontal Vert vertical or None no preference System defined layers are initialized with None Routing layers any signal layers not defined as plane layers should alternate Horiz and Vert routing bias Choose the layer type Select or clear Display Selecting Display causes the objects on the layer to be displayed in the work area When you set a layer to be displayed it is marked with D in the Flags list Select or clear Protect Selecting Protect disallows interactive placement or modification of objects on the layer When you protect a layer it is marked with P in the Flags list 10 In the New Layer dialog box click OK 11 In the Configure Layers dialog box click OK Editing an Existing Layer To edit properties bb O N a From the Configure menu select Layers From the Layers list select a layer Click the Edit button Edit the appropriate properties See Creating a User Defined Layer on page 3 35 for dialog box field explanations In the Layer Settings d
85. the design e library editing of non graphic definitions maintained in the package footprint and padstack definitions e producing manufacturing output Configuring the PCBoards Environment You can configure the PCBoards environment for both layout objects and editor operation Layout object configuration items include object styles validation rules e g clearances and drill symbols Editor operation configuration items include window control commands e g pan zoom editing functions e g snap grid and database control functions e g autosave interval The layout database maintains configuration preferences Initializing and Editing the Design The layout editor lets you define all aspects of the layout including board outline components metal trace routing and areafills padstacks solder and paste masks board graphics and other manufacturing information You do this by placing objects 1 4 Using the Layout Editor When you customize an object instance other objects of the same type remain unchanged that are defined in library files or by using editor commands to define new objects such as traces lines and arcs When you place a layout object it inherits attributes which you may customize for that specific instance of the object You do the customization by using the layout editor s full set of editing features Validating the Design The layout editor has three built in functions to insure b
86. the scale of the sign is 1 it appears on the drill layer the exact size of the drill diameter Any scale size you enter changes the size of the sign by that scale factor d Define the weight of the sign Weight determines the thickness of the lines used to draw the sign 5 Click the Auto button If the symbol assignments are not satisfactory a Click Clear b Make appropriate changes c Click Assign The Assign button reassigns the symbols only not the TCodes Click OK to exit the NCD Tool Definitions dialog box Click OK to exit the Drill Output dialog box Exiting this dialog box causes the PCBoards to create the NC drill file Generating NC Drill Files 14 27 interactively creating new tool definitions If you have a pre existing tool table from a company standard or fabrication vendor you may want to create tool definitions interactively You can interactively create them using one of two methods e Create them first using the Auto button and then modifying each drill parameter as needed e Do not use the Auto button first Instead select each entry individually and enter the drill parameters manually To set up tool definitions using the Auto button 1 Follow the procedure listed in Automatically creating new tool definitions above 2 Select individual entries and modify the drill parameters as needed Click Change for each modification Click OK when all modifications are complete To individu
87. them 2 Select the footprint you want to update 3 Click OK 10 38 Creating and Editing Footprints Boe The new definition must be one of the footprints package types specified in the package definition for this component or the change will be ignored Changing Footprint Assignments Within the layout you can change the footprint definition that a component references To change a footprint assignment 1 Double click on the component Attributes Name Value REFDES ALD1701 AL DIP8 Delete Component 1300mil 600mil Display NO Click on the FOOTPRINT attribute Change the Value text box to a new definition name Click Change Click OK a A WS N If not already done so the new definition is copied from the library file to the layout database Hints and Tips 50 Hints and Tips 10 39 N PCBoards saves new padstack definitions locally to the current layout If you want to use them in other layouts you must save them into a library It is best if you save them to a user defined library rather than to libraries supplied by MicroSim Installation of new software versions overwrites the system supplied libraries To append a new footprint definition to an existing library use Save to Library from the footprint menu To save the definition to an entirely new file use Save As from the File menu Using Save from the File menu updates the existing footprint library file When adding a footp
88. to Photoplot from the File menu and select Import Graphics 6 Select the appropriate filename to import The photoplot layer objects should superimpose the surface layer objects Note Other layout program gerber files may not read in correctly Verifying Gerber Output is intended only for MicroSim PCBoards Photoplotting 14 23 Note Though object editing is permitted on the new photoplot layer care should be taken Doing so will create inconsistencies between this layer and what is generated by a photoplot output job 14 24 Postprocessing Generating NC Drill Files Numerically controlled NC drill files contain statements to control NC drill machines Statements include Tool Codes TCodes corresponding to drill diameters coordinate positions and other instructions to generate drill information for board fabrication To output an NC drill file 1 Point to NC Drill from the File menu and select Output If you have not previously created an NC drill job for the current design PCBoards creates one automatically Job Description Auto NCD Job Job Setup Tools Format 2 Select the job you want to output from the Job Description list box Setting up the Job To set up an NC drill job Click the Job Setup button if you have not already set up the job See Setting up Jobs on page 14 3 for procedures describing how to set up a job Generating NC Drill Files 14 25 Setting up the Drill Table To
89. traces vias and areafills between two logically connected pins turn off the display of the rat When you complete the connection between objects by drawing a trace the rat disappears from the layout Even though you don t see a rat the connection is still made logically and if you remove the trace the rat appears again Figure 4 2 illustrates that a trace replaces a rat when you complete the route 0000008 0000000 Figure 4 2 A Trace Replaces a Rat Understanding Connectivity 4 5 Nets A net is two or more pins logically connected plus any trace segments vias or areafills attached to those pins When you load a netlist PCBoards gives all nets a name If you create a net interactively PCBoards suggests a name but gives you achance to give a name of your choosing before making the connection In either case you can change the name after it is placed in the layout Figure 4 3 shows the names for the nets displayed 0000000 Figure 4 3 Net Names If a connection is added between pins 8 and 12 of Ul nets NET_0006 and NET_0002 are combined into one net In a case such as this PCBoards gives the choice of naming the newly formed net NET_0006 or NET_0002 or you can change the name completely Figure 4 4 shows the newly formed net named NET_0002 4 6 Arranging Components 0000000 Figure 4 4 A Merged Net Besides optimizing the rats for easier conne
90. 0000000000 H 00000000000000 k 60000000000000 Manually drawn pins L 00000000006006 M00000000000000 PGA132 N 00000000000000 top view P00000000000000 Figure 10 5 Pin Grid Array 12345678 9101112131415 ne AGO 00 0 0 0 6 cero oo 000 y B2 0 D 0000 O N E 0 0 9 9 09 09 0 0 ciQ 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H O0 000 O Jo 0000000 Manually drawn pins 6 66 6 6 6 6 6 MOO 0 6 6 6 6 PGA391 NOOOOOOOO top view 0 0 0 0_0 P 000000000 Figure 10 6 Offset Pin Grid Array Drawing radial pins Use Radial Pins to automatically position a circle of pins in the footprint Pins are positioned by establishing the circle centerpoint circle radius starting point and relative pin positions To draw radial pins 1 Choose Pin Array from the Draw menu Reference Pin on grid defines the pin number for the pin which will be positioned on the grid to establish circle radius and the starting point for generating other pins Angle Between Pins defines the relative position of neighboring pins Format is angle offset in degrees SMT when enabled defines all pins as surface mount pins which reside on only the Top board layer If disabled all pins are through hole which extend through all layers of the board 2 Inthe Reference Pin on grid text box specify the pin number for the pin which will be positioned on the grid Note that only numeric values may be used for pin numbers 3 In the Angle Between Pins text box specify the angle in
91. 2 Select Cut from the Edit menu Shortcut x or Ctri X Copying traces The copy function leaves the selected trace s in the layout and places a copy in the paste buffer for later pasting action You can copy traces either individually or in groups To copy a trace 1 Select the trace s you want to copy 2 Select Copy from the Edit menu Shortcut or Ctr C or Ctrl Ins 8 12 Editing Traces Shortcut 2 or C or lt gt shift Ins Pasting traces The rules that apply to paste operations are as follows e When pasting between designs layer structure must be identical e Traces may only be pasted to layers where they may legally exist To Paste a trace 1 Select Paste from the Edit menu 2 If needed flip and or rotate the trace press F to flip or R to rotate Click to place the trace Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have placed as many copies of the trace as desired 5 Click right to end paste mode Deleting Trace Segments and Vias 8 13 Deleting Trace Segments and Vias Deleting a trace or via removes it from the layout but does not place it in the paste buffer To delete a trace 1 Select the trace segment s or via s you want to delete 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu Shortcut or 8 14 Editing Traces Connections rats are logical connections between two pins Shortcut Ctri w Net Name PA Cancel I Temporarily Suppress This Dialog Adding Con
92. 27 monochrome setting output 14 13 More Graphics command 3 12 Move Smart function 6 13 _8 8 msim ini file CCTPlanePCT 5 13 PCBOARDS PADSTACKS section 9 8 multiple Footprint Editor windows 10 9 N naming convention suggested padstack 9 11 NC drill files generating 14 24 setting up the file format 14 30 tool assignments 14 25 net 4 5 areafill specifying 5 9 checking for unrouted 13 10 clearing highlights 6 4 highlighting 6 3 netlist footprint errors 2 7 netlist file Interactive Readin 2 6 PADS pad 2 4 schematic nlf 2 4 netlists comparing 12 10 importing from Schematics 2 5 importing PADS format 2 6 O Object Placement Point setting 3 7 objects attributes changing 1 30 finding 1 17 moving by delta values 4 13 moving by reference designator 4 14 orientation changing 4 12 rotating while dragging 4 13 while static 4 12 selecting groups 1 14 selecting single items 1 14 text adding 3 17 On Line DRC 5 20 running 13 11 On line help 1 33 on the fly creating a layout 2 9 opening a new layout 2 4 additional layouts 2 3 optimizing rats 4 8 out of sync condition 12 10 P package creating 11 8 creating from AKOs 11 13 defining 11 9 editing AKOs 11 14 editing definitions 11 16 library definitions 11 3 more than one gate type definition 11 11 one gate type definition 11 10 shared pin definition 11 12 package library adding 11 5 rearranging the sear
93. 3 Use the Up or Down buttons to reposition the layer 4 Click OK Deleting a User Defined Layer To delete a user defined layer From the Configure menu select Layers Select the user defined layer that you want to delete Click the Delete button Click OK bb WO N a Configuring Layers 3 39 Creating a Layer Pair To create a layer pair 1 a a WO N From the Configure menu select Layer Pairs Configure Layer Pairs Layer Pair Upper Lower Component Solder Component Solder Component Component Solder Solder The way in which layers can be paired is dependent upon the configuration order of the layers in the Layers dialog box under the Configure menu A layer that is selected as an upper layer can only be paired with a layer appearing below it in the Configure Layers sort order Likewise a layer that is selected as a lower layer can only be paired with a layer appearing above it in the Configure Layers sort order If layer order is changed thus invalidating layer pair configurations the offending layer pair definitions are automatically deleted From the Upper list box select one entry From the Lower list box select one entry Click the Add button Click OK 3 40 Defining the Circuit Board Deleting a Layer Pair To delete a layer pair From the Configure menu select Layer Pairs 2 From the Layer Pair list select one entry Layer Pair Upper Lower lists the set of configured l
94. 5 8 Drawing Areatills a gc Gude se ias ade Ed Swe AA yd a 5 8 Specifying the areafill Det sr easair ee ms e 5 9 Editing Areafill Attributes 0 0 0 0000 5 9 Editing areafill boundaries scc 2 025258 eee ee ma 5 11 Thermal tele 00 a 8S 3 db SSA ae bee ds 5 13 Creatine Plane Layers se caros ama nkhu AEE DRADER ES 5 13 Adding a Keepo t s serae miee 045 6 eu aa we Ode OU ae 5 15 Editing a Keepout Boundary o o e 5 15 Using Design Rule Check DRC o o o o e 5 16 Electrical Rules Handling oid ss dvs wout osde ana Ba BR SS awe wm 2 5 16 Setting minimum manufacturing values 5 16 Setting Clearance Values is ios w Gok a eee Hw Bake a 5 17 Setting trace segment clearances o oo aa 5 18 Setting areafill clearances o oo 5 18 Setting pad clearances o o o e 5 19 Using Online DRC sian koa see eke aa A 5 20 Wsing Batch DREG are eo 6 24 Se Oh de a AE ew Bo ER 5 21 Routing Interactively OVERVIEW oia iaa A me oe oR A 6 1 Highlighting Nets sos sosirea na ds oe ee Gok a ee ae OH eG 6 3 Selecting the Net s FIEST 200 00 2 ere Ge Bia te we a ee ew OH ae 6 3 Selectino the NeUS EAS gaged g ids dro AS MAS Baek S Pew D God Ss 6 3 Clearing Highlighted Nets 23 6046 64 8455 00488 Oe eh ean 6 4 Routing Trace c sos p sms oboe Oe dee Swe we dee wt whe E 6 5 Trace Placement Mode 0 005 5 cee eee eae 6 7 viii Cont
95. 8 gives you procedures for setting up test points Checking for Unrouted Nets and Pins on page 13 10 describes how to check for unrouted nets and pins 13 13 2 Finalizing the Design Verifying Design Rules on page 13 11 explains running DRC to verify design rules have been adhered to Formatting Drill Symbols on page 13 15 tells you how you can format drill symbols to your specifications Reannotating the Reference Designators 13 3 Reannotating the Reference Designators Reannotation automatically resequences reference designators in a specified order starting with the Top layer then the Bottom layer Each family of components is assigned reference designators of the form family s reference designator prefix next sequence number where sequence number is initialized with the value of one For example the unnn reference designators renumber from one the Rnnn reference designators also renumber from one To reannotate components 1 Select Reannotate from the Tools menu Starting Corner is used to define Starting Corner Sequence By the corner from which 2 Sni renumbering should begin p Ei Sequence By Row Column pebeta commands define the sweep pattern used to move through the board e Row when chosen steps through the board row by row always starting each row sweep from the left or right i edge as defined by Starting 2 Click the option button corresponding to the corner of t
96. AWN and BOTH Select the desired Shape Shape defines the object shape for the current aperture definition For drawn objects Shape is always set to Round For flashed objects Shape can take on the value Round Oval Square or Rectangular Enter the correct DCode DCode defines the device specific aperture code to which the current shape and dimensions are mapped The format is Dn where n is an integer number starting with 10 Enter a Height value Height defines the rise of the shape The format is shape height units or select an aperture definition Photoplotting 14 19 6 Enter a Width value Width defines the breadth of the shape The format is shape width units or select an aperture definition 7 Enter an Angle Angle defines the rotation of an aperture shape relative to another aperture shape definition which is identical in all other respects To set this either type the value into the text box using the format angle in degrees or select an aperture definition 8 Click Add Modifying or deleting existing aperture definitions To modify existing definitions 1 Select the appropriate entry in the list 2 Change the aperture parameters according to the procedures covered in Interactively creating new aperture definitions 3 Click OK To delete a definition 1 Select an entry 2 Click Delete Exporting aperture definitions Export allows job definitions maintained in the layout database of the curre
97. Adding plated holes Plated holes in footprints must be through hole pins To add a plated hole 1 Selecta padstack with the appropriate hole diameter and pad style 2 Place one pin Saving the Footprint Definition to a Footprint Library File Thus far the footprint definition resides only in memory You can either save it to a new footprint library file or append it to an existing footprint library file To save a footprint definition to a new library file 1 Select Save As from the File menu Before saving the footprint editor verifies that you have defined all required footprint entities and checks for duplicate pin names If you have not yet assigned a name to the definition the footprint editor requests entry of a name It displays any other conflicts in an error log 2 Correct any footprint definition errors and return to step 1 If there are no errors proceed to step 3 Creating a New Footprint 10 29 3 Enter a name for the new library file in the File Name text box By convention the file extension is 1b 4 Click OK to exit the dialog box Note To add the new library to the list of libraries PCBoards searches when placing a component see Adding a Footprint Library on page 10 5 To append a footprint definition to an existing library file 1 Select Save to Library from the File menu Before saving the footprint editor verifies that you have defined all required footprint entities and checks for
98. CBoards 11 36AM From Schematics you need to select a symbol for one of these parts PCBoards 11 36AM click on the symbol editor icon to edit it select Packaging Edit PCRoards 11 36AM add a Package Type corresponding to a footprint name and define a pinout PCBoards 11 36AM RLROS PCBoards 11 36AM PCBoards 11 36AM PCBoards 11 36AM The following footprints are not in the configured footprint libraries PCBoards 11 36AM Invoke Library Edit Footprint and ersate them then retry netlist readin PCBoards 11 36AM HDR26 PCBoards 11 36AM PCBoards 11 36AM PCBoards 11 36AM The following packages were not in the configured libraries PCBoards 11 26AM They can be generated automatically when all missing footprints have been defined PCBoards 11 36AM RLROS PCRoards 11 26AM 17 Messages 17 Error 0 Warning 0 Info Using Online Help The Message Viewer has an online help feature that allows you to view a help message directly relating to the currently selected message To view a context sensitive help message ee e 1 Inthe Message Viewer window select the message 1 Right clicking the message 2 Press FD a display a drop down 2 Clicking Help On 1 34 Using the Layout Editor You can also locate the source by 1 Right clicking the message line to display a drop down menu 2 Clicking Find In Design Locating the Source of a Message A message displayed in the Message Viewer contains a hypertext link that p
99. CBoards provides several methods for selecting objects to perform a function You can e select objects one at a time or in groups e use the selection filter to restrict certain types of objects from the selection e use Find in the Edit menu to perform a qualified group select find only objects that satisfy specified search criteria Selecting Objects One at a Time To select one object You can deselect objects by Click on the object e clicking on a region away from the selected object e holding lt Shift down and E A clicking on the selected Selecting Groups of Objects object To select multiple objects you can use either of the following techniques To drag an outline border 1 Click and hold the mouse button in a region of the work area that is not on an object 2 Drag the mouse to form a rectangle around the items of interest 3 Release the mouse button to select the items Selecting Objects 1 15 To extend an existing selection e lt Shift click on individual items to add them one at a time e Draw an outline border around multiple objects while holding Shift down Using the Selection Filter Use the Selection Filter to restrict the kinds of objects that can be selected To filter selections 1 From the Configure menu select Selection Filter Shortcut Selection Filter m Include Include All IV Pins IV Text Include Al V Trace Segments I Holes Exclude All IV vias
100. CT entry in the msim ini file Take care to not overlap areafills on different nets DRC flags the violation if you do The FILL_CLEARANCE attribute for areafills controls the clearance requirement between it and other areafills The autorouter treats any layer that has the total area of all its areafills exceeding 80 of the total signal keepin area as a plane layer If the layer s areafills total less that 80 the autorouter treats the layer as a mixed layer Voids Voids are polygonal cutouts clear regions with no metal within an areafill You define the shape of a void by positioning vertices You must establish at least three vertices to define a void To draw a void Click on the first vertex position 2 Move the cursor to the location for the next vertex A rubberband polygon appears Click to establish another vertex point Repeat steps 2 3 to place additional sides of the polygon Pressing incrementally deletes vertex points in reverse placement order Click right to complete the void Click right to end draw mode Editing void boundaries You can change the shape of a void by moving adding and deleting vertices Best results occur when the boundary forms a simple closed shape With a bit of strategy you can perform sophisticated editing To move a vertex Ensure no other objects are currently selected 1 Drag a selection rectangle around the vertex 2 Click and drag the vertex to a new position To ad
101. Click and drag the vertex to a new position To add vertices 1 From the Draw menu select Areafill 2 Select the edge on which you want to add a vertex The edge rubberbands allowing you to drag and click to establish as many vertices as needed 3 Right click to end the draw mode when you are finished adding vertices Note When you are finished editing the areafill using Areafill from the Edit menu the areafill net is verified and you can assign the areafill to a different net if needed When adding vertices If you want to remove a vertex you just created press lt Bksp If you aren t satisfied with your changes you can quickly abort them by pressing Spacebar This immediately discards any pending changes and restarts Areafill You can click on other edges and create more vertices in the same or a different areafill without leaving the Draw mode 5 12 Preparing the Layout for Routing To delete vertices You can delete vertices by using Bksp The order in which the vertices are removed is most often the reverse of the of the order in which they were initially placed so selecting the proper edge is significant Based on the direction of areafill creation you should select the edge that is in front of or behind the vertex you want to delete 1 Click on the edge in front of or behind the vertex you want to delete Press Bksp Continue pressing until you delete all the vertices needed
102. Editing Footprints Note fnot already done so it is advisable to create a text style called COMPTYPENAME see Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles on page 1 24 prior to placing the component type name template In the standard footprint library the text style is usually specified with the text bounding box center justified on the snap grid when enabled To position the component type name template 1 Change the current layer to AssyDrwTop using the Layer drop down list in the toolbar 2 Change the current text style to COMPTYPENAME using the Style drop down list in the toolbar Click OK Select TYPE_NAME Template from the Draw menu Drag the text box to either the top center side of the footprint just outside of the footprint boundary or centered within the footprint boundary 6 Click to position the template Changing Pin Padstack Assignments Sometimes it is desirable to assign a padstack definition to a pin that is different from those assigned to all other pins in the footprint Each pin has a PIN_PADSTACK attribute that can be modified to change this assignment To change assignments for one pin or 1 Double click on the pin to be modified Creating a New Footprint 10 27 Attributes Lx Name Value PINNUMBER B PIN_NETNAME NN_0003 PIN_START_LAYER Component PIN_END_LAYER Solder PIN_PADSTACK md 054 034 PIN_X 400mil PIN 1600mil PIN_ANGLE 0 000000 Click on the PIN_PADSTACK attribute
103. I Hole Drill Schedule T Statistics IT Footprint Statistics I Testpoints M View Results Print Results Cancel Select Unrouted Nets Select or clear View Results If you select View Results PCBoards outputs the report on your monitor 4 Select or clear Print Results If you select Print Results PCBoards outputs the report to the printer 5 Click OK PCBoards writes a report to a single file named layout database name ucr in the same directory as the layout database If you selected the View Results and or Print Results boxes PCBoards outputs the report to the monitor and or the printer Verifying Design Rules 13 11 Verifying Design Rules The electrical integrity of a design can be checked at any time using PCBoards Design Rules Check DRC function The DRC scans the design for e short circuits e clearance violations between two electrical objects trace segments pins vias areafills and between an electrical object and a hole or text e signal keepout violations trace segments vias and areafills that are totally or partially inside e signal keepin violations trace segments vias and areafills that are totally or partially outside e trace width violations As violations are detected PCBoards displays informative messages in the status bar and an X at the location where the violation is detected Later violation messages can be browsed and corrected The DRC can be run in either of
104. M4 6468 4 040465 404 5 3 12 ATC COOTG CC TACIUS 4 co oxo rs Re a we Ee ee ew 3 13 ATC C nter radis soea ei Gass do See go Bee Bae we 3 13 Line coord s s 44 G ees SOAS BSG OES Swe Re See FS 3 14 Rect coord s s ai duck as Bade widen Balk be E Boos oe 3 15 Rect coord amp deltas o o o 3 15 Rect lt comer amp deltas e a Gears eric ni a BOR ee ds Bei 3 16 Text Objects ss ea s 224 es oS SE wae REN Ged oe eae ae oS 3 17 Addis TeX i 3 68a So Aah GA Mea ood eS OS E 3 17 Creating the Board Outline o 02 0000 002 eee 3 18 Drawing the Board Outline 2 2 2 2 ee ee 3 18 Imporuns DXF Wile s e sans e heh oa 2s om eee bee G8 3 18 Layer control and association o e 3 18 Entity Considerati s sas sawna Bee e aS GE Bed SGP a GRA 3 19 TERU ine i Go wo hee GO Ghee RH e Belem Hee i 3 20 IMIESSABES orgies woke GMa eas oe BEG ae Se Re Ee Ses 3 21 Adding Holes v e paaa s ee CESS Rue e PRE Ee COR SG ee A 3 24 Adding Unplated Hols 20m cs Oa Ba dow Bade welds Bales ed 3 24 Adding Plated Holes o eg baceo ee Hamu ch ed eee Oe a Ew a8 3 24 Drawing a Board Signal Keepid o 3 25 Editing a Board Signal Keepin Boundary 3 25 vi Contents Configuring Layers s g eas dau peat taua a SEEM Ge wa OE HS 3 28 Layer Types s cci 0844 Bhs bdo Se a a eS 3 28 Sinal Mayers cargas caras ORES CEG ARO EH oA 3 28 Graphic layers se s 004 4069
105. MING s s hk oa Od ke HER OR Re ee Hw He 1 20 Redrawine ithe Display ss sose esne woes Wok ae Be a kw y S 1 21 Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles 1 24 Line and Ate Styles 32020550 Wek Ola eS Se 1 24 TEX SOLES ss Gaia bk 2 PA a Od oo He aoe ahaa Hoe we 1 25 TO Delete seo qeata a OMe Oe ERE Re 1 26 Trace Styles pio o oo See Oe AR BG eo OG ee oe 1 27 To Detine or Modify airis scan 2449 6 4 25 4 oo 404 4 1 27 To Delete an 364 46 6F8245 2 8 SOS CEG AREER 0S 1 29 Padstack Styles acs a 04 9 Hoo a0 4 648 AA 1 29 Adding and Changing Object Attributes s aas peas PEN OS as EERE ee ea Go 1 30 Adding Attributes ss isa Daw GB GBs Gale and Bh 1 30 Changing Attribute Values 2 0 0 0 2 00000000 1 31 Changing the Display Parameters of Attributes 1 31 Using the Message Viewer edome ana s iaio gee a eee 1 33 Usme Online Help css rs o ee a ee a 1 33 Locating the Source of a Message o o 1 34 Understanding the Indicated Severity o oo 1 34 Additional Information se escea serea maa e 1 34 Closing the Message Viewer lt oc soeu macerada ewes 1 36 Using Design Rule Check DRO 0 e wap ee Ss 1 37 Starting a New Layout OVEIVIEW saab eo aa aa e Oe a Be 2 1 Starting the Layout Editor e sosa ri a 554 Soe E 4 eG 2 3 Opening Additional Layouts a 2 3 Starting a New Layout s ec 4 4 0 ecran ba ra d a ee we s 2 4 Loading a Netlist re scs
106. MicroSim PCBoards PC Board Design Software User s Guide a MicroSinm MicroSim Corporation 20 Fairbanks Irvine California 92618 714 770 3022 Version 8 0 June 1997 Copyright 1997 MicroSim Corporation All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America TradeMarks Referenced herein are the trademarks used by MicroSim Corporation to identify its products MicroSim Corporation is the exclusive owners of MicroSim PSpice PLogic PLSyn Additional marks of MicroSim include StmEd Stimulus Editor Probe Parts Monte Carlo Analog Behavioral Modeling Device Equations Digital Simulation Digital Files Filter Designer Schematics PLogic PCBoards PSpice Optimizer and PLSyn and variations theron collectively the Trademarks are used in connection with computer programs MicroSim owns various trademark registrations for these marks in the United States and other countries SPECCTRA is a registered trademark of Cooper amp Chyan Technology Inc Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Exchange and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions EENET is a trademark of Eckert En
107. Other patterns can also be generated second sequence 14131211109 8 0000000 q gt 0000 top view top view Figure 10 4 Simple Pin Pattern Drawing pin arrays To interactively position pins in an array 1 Choose Pin Array from the Draw menu Row Start fa T SMT e Row Start defines the integer row position ID for Column Start i E ep the first pin in the sequence Auto Complete Wont E Bott j Number of Rows 24 M Skipl e Column Start defines the integer column position M Skip C gt Bo a Number of Col 247 o ID for the first pin in the sequence M Skipx y M SkipY e SMT when enabled defines all pins as surface mount M SkipZ Cancel pins which reside on only the Top board layer If disabled all pins are through hole which extend through all layers of the board O a FB W ND 7 Auto Complete Parameters e Number of Rows defines the total number of rows in the matrix e Number of Cols defines the total number of columns in the matrix e Skip I O S X Y Z when selected eliminates the specified letter e g T from the pin ID sequence e Enable when selected turns on the Auto Complete feature Specify the Row Start value for the first pin Specify the Column Start value for the first pin Click OK Click on the desired pin position Repeat step 4 for as many pins as need positioning As new pins are positioned pin numbers are automatically incremented Click right to
108. Outline e PasteTop BoardOutline e MaskTop BoardOutline e SilkTop BoardOutline e separate page for each signal layer BoardOutline e SilkBot BoardOutline e MaskBot BoardOutline e PasteBot BoardOutline e SMTAssemblyBot BoardOutline e Drill BoardOutline Automatic Job Generation Lx IV Generate Print job Print Job Alllayers C Current view TT Use curer M Generate NCD job i M Generate Photoplot job Cancel Select Generate Print Job When selected Generate Print Job creates a default print job with the properties chosen in the Print Job section In the Job Setup dialog box the print job appears as Auto Print Jobn Print where n is the sequence number a Choose the Print Job Parameters you want to use All Layers creates a print job that includes the entire design Current View creates a print job that limits output to the portion of the design and layers currently displayed in the work area Current Selection Filter further restricts the Current View print job to include only those objects selected in the Selection Filter dialog box under the Configure menu Select Generate NCD Job Generate NCD Job creates a default NC drill job In the Job Setup dialog box it appears as Auto NCD Jobn Drill where n is the sequence number Select Generate Photoplot Job Generate Photoplot Job creates a default photoplot job In the Job Setup dialog box it appears as Auto Photoplot Jobn Pho
109. PCBoards providing a smooth flow of critical design information between the two applications For example circuit design and or board layout changes are automatically tracked and forward and backward annotation capabilities help maintain design consistency These features and many more provide a board layout package far superior to stand alone products not having a schematic capture front end Using PCBoards as a stand alone program without MicroSim Schematics you can either create designs from scratch or you can start a layout by importing a PADS compatible layout netlist MicroSim PCBoards Overview Xxi Standard Features Used as a stand alone product PCBoards provides these capabilities Libraries e Footprint Library with thousands of components e Component Package Library with thousands of parts Input e Design input from MicroSim Schematics e DXF import for mechanical information e PADS netlist import Design e Board designs that you can configure with any shape and structure e SMT designs e Interactive placement of components graphics text holes keepouts and rats logical connections e Interactive trace routing trace segments areafills and vias e Shape based adaptive autorouting fully integrated interface to Cooper and Chyan Technology s SPECCTRA autorouter e Cross probing with MicroSim Schematics e Automatic online and batch validation of clearances between electrical
110. SPECCTRA is finished Editing Traces Overview After routing you may want to edit traces and fine tune your design This chapter discusses trace editing features and commands you can use Understanding the Smart Functions on page 8 2 conceptually describes how the system handles certain trace editing situations Cutting Copying and Pasting Traces on page 8 11 explains these functions as they pertain to PCBoards Deleting Trace Segments and Vias on page 8 13 explains how to do these functions Adding Connections on page 8 14 discusses how to add connections if you are adding components on the fly Deleting Connections on page 8 16 explains how to disconnect a connection Hints and Tips on page 8 17 gives you helpful suggestions concerning material covered in this chapter 8 2 Editing Traces Understanding the Smart Functions Understanding Smart Snap In addition to snapping to vertices pins and vias Smart Snap allows you to create stubless precise junctions when routing to or from an existing trace segment This is true even if the snap grid is enabled and the trace you are routing to or from lies between grid points You can also place vias with the same accuracy Smart Snap works with the following conditions even if the snap grid is enabled Begin a trace segment When you begin a trace so the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the starting point
111. Styles 3 5 Angle defines the amount of rotation in a counterclockwise direction The format is angle in degrees 5 In the Weight text box enter a weight Weight defines line thickness The format is weight units 6 Set the justification property by clicking on the option button that reflects the desired justification Justification defines the point of reference or justification point for the box that bounds the text string in terms of vertical position top middle baseline bottom and horizontal position left center right When placing or moving text the justification point defines the point at which the text rectangle repositions to the snap grid 1f enabled 7 Add or modify the definition by e clicking the Add button to add a new style e clicking the Change button to modify an existing style When exiting the definition in the Styles text box becomes the current style for text 3 6 Defining the Circuit Board Snap grid dimensions are displayed in the current units of measure Shortcut Defining Grids A grid is available so you can place objects uniformly It appears as a dot matrix within the work area You can control the grid spacing display and snap characteristics Setting the Spacing To set the spacing for the grid 1 From the Configure menu select Snap Grid Snap Grid Grid Spacing IX Snap X Display 2 From the Grid Spacing selection list select a value Grid Spacing defines the curr
112. This can then be superimposed on the corresponding layer in the layout to check for accuracy fala Exporting a DXF File on e Note that the current version of PCBoards does not provide page 14 41 auto dimensioning features or sophisticated drafting tools for creating fabrication and assembly drawings By using the dxf export function with particular layers displayed File Export DXF the data from the layout can be converted to a dx file for use in third party mechanical drafting CAD software 20 Editing Areafill Attributes e To generate accurate areafill images ensure you change the on page 5 9 Fill_Display_Mode attribute to SOLID for every areafill prior to processing the photoplot files The current display mode of the areafills determines how they appear in the Gerber file Glossary accordian air gap AKO aperture definition areafill artw ork A type of routing pattern that increases the trace length between pins of a connection by causing the trace to traverse perpendicularly to the favored direction of travel Nonconductive space between metal Defined as a trace segment or pad clearance value used by the DRC A Kind Of Library definition based on an existing definition in the same library file The AKO definition inherits all of the properties of the base definition except where override values are provided Shape dimension angle and aperture station code for a given spe
113. To change the assigned padstack for individual affects all pin and via pins and vias instances referencing that definition 1 Select the desired pins and vias Shortcut double click on a trace 2 From the Edit menu select Attributes Select Attributes Ea 3 Change the PIN_PADSTACK or VIA_PADSTACK type Fit l l l attribute value so that it references a different padstack definition a Select PIN_PADSTACK or VIA_PADSTACK b Type a new definition name into the Value text box If the required padstack definition does not already exist create a new definition with the required pad clearances see Creating Padstacks on page 9 10 4 Click OK Using Online DRC When online DRC is enabled design rules are checked whenever an electrical object is placed or moved in the design To enable online DRC 1 From the Tools menu select Options Using Design Rule Check DRC Options x Interaction Preferences 3 Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold E Smil C mm Rotation Increment 30 Deg T Best Rep Y Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC TP DRC Sound E Fill Y Crosshair IV Auto Netlist Check C Dutline I Optimize Rats Y Auto Loop Remove One Pass C Formal Zoom Pan Delta Scale 2 Coarse 25 Y Current Last Fit so Fine fi amp utopan amp utosave T Enable I Enable Sensitivity fi 000 ms Every fi 5 Min Hot Zone
114. To move an edge You can move an edge by simultaneously capturing both its vertices within a region selection rectangle This method moves the edge and its vertices to the new position 1 Drag a selection rectangle around two or more vertices that define the edge you want to move You can add to the set of selected objects by holding down while you are making the selection 2 Drag the vertex and the edge to the new position When you move one vertex all selected vertices objects move the same distance and direction You can also move an edge by clicking on the boundary edge you want to move This method of moving an edge leaves the original defining vertices at their current position and establishes new vertices at the new position 1 Click on the edge you want to move 2 Drag one of the vertices to a new position New vertices are created at the new position and the original defining vertices are left where they are Drawing and Editing Areafills for Plane Layers 5 13 Thermal relief Pin and via pads connected to an areafill are connected with a series of metal spokes and air gaps that provide relief from thermal dissipation The dimensions and orientation of the spokes are controlled by the individual pad definitions The size of the air gaps is inversely related to the surface area of the spokes You can mimic solid connections to areafills by placing a carefully sized trace segment at the site of the pin or via Cho
115. Y_MODE Change the value to SOLID Click Change Click OK 2 o O 5 Create an areafill on the GND layer a Repeat step 3 using the BOARDOUTLINE BOARDSIGKEEPIN and GND layers and assigning the net DIG_GND Select Selection Filter in the Configure menu a Click Exclude All b Select Areafills c Click OK Observe how PCBoards automatically adjusts connections relevant to defined components a Window select the side and top boundaries of the areafill on the GND layer b Move the top down to the middle of the top row of capacitor pins one grid at a 50mil setting c Click on the View Area toolbar button Zoom in on capacitors C5 and C4 top left corner of the board Notice how the spokes on the thermal relief pads have been reduced automatically to two from the original four Click the Undo toolbar button and the Redraw toolbar button to compare the two versions Click the View Fit toolbar button Select Layer Display from the Configure menu Tutorial 4 Routing Interactively B 17 10 Select the SILKTOP COMPONENT SOLDER RATSNETS and DRC layers 11 Make the COMPONENT layer current 12 Click OK 13 Select Save from the File menu Hints and Tips 0 You can turn off the display of certain nets or only display one net at a time by using Ratsnest Display from the Configure menu You can highlight a specific net or trace by using Highlight Net s from the View menu The display mode for ar
116. a style after you add objects only subsequent objects you add inherit the modified properties The objects you previously added retain the original style definition To change those objects you must intentionally select and edit their attributes Configure Line amp Arc Styles Lx Styles Hine 10 Width fi Omil Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles PCBoards comes standard with default styles for line and arc text trace and via object types However it also provides the option to create your own styles and to change any of the default styles The Style drop down list in the toolbar displays the style currently in effect for the object type you selected Clicking the drop down list arrow provides a list of styles from which you can select a different style to become current As you add objects to the layout properties of the current style are applied to the objects The following sections demonstrate how to define new styles modify existing styles for lines and arcs text traces and vias and how to delete them Line and Arc Styles To Define or Modify 1 Point to Styles in the Configure menu and select Lines and Arcs 2 In the Styles text box type the name of the line arc style or select a name from the list 3 Inthe Width text box enter a dimension Width defines the line or arc width The format is width valuel units 4 Add or modify the definition by e clicking the Add button to add a new style
117. a Photoplotting on page 14 15 For Gerber RS 274 X format using system defaults Select Open from the File menu and select eval_1f pca Point to Photoplot from the File menu and select Plot Click OK in the information box Click Apertures Click Auto Click OK to exit the Apertures dialog box N Oo Oo RAON a Click OK to exit the Photoplot dialog box This initiates the Gerber photoplot file processing Gerber RS 274 D format iala Photoplotting on page 14 15 For Gerber RS 274 D format with changes to defaults Point to Photoplot from the File menu and select Plot Click OK in the information box Click Apertures Click Auto Click Export oa A WN Type the file name for the aperture adf file B 32 Tutorial 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Click OK to exit the Apertures dialog box Click Format Select RS 274 D in Output Standard drop down list Click OK Click Job Setup Select Auto Photoplot Job Click Define Pages Select Page 2 Click Delete Repeat this for Pages 3 and 10 through 14 Click OK Click Settings Select Rotate 90 Click OK to exit Job Setup Settings Click OK to exit Job Setup Click OK to exit Photoplot This initiates the Gerber photoplot file processing NC Drill files B 33 N C D ri I fi les iala Generating NC Drill Files on page 14 24 Point to NCDrill from the File menu and select Output 1 2 Click OK in the information box
118. able the Snap setting and select a reasonable spacing such as 25mil Then in Options from the Tools menu set the Snap to Pin Threshold to a reasonable spacing such as 15mil This should allow you to move and edit off grid traces efficiently Use the on the keyboard to move a selected trace or traces one grid at a time By careful selection of specific segments traces can be shifted or relocated easily For instance selecting two joined trace segments allows you to move the corner The Smart Functions are all available anytime you are editing traces They require no special command or mode Remember to take advantage of the ability to add or delete objects to the group of selected items by holding down while clicking with the left mouse button When copying and pasting traces the copies automatically assume the net names of the nets at the new pin locations Tutorial 7 Creating A Footprint and Editing Padstack Definitions B 23 Tutorial 7 Creating A Footprint and Editing Padstack Definitions Tutorial 7 demonstrates how to create a new footprint definition DIP20 and save it in a user defined library file It also shows how to edit an existing padstack definition If you did not continue from Tutorial 6 and exited PCBoards select Open from the File menu and select tutor2r pca Note This is an exercise to help you become familiar with how footprints are created The Evaluation software does not support new footprint def
119. adin is error free you can now define the board see Chapter 3 Defining the Circuit Board If you encounter footprint errors see Using Interactive Netlist Readin on page 2 6 2 6 Starting a New Layout To load an existing Schematics netlist from PCBoards 1 From the File menu in PCBoards point to Netlist and select Load PCBoards loads the components into the layout It positions those components with location and rotation attributes defined in Schematics into the layout accordingly It places components lacking location or rotation definition in a matrix for easy identification and selection It also displays logical connections rats If your netlist readin is error free you can now define the board see Chapter 3 Defining the Circuit Board If you encounter footprint errors see Using Interactive Netlist Readin on page 2 6 Importing a PADS format netlist You can also load PADS compatible netlists produced by external board layout packages or schematic capture programs into PCBoards To import a PADS format netlist 1 From the File menu point to Netlist and select Import PADS If your netlist readin is error free you can now define the board see Chapter 3 Defining the Circuit Board If you encounter footprint errors see Using Interactive Netlist Readin on page 2 6 Using Interactive Netlist Readin Interactive Netlist Readin guides you through solving footprint errors so you have a work
120. ag assignments 3 29 toolbar drop down list 1 10 Top 3 30 turning display On 3 41 types 3 28 User Defined 3 29 creating 3 35 5 2 deleting 3 38 5 6 limit 3 29 Index 7 repositioning 3 38 _5 5 layer display changing 3 41 layer pair creating 3 39 5 6 deleting 3 40 5 7 layout database 1 6 Layout Editor starting 2 3 layout editor 1 3 layouts creating on the fly 2 9 modifying existing 2 9 opening additional 2 3 saving automatically 2 10 starting a new 2 4 library definitions footprint 10 3 package 11 3 padstack 9 5 limits number of User Defined layers 3 29 plane layer coverage percentage 5 13 line styles defining or modifying 3 4 line drawing 3 10 line coord drawing 3 14 Load Padstacks command 9 8 loading a netlist 2 4 padstack libraries 9 8 locating the source of a message 1 34 logical connections 4 3 loop See Automatic Loop Removal machine placement center 10 22 making a layer current 3 37 3 42 5 5 managing rats 4 8 manufacturing minimums 5 16 markers error severity 1 34 marking the footprint orientation 10 18 mechanical photoplotters 14 17 message viewer 1 33 Index 8 closing 1 36 messages DXF 3 21 locating the source 1 34 minimums manufacturing 5 16 modifying an existing layout 2 9 existing aperture definitions 14 19 layer configuration 5 2 line and arc styles 1 24 3 4 text styles 1 25 3 4 tool definitions 14 29 trace styles 1
121. ally not using the Auto button set up tool definitions 1 Select an entry item 2 Enter a diameter Diameter defines the width of the hole To set this either type the value into the text box using the format hole diameterlunits or select a tool definition 3 Enter a TCode Note Ensure the selected codes are accepted by the TCode defines the device specific NC drill code to which target NC drill tool the current hole diameter is mapped To set this either select a valid code from the drop down list or select a tool definition 14 28 Postprocessing Drill Symbol Display Format Lx Symbol Text Style Scale 1 Weight 1 mil Height 50mi Position cor e eee Cancel Note Exiting the Drill Output dialog box causes the PCBoards to create the NC drill file 9 Enter the Feed value Feed defines the Z axis infeed rate on machines equipped with automatic feed using the format rate compatible with target dril1 g inches minute if default units are mils or mm second if default units are mm Enter a Speed value Speed defines the spindle revolutions per minute on machines with automatic feed using the format integer RPMs in units compatible with target drill e g thousands of RPMs Click the Format button Format allows you to define the location of the letter symbol relative to the sign You can also define the scale and weight of the sign and the height of the letter symbol
122. ally adjusts an assigned padstack definition to changes in the layer structure as follows e Ifa padstack definition has pad data for layers that do not exist in a design the extra data is ignored e Ifa design uses layers for which there is no specific pad data then default pad data is used Each padstack definition has a configurable template pad that is used as this default Padstacks for pins either reside on a single surface or extend completely through the board Padstacks for vias may begin and or end on internal layers buried and blind vias You can use a single padstack for all of these purposes A padstack must be round to be used as a via for autorouting 9 4 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Understanding the Library Structure PCBoards comes with one padstack library named std ps1 It is the default library and is named in the msim ini file in the PCBOARDS PADSTACKS section see the online PCBoards Reference Manual The library consists of many system defined padstack definitions characterized by e an alphanumeric name e description e template shape dimension and clearance properties e layer shape dimension and clearance for each layer in the design e drill hole parameters e solder and paste mask size defaults swell and shrink respectively When you activate PCBoards it loads the std ps1 padstack library and uses it to search for definitions when you place components into the layout
123. ally related layout objects For example one layer contains all of the silk screen graphics that appear on the top of the board Another layer depicts the component boundaries on the top of the board One or more additional layers may depict routed traces There can even be a layer that contains notes specifying the manufacturing process and materials Treating the board layout as a collection of layers has distinct advantages It allows you to e control and limit the scope of editor operations to a workable and functionally related subset of layout objects in the design e select any combination of layers for artwork production Layer Types Layers are characterized by type signal and graphic The layer type implies the specific purpose for the layer Therefore objects pertaining to that layer can only be placed on a layer according to its type Signal Layers Electrical objects such as traces and areafills can be placed on signal layers and are interpreted as metal Text can also be placed and is interpreted as a keepout Graphic objects other than text cannot be placed on signal layers Plane layers are signal layers that have by default 80 or greater coverage with areafills Mixed layers are also signal layers that have by default greater than 0 and less than 80 coverage with areafills This determination is made when autorouting This is when routing is forbidden on plane layers and inhibited on mixed layers G
124. an arc by defining a startpoint an endpoint and a point on the arc to define 1ts curvature To draw an Arc Thru 3 Points 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Arc Thru 3 Points 2 Draw the arc startpoint and endpoint a Click on the startpoint b Move the cursor to the desired endpoint c Click to establish the endpoint When you move the cursor a rubberband arc appears 3 Define the curvature a Move the cursor to the desired position b Click to establish the curvature After placing an arc s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Arc coord amp radius Arc Cood amp Radius lets you define an arc by specifying the centerpoint x y coordinates and typing the radius start angle and end angle values To draw an Arc Cood amp Radius arc 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Arc Coord amp Radius 2 Type values for the X and Y coordinates The x y coordinates are measured from the layout origin 0 0 Type a radius value Type the start angle and end angle values The start and end angles are measured counter clockwise starting at O degrees from the positive X axis After placing an arc s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Arc center amp radius Arc Center amp Radius lets you draw arcs by typing the radius start angle and end angle values and definin
125. an change the shape of an board signal keepin by moving adding and deleting vertices Best results occur when the boundary forms a simple closed shape With a bit of strategy you can perform sophisticated editing Note Defining a Board Signal Keepin is critical for proper operation of both the DRC and the autorouter functions Pressing incrementally deletes vertex points in reverse placement order 3 26 Defining the Circuit Board When adding vertices If you want to remove a vertex you just created press lt Bksp If you aren t satisfied with your changes you can quickly abort them by pressing Spacebar This immediately discards any pending changes and restarts Areafill You can click on other edges and create more vertices in the same or a different areafill without leaving the Draw mode To move a vertex Ensure no other objects are currently selected 1 Drag a selection rectangle around the vertex 2 Click and drag the vertex to a new position To add vertices 1 From the Draw menu select Board Signal Keepin 2 Select the edge on which you want to add a vertex The edge rubberbands allowing you to drag and click to establish as many vertices as needed 3 Right click to end the draw mode when you are finished adding vertices To delete vertices Y ou can delete vertices by using Bksp The order in which the vertices are removed is most often the reverse of the of the order in which they w
126. ap Grid Od o o e e a g 10 11 Displaying the GUA 2 4 0 5 45 e e be eee aaa ar A 10 11 Assigning a PadstaGk e ecos om ia Sac as ales ae tee E 10 12 X Contents Chapter 11 Drawing PiN eas 624 8 ER mee SRE OH we ERM Ow 4 OR eo 10 12 Drawing pins individually or automatically 10 13 Drawing pin atrayS 2 gsc ke ORR EA BREE EAR DEES A 10 14 Drawing radial pins 6402004445 864 94 04 605 6 10 17 Drawing the Part Outline sss coaie aa 2 42 S 6 do oe Oe do 10 18 Marking the Footprint Orientation 0 10 18 Identifying the Footprint Origin o 10 19 Drawing the Footprint Boundary o 10 19 Identifying the Machine Placement Center 10 22 Defining the Reference Designator and Component Type_Name Style 10 23 SettinetexEstyles song dd ete edie e Oh Bod ee oo 10 23 Positioning the templates 000 10 25 Changing Pin Padstack Assignments 04 10 26 Adding Holes s e 2 amp ab e amp Died WRG o OG eR SSG OS 10 27 Adding unplated holes o oo 10 28 Adding plated holes sis 4620624484 55 4 04095402 10 28 Saving the Footprint Definition to a Footprint Library File 10 28 Editing an Existing Footprint sore ece dack ese Se ak eee biyok ai 10 30 Copying Footprints s s s eek Re ee ORR RST ORE we OH eS 10 32 Removing FOOUPMMIS 4 code e FR Gens AS Bre Ha aS aes
127. ata to import the drawing 3 22 Defining the Circuit Board You can associate more than one DXF layer with one destination layer but you cannot associate more than one destination layer with one DXF layer Note DXF layers associated with a destination layer named NONE are not imported If the file is opened but no supported entities are detected the DXF Layer Assignment dialog box appears with a blank DXF Source Layer list box You can select either OK or Cancel to terminate the operation To import a DXF file 1 3 From the File menu point to Import and select DXF The common File dialog box appears In the File dialog box select the file you want to open If the file cannot be opened or read PCBoards posts an appropriate message to the Message Viewer Only DXF source layers that contain at least one supported entity are displayed in the DXF Source Layer box When you select a valid file the DXF Layer Assignment dialog box appears Select the layers that you want imported and assign them a destination layer You can e select one or more layers individually e click the Select All button to select all layers e click the Clear All button to clear all selected layers If you want to select only a few layers from a list of many clearing all layers and then selecting the few is a convenient method Click the arrow beside the Destination Layer text box and select the layer name to which you want to assign the s
128. ate Layout Netlist command 12 6 creating a layout on the fly 2 9 anew footprint 10 8 a new package 11 8 a padstack definition 9 11 a via to other signal layers while routing 6 6 AKO package definitions 11 13 layer pairs 3 39 5 6 new aperture definitions automatically 14 17 new aperture definitions interactively 14 17 plane layers 5 13 tool definitions automatically 14 25 tool definitions interactively 14 27 User Defined layers 3 35 5 2 cross probing 4 11 Current Last check box 1 22 current layer 3 37 3 42 5 5 current settings grid toolbar drop down list 1 10 layer toolbar drop down list 1 10 styles toolbar drop down list 1 10 Cursor Styles 1 12 cutting components 4 18 trace segments 8 11 D DCode 14 17 default padstack library psl 9 7 rules for autorouting 7 3 defining a new package 11 9 drill parameters for padstacks 9 14 line and arc styles 1 24 3 4 padstack mask properties 9 15 text styles 1 25 3 4 Index 4 the reference designator and Type_Name style 10 23 trace styles 1 27 deleting aperture definitions 14 19 components 4 20 connections 4 22 8 16 layer pairs 3 40 _5 7 line and arc styles 1 25 padstack definitions 9 18 text styles 1 26 tool definitions 14 29 trace segments 8 13 trace styles 1 29 User Defined layers 3 38 5 6 vias 8 13 deliverables 14 43 delta values moving objects 4 13 Design Rule Check DRC 1 37 _5 16 destination layer 3 19 DFM
129. ayed 4 Enter a job file name PCBoards assigns the job extension automatically Define the directory where you want the job to reside Click Save Importing Job Definitions Import allows job definitions that you have previously exported to be copied into the layout database for the current design Definitions are selected from a job file job extension which is opened via a standard Open dialog box An imported job definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the layout database Before copying over the definition a prompt requests confirmation of the import operation To import a job definition 1 From the File menu select Job Setup Job Setup rob Selection Current Job Name auto Photoplot Job Job Photoplot Auto Print Job Print Job Settings Job Type Plot Origin mil Center of Rotation mil 0 T Rotate 90 Photoplot 1 y fo y pS dias l ma ma 2 Click Import A standard Open dialog box is displayed Choose the directory where the job file resides Enter a file name Click Open Setting up Jobs 14 11 14 12 Postprocessing Printing You can output graphics and photoplot data for the current layout to the current printer or file device configured for the host environment You have a choice to print the entire job or just the current view To print a job 1 Select the Print option from the File menu If you ha
130. ayer pairs The current layer pair is shown in the Layer Pair text box Click the Delete button Click OK Changing the Layer Display 3 41 Changing the Layer Display Throughout the course of your design you may want to turn specific layers on and off or change a layer color to enhance the work area You do this by using Layer Display from the Configure menu Using Layer Display you can e turn the display for specific layers on and off e change display color for specific layers e set the current layer Turning Specific Layers On To turn the display for specific layers on or off 1 From the Configure menu select Layer Display Shortcut 2 Select the layer s you want displayed If you want most layers displayed click Select All and Top SelectAll deselect the layers you do not want displayed Clicking on a p Unselect All layer when it is highlighted deselects it one Pr If you want most layers not displayed click Unselect All SiIKBot _ Set Color and select the layers you want displayed PasteBot 3 Click OK to exit and make the display configuration effective Ratsnest 3 42 Defining the Circuit Board Shortcut Use the Layer Style drop down list Shortcut Double click on the layer name Changing Layer Color To change the color of specific layers oa DO From the Configure menu select Layer Display Select the layer for which you want to change the color If the layer is highlighted fo
131. ayer to the partner layer in the current layer pair Change layers to the next signal layer up Change layers to the next signal layer down Delete last drawn segment and or via Route with any angle lt 0 gt orthogonal or 45 degree angles lt 4 gt or orthogonal only lt 9 gt Tutorial Overview The tutorials outlined below are intended to give you a basic understanding of the MicroSim programs and their functions They cover the basic steps involved in completing a printed circuit layout Each one builds on the previous exercise so it s best to do them in order After working through the tutorials we encourage you to create your own designs and experiment to learn more about the power of Schematics and PCBoards Please reference the appropriate sections of the user s guide for more detailed information about procedures outlined in these tutorials The sample design files are constructed specifically to work within the limitations of the Evaluation versions of the programs They are not necessarily useful circuits but are only intended as demonstration and learning tools B 2 Tutorial Certain functions such as reading in new footprints that cannot be done with the Evaluation program can be executed in the production version of PCBoards These tutorials contain cross references to the main body text in this user s guide The book icon refers you to areas in the guide that provide detailed informati
132. ayout Editor Overview This chapter briefly describes the layout editor and layout database then presents user interface features specific to using PCBoards This chapter has the following sections Layout Editor on page 1 3 discusses configuring the PCBoards initializing the design validating the design libraries and the production output Layout Database on page 1 6 describes the layout database and its functions The Layout Editor Window on page 1 7 describes the layout editor window and all of its components Selecting Objects on page 1 14 discusses the methods for selecting objects Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles on page 1 24 describes how to define modify and delete line arc text trace and padstack styles 1 2 Using the Layout Editor Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 tells you how to add or change object attributes for your particular design Using the Message Viewer on page 1 33 describes the message viewer functions and how you can respond to errors Using Design Rule Check DRC on page 1 37 summarizes the DRC function DRC is discussed in detail in Chapter 5 Preparing the Layout for Routing Layout Editor 1 3 Layout Editor The layout editor provides central control for all board layout activities PCBoards divides layout editor activities into five areas e configuring the PCBoards environment e initializing and editing the design e validating
133. blished for a given net i e placement order and position on off the trace grid pin via control defines the constraints for connecting trace segments to other metal net control defines the limits and rules governing trace geometry For customizing these settings and using more advanced routing techniques see the online MicroSim PCBoards Autorouter User s Guide To set up for autorouting 1 Select CCT Setup from the Tools menu CCT Setup Default Settings Trace Grid Via Grid Routing Control Width 8mil e Spacing amit Spacing 1mil Routing Style Clearance starburst 2 Apply to Layer Apply to Via O Mid Driven PGA1 O Balanced O Simple Daisy Via Pin Clearance mit Component Solder to 0 7 signal IX Offgrid Routing Okay i Autorouter J Layers Pins PinfYia Control 271000 C Segments Connect at Pins Vias Max Vias per Connection 4 4000 O Segments Connect at Any Copper 6 U Any Copper for Star Not for Daisy Max Vias per Net Max Stub Out From Pin padini umicap X If Fanout Via Route to It Not Pin SMT to Turn Gap Net Control T Same Net Checking Max Bends per Connection F Don t Use Diagonals Through Fixed Objects Max Wrong Way Length UL Max Wire Length on Mixed Layer Max Crossings per Connection Setting up for Autorouting 7 5 2 Review the default settings in each dialog box section You can route u
134. box from the Tools menu e Select a component either by grabbing it at one pin the machine placement center or by using Move By RefDes in the Edit menu see below e Independently move a component text label by clicking on a reference designator or component type name Moving components by delta values Moving by delta values allows you to move selected objects an exact delta distance relative to their current position The values entered override the snap grid so you can place components between grid points with accuracy To move components by delta values 1 Select the object you want to move 2 From the Edit menu select Attributes Note the current coordinates Click OK to exit the Attributes dialog box From the Edit menu select Move Delta Delta X Delta Y Omil In the Delta X text box enter a value 4 14 Arranging Components The values entered override the snap grid so you can place components between grid points with accuracy Shortcut Ctri E Choose Component x Reference Designator U1 Components U1 7406 U2 7406 OK Cancel This is the value for movement in the horizontal direction Enter a negative value for movement to the left 6 Inthe Delta Y text box enter a value This is the value for movement in the vertical direction Enter a negative value for movement down 7 Click OK Moving Components by Reference Designator A simple way to select and po
135. c or signal layer If you add text to a signal layer it is treated as a keepout area To add text 1 From the Draw menu select Text 2 In the Text text box enter the text string 3 Click OK to exit 4 Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the text As the cursor moves a bounding box defines the area occupied by the text string 5 Click to place the text To undo this step press Bksp 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to place additional instances of the text string 7 Click right to end the placement mode After placing the text you can change the text string the clearance value height angle weight justification See Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Text Objects 3 17 When placed on a signal layer PCBoards treats text objects as a keepout area 3 18 Defining the Circuit Board Note You can import a DXF mechanical outline by using the DXF import feature in the File menu Creating the Board Outline You can draw the board outline using PCBoards drawing tools or import a board outline from a DXF file Drawing the Board Outline Place graphics representing the physical board outline on the BoardOutline layer To draw the board outline 1 From the Layer drop down list in the toolbar select BoardOutline 2 From the Draw menu use Line Polyline and Arc to draw the shape of the board outline More Graphics in the Draw menu provides additional ways
136. c Right click to end Draw mode Mark the footprint orientation a Select Polyline from the Draw menu b Click on coordinates 100 200 50 150 and 100 100 C Right click to end the Polyline mode d Right click to end the Draw mode Draw the component outline on the AssemblyTop layer Objects on the AssemblyTop layer are used for the assembly drawing a Click on the Layer drop down list and make the AssemblyTop layer current b Repeat steps 6 and 7 Tutorial 7 Creating A Footprint and Editing Padstack Definitions B 25 9 Draw the Type Name template a Select TYPE_NAME Template from the Draw menu b Click on coordinate 450 150 to place the template 10 Draw the reference designator on the SilkTop layer a Click on the Layer drop down list and make the SilkTop layer current b Select Out from the View menu ej c Select REFDES Template from the Draw menu d Click on coordinate 250 150 to place the REFDES e Select Fit from the View menu 11 Duplicate the reference designator onto the AssemblyTop lala Editing REFDES and layer Type Name Attribute a Double click on the RefDes Text Display on page 13 4 b Click on Display Cc Select the AssemblyTop layer d Click on the Style TEXT_STD to select it e Click on Assign to Layer f Click OK to exit the Display Parameters dialog box g Click OK to exit the Attributes dialog box 12 Rotate and move the RefDes on the SilkTop layer a Select the RefDes on the SilkTo
137. ch order 11 7 PADS footprint mapping file pads ypk 2 4 input file pad 2 4 package mapping file pads ymp 2 4 pads setting clearance values 5 19 pads ymp file 2 4 pads ypk file 2 4 padstack assigning default properties 9 12 changing assignments 9 19 10 26 creating a new definition 9 11 default library psl 9 7 defining drill parameters 9 14 mask properties 9 15 deleting definitions 9 18 editing definitions 9 17 exporting 9 9 library definitions 9 5 loading libraries 9 8 styles 1 29 suggested naming conventions 9 11 paired layers 3 33 creating 3 39 5 6 deleting 3 40 _5 7 Pan New Center command 1 19 panning 1 19 to a new centerpoint 1 19 using autopan 1 20 with the scrollbar 1 19 PasteMaskBottom layer 3 30 PasteMaskTop layer 3 30 pasting components 4 19 trace segments 8 12 PCBoards starting stand alone See Layout Editor photoplot outputting ajob 14 15 setting up the format 14 21 physical connections 4 4 pin arrays automatic positioning 10 15 interactive positioning 10 14 pins 6 16 changing padstack assignments 10 26 Index 9 checking for unrouted 13 10 disconnecting 4 22 8 16 drawing in a radial pattern 10 17 drawing individually 10 13 Placement Center checkbox 3 7 plane layer changing the coverage percentage 5 14 coverage limits 5 13 creating 5 13 plated holes 3 24 polyline drawing 3 11 positioning reference designator
138. ch that placement of the component on the Top layer will cause the footprint graphics to be placed on the SMTAssyDrwTop layer Configuring Layers 3 29 The rules governing layer tag assignments for any given layout are as follows Except for UserDefined layers every layout is composed of one layer for each of the system layer tags described in Table 3 1 You can create up to 45 user defined layers After you create layers you can move them to different relative positions without changing the signal graphic properties Signal layers must always reside between the Top and Bottom layers 3 30 Defining the Circuit Board Table 3 1 Layer Tag Assignments System Layer Tag Description AssyDrwTop SilkTop SolderMaskTop PasteMaskTop Top Bottom PasteMaskBottom Graphic layout objects for the top surface of the PCB Components can be defined such that placement of the component on the Top layer will cause the footprint graphics to be placed on the AssyDrwTop layer Silk screen graphics for the top surface of the PCB Components can be defined such that placement of the component on the Top layer will cause the footprint graphics to be placed on the SilkTop layer Solder mask for the top surface of the PCB The information on this layer is determined by 1 graphic objects placed directly on the layer and 2 mask shapes derived from padstack definitions associated wi
139. cific image to be photoplotted A polygonal metal area that is either solid or hatched sometimes referred to as copper pour or copper flooding Set of precisely scaled photographic images used in PCB fabrication Glossary 2 ASCII attribute board signal keepin boundary clearance component conflict crosstalk current grid current layer current objects current style American Standard Code for Information Interchange basic English text format standard for files readable by any system An object tag of the form lt name gt lt value gt that describes a property of the object instance relevant to layout processing see keepin see footprint Spacing between electrical objects and other objects in the design A part on a PCB described by its package footprint and padstack properties Routing violations when autorouting These are 1 crossover or short where two traces intersect on a layer 2 clearance where one object is positioned too close to another object 3 crosstalk where length gap or maximum noise rules are violated 4 length where length limits and matched tolerances are violated 5 placement where rules such as spacing board surface orientation and keepouts are violated Electrical interference between traces in close proximity The autorouter checks for crosstalk violations between parallel segments on the same layer parallel segments on adjacent layers and interference d
140. ck right when you have defined all the vertices you need PCBoards completes the areafill Specifying the areafill net After placing your areafill if it encompasses only one net you are warned that the areafill will be merged with that net If the areafill encompasses more than one net PCBoards displays the Choose Net dialog box listing all net names encompassed To specify an areafill net 1 From the Net Names list box select a net name 2 Click Close Editing Areafill Attributes Use Attributes from the Edit menu to edit areafill properties To edit areafill attributes 1 From the Edit menu choose Attributes Pressing incrementally deletes vertex points in reverse placement order the drawing sequence begins again with step 1 You must define at least three vertices for the areafill to be completed Choose Net x Close Net Names NN_0005 WEE Shortcut Double click on any boundary segment 5 10 Preparing the Layout for Routing Attributes Lx Name NETNAME NET_FIXED FILL_LAYER FILL_CLEARANCE FILL_DISPLAY_MODE FILL_SHOW_ISLANDS NN 0001 New Change Component Delete 3mil DRAFT Display Cancel 2 Change one of the properties you need according to the following definitions NetName Net_Fixed Fill_Clearance Fill_Display_ Mode Fill_ Show_ Islands 3 Click Change Displays the net name to which the areafill is connected The net to wh
141. copying components from one layout to another different layout editor windows the layout editor checks whether the underlying definitions already exist i e have the same name in the recipient layout database If so the existing local copy is used when you paste the component If not the underlying definitions are copied along with the component The rules that apply to paste operations are as follows e When pasting between designs layer structure must be identical e New reference designators are automatically generated e You cannot cut or paste rats or polygonal objects e You can paste lines and arcs to the current layer by holding the key while clicking the mouse To Paste a Component 1 From the Edit menu select Paste Shortcut or If the Placement Center option in the selection filter is clear you can press to change the placement origin for the highlighted component s 2 If needed flip and or rotate the objects press Ctrl F or to flip Ctri R or R to rotate Click to place the objects ctrl V or Shifd Ins Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have placed as many copies of the component as desired 5 Click right to end paste mode 4 20 Arranging Components Shortcut or Deleting Components Deleting a component removes it from the layout but does not place it in the paste buffer You can cut components individually or in groups Note When you delete a component with connected pi
142. create a via at the point where you need to traverse to the Solder layer When you create the via the layout editor automatically ends it on the Solder layer because it recognizes the layer pair and makes the Solder layer current You can then continue the trace on the Solder layer Creating a User Defined Layer Though the configuration order for system defined layers is fixed you can insert user defined signal layers between the Component and Solder layers and graphics layers anywhere To create a user defined layer 1 From the Configure menu select Layers Configure Layers Lx Layer Name System Layer Tag Flags Bias BoardOutline BoardOutline New BoardSigKeepin BoardSigKeepin GD BoundaryT op BoundaryT op GD Et AssemblyT op AssyDrwT op GD Delete SMTAssemblyT op SMTAssyDrwT op GD PasteT op PasteMaskT op G MaskTop SolderMaskT op Color SilkTop SilkT op Current Component Top SD None Solder Bottom SD None SilkBot SilkBottom GD Dj MaskBot SolderMaskBottom G Dov PasteBot PasteMaskBottom G pon AssemblyB ot AssyDrwB ottom GD SMTAssemblyBot SMTAssyDrwB ottom GD BoundaryBot BoundaryBottom GD Drill DrillSymbol GD Ratsnest Ratsnest GD DRC DRC GD Flags are Current Signal Graphic Displayed Protected Cancel 3 4 The Configure Layers dialog box allows you access to layer functions and displays layer statistics Sele
143. ct the existing layer where you want to insert the new layer The new layer appears below the selected layer You can reposition user defined layers after initial placement by using the 4 and 4 keys The following rules apply e Position graphic layers anywhere in the list e Position UserDefined signal layers between the Component and Solder layers Click the New button Enter a layer name Configuring Layers 3 35 Table 3 4 Layer Flag Codes Code Meaning Current layer S Signal layer G Graphic layer D Display P Protect UserLayeri Display Color ME Routing Bias Vert Layer Name Layer Type 7 Signal O Graphic X Display l Protect 3 36 Defining the Circuit Board This control is used primarily for autorouting and therefore does not apply to graphic layers Layer Type governs whether the layer is used for routing and metal or for graphic objects e Signal designates the layer as a signal layer meaning that electrical objects such as traces vias and areafills can be placed on the layer Text can also be placed and is treated as a keepout graphic objects cannot Such layers are annotated with S in the Flags list e Graphic designates the layer as a graphic layer meaning lines rectangles arcs circles and text can be placed on the layer electrical objects such as traces vias and areafills cannot Set the layout object display color by clicking
144. ction between pins of components that has not yet been physically routed A collection of rats Resequencing of reference designators within each component family Unique identifying name for a component instance in a schematic or layout Standard designators include U lt n gt for ICs R lt n gt for resistors and C lt n gt for capacitors Action of selecting more than one object for edit by using an ROI box see ROI box A Region of Interest box created by dragging the mouse to form a rubberband rectangle around a group of objects The process of defining conductive paths in the PCB design composed of trace segments area fills and vias An older version of the Gerber photoplotter format A modern version of the Gerber photoplotter format Stretching of rats and traces when moving objects in the layout Mechanism to restrict the kinds of objects that can be selected see footprint Required reduction in size of a pad when generating a corresponding mask The shrink value is used to derive paste masks see keepin A layer which accepts metal based objects traces areafills and pads and text PCB layer containing graphics which will be silk screened onto the top or bottom surface of the PCB during fabrication Information typically includes part outlines and reference designators Action of selecting one object for edit by clicking on it SMT snap grid SOIC solder mask spoke stub style swell
145. ction tracing you can selectively display nets You can display all nets a selected few a single net or no nets Figure 4 5 shows only Net_0002 displayed 0000000 Figure 4 5 Selective Display of Nets See Changing the Ratsnest Display on page 4 9 for procedures to manage the ratsnest display PCBoards has two kinds of nets determined by net connectivity e Non floating e Floating Floating copper Copper can exist as part of a net traces vias and areafills connected to pins However when trace segments vias or Understanding Connectivity 4 7 areafills are left unconnected it creates an undesirable situation called floating copper Floating copper can be difficult to visually identify on a complex board Additionally the DRC function does not check for floating copper However you can find and delete floating copper by using the Find command in the Edit menu To delete floating copper 1 From the Edit menu select Find Find Attribute Name Attribute Value NET_FLOATING YES Add Chang peek I Clear current selection SelectAll C Select Next Cancel In the Attribute Name box type NET_FLOATING In the Attribute Value box type YES Click the Select All button All floating traces and floating vias are highlighted 5 Click Delete Note For procedures to remove islands from areafills see Setting Areafill Fill and Island Properties on page 13 6
146. d as plane layers should alternate Horiz and Vert routing bias Choose the layer type Select or clear Display Selecting Display causes the objects on the layer to be displayed in the work area When you set a layer to be displayed it is marked with D in the Flags list Select or clear Protect Selecting Protect disallows interactive placement or modification of objects on the layer When you protect a layer it is marked with P in the Flags list 10 In the New Layer dialog box click OK 11 In the Configure Layers dialog box click OK Editing an Existing Layer To edit properties Pb WO N a From the Configure menu select Layers From the Layers list select a layer Click the Edit button Edit the appropriate properties See Creating a User Defined Layer on page 5 2 for dialog box field explanations In the Layer Settings dialog box click OK In the Configure Layers dialog box click OK Modifying the Layer Configuration 5 5 To change layer display colors From the Configure menu select Layers From the Layers list select a layer Click Color bb WO N a Choose a color from the color palette You can create custom colors by choosing the Define Custom Colors button and filling in the RGB hue saturation and luminosity values Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for more information 5 In the Color dialog box click OK In the Configure Layers dialog box click OK T
147. d directly on this layer The layout editor performs a layout integrity check any violations are recorded on the DRC layer Layer Properties Each layer has the properties defined in Table 3 2 With the exception of Tag and Type you can edit all properties Table 3 2 Layer Properties Characteristic Description TAG NAME TYPE DISPLAY System assigned layer tag name e g Top User assigned name for the layer e g Component Signal or Graphic graphic defining the kinds of objects metal or non metal respectively that can be placed on the layer TYPE is fixed for system defined layers but can be set for UserDefined layers User assigned control which enables disables display of a layer within the work area Configuring Layers 3 33 Table 3 2 Layer Properties Characteristic Description PROTECT BIAS COLOR Layer Pairs User assigned control that enables disables interactive placement of objects on a layer Layers can be defined as protected meaning that objects cannot be interactively placed on them For instance setting the Top layer to protected will disallow trace routing on that layer User assigned predominant autorouting direction Horz Vert and None for traces on signal layers tagged UserDefined Top or Bottom User assigned color representation for objects on a layer Layer pairs are two functionally related layers with one layer representing la
148. d the place mode Esc 4 18 Arranging Components Cutting Copying and Pasting Components Cutting Components When you cut a component PCBoards removes it from the layout and copies it to the paste buffer for subsequent pasting action You can cut components individually or in groups Note When you cut a component with connected pins PCBoards disconnects the pins from their nets PCBoards also creates backward ECO entries for the part deletion and connectivity changes See Working with Backward ECOs on page 12 4 for an explanation of the backward ECO file To cut a component 1 Select the component s you want to cut Shortcut E or C0 2 From the Edit menu select Cut Copying Components The copy function leaves the selected component s in the layout and places a copy in the paste buffer for later pasting action You can copy components either individually or in groups Note PCBoards does not copy a component s connectivity To copy a component 1 Select the component s you want to copy Shortcut or Ctrl C or Ctrl Ins 2 From the Edit menu select Copy Cutting Copying and Pasting Components 4 19 Pasting Components Components have underlying definitions e g package footprint and padstack properties which are initially copied from library files into the layout database when you place a component Only one copy of each referenced definition is maintained in the database When
149. d vertices Working with Areafills 6 21 1 From the Draw menu select Void When adding vertices 2 Select the edge on which you want to add a vertex x The edge rubberbands allowing you to drag and click to establish as many vertices as needed 3 Right click to end the draw mode when you are finished adding vertices To delete vertices You can delete vertices by using Bksp The order in which the vertices are removed is most often the reverse of the of the order in which they were initially placed so selecting the proper edge is significant Based on the direction of void creation you should select the edge that is in front of or behind the vertex you want to delete 1 Click on the edge in front of or behind the vertex you want to delete Press Bksp Continue pressing until you delete all the vertices needed To move an edge You can move an edge by simultaneously capturing both its vertices within a region selection rectangle This method moves the edge and its vertices to the new position 1 Drag a selection rectangle around two or more vertices that define the edge you want to move You can add to the set of selected objects by holding down while you are making the selection If you want to remove a vertex you just created press lt Bksp If you aren t satisfied with your changes you can quickly abort them by pressing Spacebar This immediately discards any pending changes and r
150. definition and the base definition have the e same number of gates e same number of pins and pin names e same pin name to pin number assignments e same available package types e same allowable gate and pin swaps Note A package definition can not be based on another definition unless all of these conditions are met 2 Select Packaging from the Library menu and open a package library file for editing 74Al plb m Package Definitions Package fas Edit Delete Print T Entire Library 54L00 z C File Printer 3 Choose New within the Package Library dialog box 11 14 Creating and Editing Packages New Package Definition D MSIM 1 LIB 74I_plb Package Name AKO Change AKO Hof Gates 1 of Gate Types 1 Edit Gate Types Package Types DIP14 Y Edit Package Types r Pin Assignments Gates Gate Type 1 Edit Pins Edit Shared Pins Edit Pin Swaps Shared Pins Print Help Pin Swaps Cancel 4 Enter a name for the definition in the Package Name text box 5 Click Change AKO and select the base definition AKO Lx Change AKO l Cancel 6 Select OK to save the definition Note No information can be modified except for the name of the base definition However if you modify the base definition itself this and all other AKO definitions using the same base definition will show the changes Editing an AKO Package Definition To make cha
151. discusses the default footprint and user defined libraries Managing Footprint Library Files on page 10 5 explains how to set up the default library It also discusses how to load and export libraries Creating a New Footprint on page 10 8 describes how to create a new footprint if a definition you need doesn t exist Editing an Existing Footprint on page 10 30 gives you the procedures for editing footprints 10 Note PCBoards saves new definitions as local to the current layout If you want to use them in other layouts you must save them into a library Itis best if you save them to a user defined library rather than to libraries supplied by MicroSim Installation of new software versions overwrites the system supplied libraries 10 2 Creating and Editing Footprints Copying Footprints on page 10 32 gives you the procedures for copying footprints Removing Footprints on page 10 34 explains how to remove footprint definitions from the current library Printing the Footprint on page 10 35 explains how you can output graphics and photoplot data for the footprint to the current printer or file device Updating Placed Footprints on page 10 37 describes how to update footprints you have already placed in the layout Changing Footprint Assignments on page 10 38 discusses how you can change the footprint definition that a component references Hints and Tips on page 10 39 gives you helpful suggestions
152. displayed produces metal in those areas 6 24 Routing Interactively The contribution of every spoke is always considered when physical connectivity is evaluated Automatic Spoke Removal Pin and via pads connected to an areafill are connected with a series of metal spokes and air gaps that provide relief from thermal dissipation The dimensions and orientation of the spokes are controlled by the individual pad definitions The size of the air gaps is inversely related to the surface area of the spokes There are up to four thermal relief spokes per pad and when you regenerate pour an areafill PCBoards evaluates every spoke independently in each pad If a spoke falls within a void or outside the areafill the automatic spoke removal function removes it Hints and Tips You can turn off the display of certain nets or only display one net at a time by using Ratsnest Display from the Configure menu You can highlight a specific net or trace by using Highlight Net s from the View menu The display mode for areafills can be set to Draft the default or Solid The Draft mode is best for editing and general design work because it reduces the amount of time required to redraw the image Use Solid to verify the finished areafill image and for post processing The areafills must be displayed in the Solid mode when generating Gerber files You can use Void from the Draw menu to surround a via and remove its thermal spokes Hi
153. dit to create a custom component description file Note For reference acomps ref file is also shipped along with the software This file contains component and footprint names in the standard caf file format for most of the parts provided in the standard libraries For PCBoards to access information from the component description file each entry must be in comma separated format as follows component name footprint name manufacturing ID attribute name attribute value When specifying more than one user defined property for a given component type each entry must have identical component name footprint name and manufact uring ID values For example two entries for the LM124 component might appear as LM124 DIP14 LM124J ND COST 4 05 LM124 DIP14 LM124J ND SUPPLIER National Semiconductor Resistors and capacitors are a special case Because different valued resistors and capacitors do not have unique manufacturing IDs a VALUE entry must immediately precede the corresponding set of entries containing user defined properties for a given device 14 34 Postprocessing For example COST entries for 10K and 1K resistors could appear in the component description file as follows R RCOS R1 VALUE 10K R RCO5 R1 COST 05 R RCO5 R2 VALUE 1K R RCO5 R2 COST 03 To run a Bill of Materials report 1 Select Reports from the File menu 2 Select Bill of Materials 3 Click Setup In the Report Setup dialog box specify a lis
154. dstack from the Configure menu Shortcut Configure Padstacks Padstack Name Description rnd 060 039 rnd thru 060 pad 039 drill rnd 060 040 rnd thru 060 pad 040 drill rnd 063 043 rnd thru 063 pad 043 drill Edit rnd 065 045 rnd thru 065 pad 045 drill md 075 040 rnd thru 075 pad 040 drill Delete rnd 080 040 rnd thru 080 pad 040 drill rnd 080 050 rnd thru 080 pad 050 drill rnd 081 061 rnd thru 081 pad 061 drill rnd 085 065 rnd thru 085 pad 065 drill rnd 095 060 rnd thru 095 pad 060 drill rnd 095 065 rnd thru 095 pad 065 drill rnd 1 00 075 rnd thru 100 pad 075 drill rnd 2 03 1 52 rnd thru 2 03mm pad 1 52mm drill rnd 350 217 rnd thru 350 pad 217 drill sq 050 030 square thru 050 pad 030 drill sq 065 045 square thru 065 pad 045 drill sq 075 040 square thru 075 pad 040 drill sq 1 00 square smt 1 00mm This dialog box is used to select existing padstack definitions for modification Edit or deletion Delete or new padstack definitions can be created from scratch New 2 Click the New button PadStack Definition Padstack Name unnamed Lo Description Cancel Pad Definition Drill Shape Rectangular 3 A om WoL CB 25mi Clearance 5mil Height 25mil Clearance 5m Thermal Relief Masks Solder Spoke Width 12mit Swell Omil Orientation 45 90 Paste Match Template Shrink Omil X Remove
155. e 10 34 Printing the Footprint s sss s es e p cae hae RR RO eR a Oe 10 35 Updating Placed Footprints sore nc ge soe ropi Be d eote wR at 10 37 Changing Footprint Assignments 00004 10 38 Hints and TIPS ser eoe a e a Sed ee Hook woe A 10 39 Creating and Editing Packages OVELVIEW e ek a aop ia aes pe eke Bw Be a D Woke a E D ds Ge 11 1 Understanding the Library Structure ooa 11 3 Library Definitions s ss aca a as o de E Bee 11 3 Managing Package Libraries o oo 00000004 11 5 Adding a Package Library ooo e 11 5 Rearranging the Search Order o o 11 7 Creating a New Package i c o amor as Sob a a a amp 11 8 Checking the MicroSim Footprint Library 11 8 Defining the New Package so coce eosa sorea cdam 00000004 11 9 Specifying package definition properties 11 10 Saving the definition s ss i404 ee Gee PS Eee ORES e 11 12 Creating AKO Package Definitions 11 13 Editing an AKO Package Definition 11 14 Editing a Package Definition s sos 46 goa m sreca be Sa ae ee Gow at 11 16 Hints and Tips s ee c peas aner ES RRM Re we SRE MESS REE 11 17 Contents xi Chapter 12 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs OVEIVIEW oS 6S ROR LARRS EEG SPARE OR ERASED OR GD Se 12 1 Understanding the ECO ProGesSiiios e a acer ge ae aoe eR Ge Se ee eS 12 2 Working with Backward ECOS 0 o 00 eee ee eee 12 4 D
156. e Configure menu Layer Display Component Solder SilkBot MaskBot PasteBot AssyBot BdryBot Drill Ratsnest DRC b Click all signal layer entries that contain areafills if they are not already selected c Click OK 2 Select all areafills a Select Selection Filter from the Configure menu Setting Areafill Fill and Island Properties 13 7 Selection Filter Include Pins F Text Include All M Trace Segments V Holes Exclude All M Vias M Placement Center MV Areafills T Logical Connections v V Keepouts IV Graphics Other M Enable T Auto Extend Selection Alt T Limit to Current Layer Ctrl b Click Exclude All c Select Areafills d Ensure the Enable box is selected e Click OK If necessary click A so that the entire design is visible f Drag an outline border around the entire design 3 Choose Attributes from the Edit menu Shortcut or Name Value NETNAME INET 0001 New NET_FIXED NO eea FILL CLEARANCE a asl FILL_DISPLAY_MODE DRAFT FILL_SHOW_ISLANDS YES 7 Display Cancel 4 Set the fill pattern a Click FILL_DISPLAY_MODE b Inthe Value text box enter SOLID c Click Change 5 Remove islands from the areafill a Click FILL_SHOW_ISLANDS b Inthe Value text box enter NO c Click Change 6 Click OK 13 8 Finalizing the Design If several pins and or vias are to be used as test points group select the appropriate pins vias Setting Up Test Point
157. e Edit menu select Find Enter an attribute name See the Index to locate specific attributes for specific objects Enter an attribute value If Value is a text string you can use wild cards to generalize the search pattern An asterisk matches string fragments of zero or more characters e g a search on R will find both R1 and R22 A question mark matches any single character e g a search on R will find R1 but not R22 If Value is a number it must include units to find an exact match Click Add to place the attribute name value into the list box Repeat steps 2 through 4 for all the attribute name value pairs you want to narrow the search Choose e Select All to find the complete set of object instances that satisfy the search criteria e Select Next to find the next object instance that satisfies the search criteria Selecting Objects 1 17 Shortcut Ciri Q E lt Attribute Name Attribute Value NET_FLOATING ves T Clear current selection E SelectAll C Select Next 1 18 Using the Layout Editor 7 Select or clear Clear Current Selection If you selected an object s and it is highlighted and you define another set of attribute name value pairs to select a different object s enabling Clear Current Selection deselects the first object s when the layout editor selects the new object s Disabling Clear Current Selection keeps all previously selected
158. e MicroSim library JEDEC 95 specifications provide package dimensions Defines file or hard copy output of layout graphics photoplots or NC drill data for a design A job is composed of one or more pages each of which can contain information from any combination of board layers A polygonal boundary used to define a region on the PCB inside of which all traces vias and areafills must reside Often referred to as the board signal keepin A polygonal area used to define a region on the PCB where metal is not allowed see photoplotter Physical and conceptual divisions of a PCB used to facilitate layout of objects and generation of fabrication artwork Groupings of two functionally related layers representing layout objects on upper and lower layers of the board Used for hole via and trace placement as well as flip operations between the Top Bottom layer pair System defined identifier for a given layer indicating the layer s type and purpose A layer s tag determines which object placements are legal on that layer File pca extension containing all electrical and physical information describing a PCB see rat The sum of the X and Y distances between a pair of pins The Manhattan length is the minimum wire length if a pin pair is orthogonally routed 0 001 inch Operation to reflect an object around a vertical axis on a given board layer Numerically Controlled device used to drill holes of var
159. e drop down list displays the name of the current text style definition that will be applied to each new instance of text The displayed value is the name of the current style definition The Layout Editor Window 1 11 Work Area The work area is the display region used to create and edit either the layout layout editor or component footprint footprint editor At any given time some portion of the layout or footprint design is visible in the work area The visible portion can be moved by panning or resized by zooming Coordinate System As you position objects in the work area PCBoards assigns Coordinates are displayed in the them Cartesian coordinate values relative to the absolute origin current units of measure either 0 0 In a new layout work area the layout editor indicates 0 0 mils or millimeters as defined with a large plus sign and places it near the lower left corner under Options in the Tools You cannot relocate the absolute origin menu Grid The layout editor provides a grid to let you place objects uniformly The grid appears as a dot matrix within the work area You can configure the grid spacing display and snap characteristics using Snap Grid from the Configure menu As with coordinate values the layout editor displays the grid in the current units of measure Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the window It provides information about the current layout activities includi
160. e orthogonal press 9 e orthogonal and 45 degrees press 4 e any direction press 0 You can change modes at any time while routing See Trace Placement Mode on page 6 7 for a full explanation 5 Click to form a single trace segment on the same layer or press to create a via to the current layer pair partner After pressing Tab s click or draw an adjoining trace segment to establish the via Routing Traces 6 5 E or G If the starting point is on a pin existing trace segment or via the new segment is assigned to the existing net an arbitrary cursor position the net is undefined When selecting an arbitrary cursor position with the snap grid enabled the starting point is the nearest grid point 6 6 Routing Interactively Trace segments and vias can be deleted by pressing Bksp 6 The via inherits the padstack definition from the current trace style To create a via to other signal layers a Press or to move up or down respectively through the signal layers The current layer changes accordingly b Click or draw an adjoining trace segment to establish the via Repeat steps 3 through 5 to place additional joined trace segments Complete trace placement using one of two methods e Click right e Click on or near a pin no further away than the pin snap threshold value specified in the Options dialog box in the Tools menu trace segment or via which is on the cu
161. e pad is removed an areafill will clear the 9 16 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks hole by the drill Clearance value Otherwise the areafill will clear by the clearance defined in the pad definition Saving the Definition To save the definition 1 Click OK to save all changes to save this definition 2 In the Configure Padstacks dialog box click OK to save the changes to the set of padstacks 3 Use Export Padstacks in the Library menu to save the definition to disk Editing Padstacks To edit a padstack definition 1 Select Padstack from the Configure menu Configure Padstacks Padstack Name Description rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru rnd thru square thru 050 pad 030 drill square thru 065 pad 045 drill 060 pad 039 drill 060 pad 040 drill 063 pad 043 drill 065 pad 045 drill 075 pad 040 drill 080 pad 040 drill 080 pad 050 drill 081 pad 061 drill 085 pad 065 drill 095 pad 060 drill 095 pad 065 drill 100 pad 075 drill 2 03mm pad 1 52mm drill 350 pad 217 drill square thru 075 pad 040 drill square smt 1 00mm 2 Click Edit PadStack Definition Lx Padstack Name fec 20x1 40 Description frect smt 1 20mm x 1 40mm Cancel m Pad Definition r Drill On Layer Width Orientation Match Template
162. e photoplot files NC drill files checkplots reports and DXF files see Chapter 14 Postprocessing Layout Editor 1 5 To change existing layout local definitions you must deliberately apply new library definitions 1 6 Using the Layout Editor Layout Database The layout database is a self contained repository for all electrical and physical information describing a board layout It also contains user defined configuration preferences for layout construction and editor operation PCBoards updates the layout database as the design evolves including local copies of any related package footprint and padstack definitions retrieved from the libraries The layout database is maintained as an ASCII file pca extension making it portable between computing platforms The Layout Editor Window 1 7 The Layout Editor Window When first activated PCBoards automatically opens a layout editor window Menu amp File Edit Draw View Configure Tools Library Window Help Bar ofsjaj 8 le aA Leele NIN al L Toolbar El Ultrace_8 a Drop Down Debs teenies Lists Work Area ee ee Grid Markers al P2700 00 1100 00 du Cursor mn Current Status N Last Command Figure 1 1 Layout Editor Window From this layout editor window you can open additional work areas each for a different layout database Standard Microsoft Window features title bars scroll bars minimize buttons etc appl
163. e snap grid is enabled and the trace you are routing to or from lies between grid points You can also place vias with the same accuracy Smart Snap works with the following conditions even if the snap grid is enabled Begin a trace segment When you begin a trace so the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the starting point of the new segment at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Startpoint to the left of existing trace Trace startpoint Existing trace is between grid points Smart Snapped to Grid Snap is enabled existing trace endpoint before starting new trace after starting new trace segment segment Understanding the Smart Functions 6 9 End a segment When you end a trace segment so that the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the endpoint of the new segment at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Endpoint to the left of existing trace Existing trace is between grid points Grid Snap is enabled HHI 11111 Stubless end of new trace TT TT Sh mm mm before ending new trace segment after ending new trace segment Drag a segment When you drag a trace segment and complete the move s
164. eafills can be set to DRAFT the default or SOLID The draft mode is best for editing and general design work because it reduces the amount of time required to redraw the image Use SOLID to verify the finished areafill image and for post processing The areafills must be displayed in the SOLID mode when generating Gerber files B 18 Tutorial AR Chapter 7 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter Af See the online AutoRouter User s Guide Tutorial 5 Autorouting with CCT SPECCTRA Tutorial 5 demonstrates how to setup the autorouting parameters and autoroute a layout 1 2 Select Open from the File menu and select eval_2p pca Review CCT Setup parameters a Select CCT Setup from the Tools menu to review the routing parameters such as routing grid trace width and clearance etc b Click Cancel to exit without changing Review advanced autorouting rules a Select CCT NetRules from the Tools menu to review the more advanced autorouting rules b Click Cancel to exit without changing Run the autorouter using the default rules a Select CCT Autoroute from the Tools menu After routing is completed the routes will be read back into PCBoards automatically Select Save As from the File menu and type in the filename tutor2r pca Experiment with different routing rules to learn more about how the SPECCTRA autorouter connects the traces under differing conditions and constraints Use the Advanced options a
165. earest snap ring when dragged Ea positon HHI D Hl Intended new al ks position g MANI before moving trace segment after moving trace segment 8 4 Editing Traces The snap ring radius graphically indicates the SnapThreshold setting Place or drag a via When you place a new via or drag an existing via so that the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the center of the via at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Snap ring above existing trace in preparation to add via Existing trace New via added is between grid points Grid Snap is On TW Sk Il al gt before adding new via after adding new via Note f the snap grid is active and an active grid point also falls within the snap ring then the imaginary line passes through the grid point rather than the center point of the snap ring Snap threshold The SnapThreshold defines the maximum distance at which a connection is automatically completed when you locate a trace vertex near a pin or other electrical object on the current net To set the Snap Threshold Select Options from the Tools menu 2 Enter a value in the Snap to Pin text box located in the Interaction Preferences section of the dialog box The format for entering a value is threshold value units 3 Click OK to exit t
166. ectly during trace routing Vias are compound objects that always have an associated padstack definition as defined by the current trace style When Understanding Pins and Vias 6 17 you place vias PCBoards generates pad and mask graphics on their own respective layers Placing a via To place a via directly Select Add Via from the Draw menu o 2 Click at the position where you want the via The via starts on the current layer and ends on the layer pair partner If the padstack has been defined Always Through the start and end layers are Top and Bottom To place a via while routing traces Start a trace segment from a pin trace segment or via 2 Move the cursor to where you want to place a via and click to end the segment 3 Transition to another layer e Press to transition to the current layer pair partner e Make a different signal layer current by using the Layer drop down list Click to place the via and continue the trace Repeat steps 1 through 4 to place as many vias as you need 6 18 Routing Interactively After you place vias you can edit the following properties see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Table 6 3 Editable Via Properties Attribute Syntax VIA_PADSTACK VIA_TESTPOINT VIA_PROTECTED padstack definition name lt TOP BOTTOM BOTH gt specifying which surface is used for probing lt YES NO gt Working with Areafills 6 19 Working wit
167. elected DXF layer Initially all destination layers are named NONE unless a layer in the current PCBoards layout matches a DXF layer name If there are matching names the destination layer assumes that name Creating the Board Outline 3 23 4 Set the DXF unit and value Because information is not available to automatically determine the unit at which the DXF file was created you must provide the units in which the DXF file was produced The default unit and value is one inch 1 5 Click OK 3 24 Defining the Circuit Board 62 5m DRC Emi Cancel PadStack Definition El Padstack Name ind 060 035 Description find thru 060 pad 035 dril Cancel Pad Definition Dril Shape Round pi Bana ani Width f60mil Clearance fiom Hew JE FX Always Through Clearance Emi eat tl A Thermal Relief Solder Spoke width TOml Swell Sm rie tion 2 Y Remove Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers Paste Shrink Omil Adding Holes You can place unplated and plated holes in the layout The layout editor automatically places a circle reflecting the specified diameter on the uppermost displayed signal layer It also automatically places corresponding drill symbol graphics on the DrillSymbols layer Adding Unplated Holes To place unplated holes From the Draw menu select Hole In the Diameter text box enter diameter and unit values In the DRC text box enter clearance and unit valu
168. end positioning mode To automatically position pins in the matrix 1 Choose Pin Array from the Draw menu See To interactively position pins in an array on page 10 14 for dialog box control descriptions Select Enable in the Auto Complete section Specify the total number of rows in the Number of Rows text box Specify the total number of columns in the Number of Columns text box Optionally eliminate I O S X Y and Z column identifiers Manually position three pins to define sequence and pattern as follows refer to Figure 10 3 and Figure 10 4 a Place the first pin in column 1 b Place the second pin in column 1 c Place the third pin in column 2 Creating a New Footprint 10 15 Pins are interactively positioned in a manner similar to using Pins from the Draw menu However pin numbers are a composite of the form column position row position For example the matrix in Figure 10 5 generates pin numbers such as A1 A2 B1 etc Draw Pin Array Lx Row Start fa Column Start fi Auto Complete T Enable Number of RowsJ24 M Skip y M Skip C Number of Cols 24 M Skips M Skipx OK M Skip Y Lx MV SkipZ Cancel 10 16 Creating and Editing Footprints The Auto Complete feature replicates the pattern until pins fill the specified matrix 12345678 91011121314 10 A2 e A ee000000000000 B 2000000000000 cC 00000000000000 D00000000000000 E 00000000000000 F 00000000000000 10 G0000
169. ent grid spacing value and units To add a new value If the value you want to use isn t in the selection list 1 In the Grid Spacing text box type a value and units 2 Click the Add button To change an existing value If you want to change a value in the selection list without adding to the list 1 From the selection list select the value 2 Inthe Grid Spacing text box type a value and units 3 Click the Change button 4 Click the OK button Turning On the Snap Grid To turn the snap grid on 1 Select the Snap check box Enabling the snap grid causes objects subsequently placed in the work area to be positioned on the nearest grid point When Snap is cleared the snap grid is ignored To set the Object Placement point If Snap is selected an object is placed on the grid point according to the status of the Placement Center option in the Selection Filter 1 From the Configure menu select Selection Filter 2 Select or clear Placement Center Selecting the Placement Center check box positions the object by placing the Machine Placement Center on the grid point Clearing Placement Center positions the object according to the point where you selected it Defining Grids 3 7 When exiting the dialog box the Grid Spacing value becomes the current grid spacing when Snap is enabled Shortcut Selection Filter Include All M Text Include Al a Ai Exclude Al IV Placement Center T Logical Connections
170. ents Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Understanding the Smart Functions o e 6 8 Understanding Smart MaP o e 6 8 Sjap thresholds sa gee adas eee 6 10 Using Automatic Loop Removal o o 6 11 Understanding Smart Select o ooo o ai 6 12 Understanding Smart Move s s socne a mos o aos 2 a i E ee 6 13 Understanding Pins and ViaSs s ce pise cos essea RR d a a ew y 6 16 PINS cs e DAK A REM i RRL Oe we E RO 6 16 Mias paca RN 6 16 Pl cing a Vi e se OES RES a EA OHS Gag SE oS 6 17 Working with AfeafillS s 6 2 2 43 nad e Owe E Hee WE E Hae a 6 19 SMT Considerations os e oaceae e aa a i ee 6 19 Split Power and Grounds lt ss sos s soma ome oora o e a 6 19 Volse sesa Sa ae hoe O A OSG eH Oe SS 6 20 Editing void boundanes 2 sc se 4 ai 4 4 44 40a SKA w OS SS 6 20 Islands cs 6 Bans amp 2 amp GES HAO RBS ROR CEG oR ESA 6 23 Automatic Spoke Removal 0 0020004 6 24 Hints and TIPS soso s sob Bad amp wag me geome a Sew Gok y amp oe ake amp 6 25 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter OVEIVIEW 2 64 264 45045 6 9 POR SSSE EKG OSE MAES Ganid 7 1 Setting up for Autorouting o ee ee 7 3 Verifying Advanced NetRules e aee adeo anaa e Da ee ee 7 6 Starting the Autorouters sa 04054048025 6404 9H 34404 a0 44 7 8 Reading the route file automatically 7 8 Reading the route file interactively o 7 9 Hints and
171. eoBlle i ap y G36 ohio BB Bot BG ui bas BASES Se Bee a2 12 4 Pe hoe Elle cu ss oad Be wee ORDA BA OSS cA aS 12 4 Applying Backward ECOS o o 000000004 12 5 Working with Forward ECOS s e ca ocs oco o o e e 12 7 Flo Los Blesa dhe MS ek a E Bae A 12 7 Applying Forward ECOS o e o 12 7 Comparing NetlisStS eus mas a A Ar da 12 10 Hints nd TIPS gece de e ea e Dd ie 12 12 Chapter 13 Finalizing the Design OVEIVIEW sc Oe bh ae SRS BEG AA A DS 13 1 Reannotating the Reference Designators 04 13 3 Editing REFDES and Type_Name Attribute Text Display 13 4 Setting Areafill Fill and Island Properties 0 4 13 6 Setting Up Test Polis tos pss dieses sh S e Geb ob Gow ak 13 8 Checking for Unrouted Nets and Pins o o 13 10 Veritying Desis Rules erecta poe e di E 13 11 Running Online DRC p s esca 2244 Baws ORR SRS Ge SEY g 13 11 Running Batch DRG zes es ee eh Aw dre eS ee Sa E 13 12 Examining DRC Priors 4444444445044 64444386 44454 13 13 Formatting DrillSymbols lt lt lt 13 15 Chapter 14 Postprocessing OVEIVICW t 2 o a p Sand Got bard de Bw oda 14 1 Setting Up IODS 64 6 Ba eG eo e on Mew we OR OR dak eR Oe em 14 3 Automatically Adding New Jobs 0 o o 14 3 Interactively Adding New Jobs o o 14 6 Adding New Jobs from an Existing Job Definition
172. er in the layout to check for accuracy Note that the current version of PCBoards does not provide auto dimensioning features or sophisticated drafting tools for creating fabrication and assembly drawings By using the dxf export function with particular layers displayed File Export DXF the data from the layout can be converted to a dx file for use in third party mechanical drafting CAD software To generate accurate areafill images ensure you change the Fill_Display_Mode attribute to SOLID for every areafill prior to processing the photoplot files The current display mode of the areafills determine how they appear in the Gerber file Hints and Tips 14 45 Using the Keyboard You can use single keys and key sequences to invoke the most commonly used PCBoards functions The table below lists shortcut keys and key sequences their equivalent menu item and the function they perform Table A 1 Keyboard Shortcuts Shortcut Key s Equivalent Menu Item Menu Accelerators Function LF1 Help Contents F2 Configure Snap Grid F3 Configure Layer Display F4 Configure Padstacks F5 Configure Selection Filter F6 Configure Styles Text Run online help Enable disable the snap grid and set required spacing Change displayed layers Create edit a padstack definition Define criteria for selecting layout objects Change current text style A 2 Using the Keyboard Table A 1 Keyboard Shortcuts cont
173. ere initially placed so selecting the proper edge is significant Based on the direction of board signal keepin creation you should select the edge that is in front of or behind the vertex you want to delete 1 Click on the edge in front of or behind the vertex you want to delete Press FBksp Continue pressing until you delete all the vertices needed To move an edge You can move an edge by simultaneously capturing both its vertices within a region selection rectangle This method moves the edge and its vertices to the new position 1 Drag a selection rectangle around two or more vertices that define the edge you want to move You can add to the set of selected objects by holding down while you are making the selection Drawing a Board Signal Keepin 3 27 2 Drag the vertex and the edge to the new position When you move one vertex all selected vertices objects move the same distance and direction You can also move an edge by clicking on the boundary edge you want to move This method of moving an edge leaves the original defining vertices at their current position and establishes new vertices at the new position 1 Click on the edge you want to move 2 Drag one of the vertices to a new position New vertices are created at the new position and the original defining vertices are left where they are 3 28 Defining the Circuit Board Configuring Layers PCBoards partitions a design into layers of function
174. erlined in the menu item name 3 Go to the next menu item a Go back one menu item o Scroll up through menu items Scroll down through menu items Enter lt 4 Display highlighted menu from menu bar or activate highlighted menu item from drop down list Dialog Next field Eo Shift Tab s Previous field Esc Cancel dialog Execute the currently selected or default command button General Layout Footprint Editing e Edit Move Delta Move the selected objects in the direction 0 of the pressed arrow key by the amount indicated by the current grid spacing A 5 Table A 1 Keyboard Shortcuts continued Shortcut Key s Equivalent Menu Item Function Ctr F When pasting objects change reference point for the selection set so that objects can be precisely placed at that point Abort either Redraw of areafills Or in progress DRC Rotate component when in place component mode Draw Add Component Rotate component after placement Flip component to opposite surface when in place component mode Draw Add Component Flip component to opposite surface after placement Interactive Trace Routing Tab si Layers drop down list toolbar or Configure Layers Layers drop down list toolbar or Configure Layers Y Layers drop down list toolbar or Configure Layers Bksp 0 4 9 Configure Trace Placement Mode When trace routing change board l
175. es DRC defines the required clearance between the hole and other layout objects After placing a hole you can edit the Diameter and DRC properties See Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Adding Plated Holes Plated holes are vias in PCBoards Create or select a trace style with the appropriate padstack definition for the diameter and plating characteristics of the hole Ensure the Always Through check box is selected in the padstack definition Place a plated hole by positioning a via object on a board layer See Vias on page 6 16 for a detailed explanation and placement procedures Drawing a Board Signal Keepin 3 25 Drawing a Board Signal Keepin Board Signal Keepin is a polygonal boundary used by the DRC and autorouter functions It defines the region that traces vias and areafills must stay within The layout editor automatically places the Board Signal Keepin graphics on the BoardSigKeepin layer To define a Board Signal Keepin 1 From the Draw menu select Board Signal Keepin The cursor changes to a pencil Click the position where you want to start the boundary the first vertex Move the cursor to the location for the next vertex A rubberband polygon appears Click to establish the vertex point Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have all sides of the polygon defined Right click to complete the boundary and exit the draw mode Editing a Board Signal Keepin Boundary You c
176. es deselects them Unselect All deselects all of the nets in the Net Names list box Subsequent clicks on highlighted entries reselects them Highlight Nets Net Names 2 Click on the net names of interest entry is highlighted when selected 3 Click OK Clearing Highlighted Nets To clear highlighted nets select Clear Highlights from the View menu Routing Traces Traces define conductive paths connecting two component pins Traces can be routed either using the layout editor s trace drawing capabilities or automatically autorouting based on the layout s ratsnest configuration and chosen routing rules Regardless of the routing method routed traces can be modified using graphical trace editing capabilities Trace routing is affected by trace style default width clearance and via padstack association layer bias when autorouting and configurations for rubberbanding snap grid and pin snap threshold A trace segment can be placed at any angle To route traces interactively Select Trace from the Draw menu 2 Select the trace style from the Styles drop down list You can change styles at any time while routing 3 Select the starting trace segment position by clicking at either a pin existing trace segment via areafill or at an arbitrary cursor position 4 Move the cursor to the end point of the trace segment You have control over the three methods for placing trace segments
177. es your preferred color for displaying Signal F Display layout objects on a specific layer aarete I Protect You can create custom colors by choosing the Define Custom Colors button and filling in the RGB hue saturation and luminosity values Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for more information 5 4 Preparing the Layout for Routing This control is used primarily for autorouting and therefore does not apply to graphic layers Layer Type governs whether the layer is used for routing and metal or for graphic objects e Signal designates the layer as a signal layer meaning that electrical objects such as traces vias and areafills can be placed on the layer Text can also be placed and is treated as a keepout graphic objects cannot Such layers are annotated with S in the Flags list e Graphic designates the layer as a graphic layer meaning lines rectangles arcs circles and text can be placed on the layer electrical objects such as traces vias and areafills cannot Layer Settings Lx Layer Name I SikTog System Layer Tag SikTop Layer Type Graphic Display Color L Set M Display I Protect Cancel 6 Choose the routing bias Routing Bias defines the preferred direction for trace routing Valid values are Horiz horizontal Vert vertical or None no preference System defined layers are initialized with None Routing layers any signal layers not define
178. estarts Areafill You can click on other edges and create more vertices in the same or a different areafill without leaving the Draw mode 6 22 Routing Interactively 2 Drag the vertex and the edge to the new position When you move one vertex all selected vertices objects move the same distance and direction You can also move an edge by clicking on the boundary edge you want to move This method of moving an edge leaves the original defining vertices at their current position and establishes new vertices at the new position 1 Click on the edge you want to move 2 Drag one of the vertices to a new position New vertices are created at the new position and the original defining vertices are left where they are Working with Areafills 6 23 Islands PCBoards automatically detects floating conductive regions or islands where the areafill is divided and a portion of it is not connected to its net The white area inside the black areafill in Figure 6 1 shows an island Tn Tn I NM D Island S ENNI Figure 6 1 An Island in an Areafill You have a choice to display or not display islands Displaying the island means that metal fills the island and the areafill appears as one solid area Not displaying the island means the metal is removed from the island and the areafill appears as above Note Since displaying islands means that they are filled with metal generating a Gerber file with islands
179. fi T Save Settings 2 Select Auto Loop Removal mil C mm T Best Rep Repaint e Fill C Outline One Pass Formal V Current Last 6 12 Routing Interactively 3 Click OK to exit the dialog box Understanding Smart Select When you move an individual trace segment or the vertex of multiple segments or other objects Smart Select automatically extends selection to all traces and objects affected by the move There are two distinct behaviors depending on the object you select and where you select it Single trace selected in the middle When you select a single trace element in the middle of the trace and move it to a new location PCBoards automatically selects all traces and other objects attached to either end of the selected trace and moves or stretches them accordingly Segment selected in the middle s Segment connecting for dragging traces and objects moved to the new location IHI N All connecting 2 im traces and objects are highlighted also during trace segment move after trace segment move Trace or object selected at vertex When you select a trace or object at a vertex where multiple traces or objects converge and perform a move operation PCBoards automatically selects all traces and objects connected to the vertex and moves or stretches them accordingly Understanding the Smart Functions 6 13 All converging traces and objects are selected Converging move
180. fi T Save Settings Cancel 2 Select Online DRC 3 Click OK to exit Using Batch DRC Running DRC in batch means that you activate DRC by selecting DRC from the Tools menu If you are not running DRC in the online mode you must run it in batch mode if you want a DRC on your layout At any time batch DRC may be run on either the entire design or a selected subset of the design Batch DRC should be used when updating padstacks or footprints using Padstack from the Configure menu or Load Padstack and Update Footprint from the Library menu These operations delete the markers for prior violations but do not trigger an automatic check 5 21 5 22 Preparing the Layout for Routing To run batch DRC 1 Either e Group select the portion of the layout to be considered for DRC e Or select nothing to check the full board 2 From the Tools menu select DRC To abort in progress DRC 1 Press 2 Shift Routing Interactively Overview This chapter discusses the information you need to know for routing interactively not using the autorouter The following sections are in this chapter Highlighting Nets on page 6 3 tells you how to highlight one or more nets for easy viewing Routing Traces on page 6 5 discusses trace segments their properties and associated objects as well as how to place them in the layout Understanding the Smart Functions on page 6 8 conceptually describes how the system handles certain
181. finition file must first be designated as the recipient for the exported definitions 14 30 Postprocessing An imported tool definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the layout database Before copying over the definition a prompt will request confirmation of the import operation Importing tool definitions Import allows tool definitions that you have previously exported to be copied into the layout database for the current design Definitions are selected from a tool definition file tdf extension which is opened via a standard Open dialog box An imported tool definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the layout database Before copying over the definition a prompt will request confirmation of the import operation To import an tool definition Click Import Choose the directory where the tool file resides Enter a file name Click Open bb O N a Setting up the Format Setting up the format defines format properties required to generate device specific control statements To set up the format 1 Point to NC Drill from the File menu and select Format NC Drill Data Format Digits Zero Suppression Integer Decimal Trailing s 2 e 4 El I Use Metric Units l Sort By X Before Y l Save Settings OK 2 Define the number of digits to the left and right of a coordinate s decimal point Generating NC Drill Files 14 31 e In
182. for the following parameters Table 7 1 Board wide Default Rules Parameter Description trace width trace clearance via pin clearance via padstack trace grid via grid defines the trace width defines the required space between the trace and other layout objects The initial value is the greater of the current trace style clearance and the manufacturing minimum copper clearance values Format width value units defines the required space between e traces and padstacks associated with vias and pins e vias and pins e vias The initial value is the largest pad or drill clearance of all pin and via padstacks in the design or the manufacturing minimum copper clearance whichever is greater Format clearance value units defines the padstack definition to be used for vias unless there is an overriding net rule This list contains only the round padstack definitions that are currently available for use Initially it is set to the via padstack of the current trace style Format clearance value units defines the default grid spacing for routing Either a single board wide grid can be set or different grids can be used for different layers defines the minimum grid spacing for via placement applied to all routing passes after the first three 7 4 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter Table 7 1 Board wide Default Rules continued routing control defines how trace segments are esta
183. fter oblique horizontal move Oblique angle with a vertical trace When you select and move a trace that is at an oblique angle and has a vertical trace connected at either or both ends PCBoards maintains the X axis positions of both ends of the oblique trace even if the trace lies between grid points 8 10 Editing Traces X axis coordinates maintained even though they lie otweor ard eoints CUNT ke g mm Oblique segment a immm Segment move being moved completed vertically during oblique vertical move after oblique vertical move Note Ifyou select and move a trace that is at an oblique angle with a horizontal trace at one end and a vertical trace at the other PCBoards can only maintain the x axis and y axis positions at the ends of the oblique trace if the ends lie on a grid point If the ends lie between grid points PCBoards snaps them to the nearest grid point You can override Smart Move by moving a horizontally oriented trace in a horizontal direction a distance approximately equal to the current grid setting or a vertically oriented trace in a vertical direction the same distance Cutting Copying and Pasting Traces 8 11 Cutting Copying and Pasting Traces Cutting Traces When you cut a trace PCBoards removes it from the layout and copies it to the paste buffer for subsequent pasting action You can cut traces individually or in groups To cut a trace 1 Select the trace s you want to cut
184. g 4 13 while static 4 12 route file reading automatically 7 8 reading interactively 7 9 routing bias 3 36 5 4 traces interactively 6 5 rubberbanding 8 7 tules design verifying 13 11 electrical 5 16 examining DRC errors 13 13 running a Bill of Materials report 14 34 DRC automatically See On Line DRC DRC Batch 13 12 DRC interactively See Batch DRC DRC On Line 13 11 S Schematics input nlf file 2 4 scrollbar movement changing 1 19 scrollbar panning 1 19 search order rearranging footprint library 10 7 rearranging package library 11 7 segments copying 8 11 cutting 8 11 deleting 8 13 pasting 8 12 routing interactively 6 5 setting clearance values 5 18 Select Smart function 6 12 8 6 selecting objects auto extend 1 15 extending an existing selection 1 15 Find command 1 17 groups 1 14 single 1 14 selection filter 1 15 Setup command footprint library 10 5 package library 11 5 padstack library 9 7 severity markers 1 34 shared pin package definitions 11 12 shortcut keys A 1 signal keepin 3 25 signal layers 3 28 creating a via while routing 6 6 SilkBottom layer 3 31 SilkTop layer 3 30 Smart Move 6 13 8 8 Select 6 12 8 6 Snap 6 8 8 2 SMT components flipping while dragging 4 12 flipping while static 4 12 SMT considerations areafill 6 19 SMTAssyDrwBottom layer 3 31 SMTAssyDrwTop layer 3 29 Snap check box 3 7 snap grid turning on 3 7 10 11 Snap Smar
185. g Flags Bias BoardOutline BoardOutline New BoardSigKeepin BoardSigKeepin GD BoundaryT op BoundaryT op GD Ei AssemblyT op AssyDrwT op GD Delete SMTAssemblyT op SMTAssyDrwT op GD ma PasteTop PasteMaskT op G MaskTop SolderMaskT op Color SikTop SilkT op Component Top SD None Cert Solder Bottom SD None SilkBot SilkBottom GD Up MaskBot SolderMaskBottom G T PasteBot PasteMaskBottom G AssemblyB ot AssyDrwB ottom GD SMTAssemblyBot SMTAssyDrwB ottom GD BoundaryBot BoundaryB ottom GD Drill DrillSymbol GD Ratsnest Ratsnest GD DRC DRC GD Table 5 1 Layer Flag Codes Flags are Current Signal Graphic Displayed Protected Cancel Code Meanin g i Current layer The Configure Layers dialog box allows you access to layer E functions and displays layer statistics S Signal layer Select the existing layer where you want to insert the new G Graphic layer layer D Display P Protect The new layer appears below the selected layer You can reposition user defined layers after initial placement by using the 4 and 4 keys The following rules apply e Position graphic layers anywhere in the list e Position UserDefined signal layers between the Component and Solder layers Click the New button war Enter a layer name Layer Name UserLayerl Set the layout object display color by clicking the Set a _ button Routing Bias Vert Layer Type Display Color defin
186. g a DXF File The DXF Design Exchange Format file contains information that describes the objects in the layout The DXF file is used as input to AutoCAD which can be used to generate fabrication artwork with dimensional data To generate an AutoCAD DXF file 1 From the File menu point to Export and select DXF DXF Output Options x PCBoards Source Layer Selection BoardOutline a ae text ST IM BoardSigkeepin a TEXT entities BoundaryTop Line segments Cancel A AssemblyT op 7 5 ma SMTAssemblyTop p Rounded line ends Help H PasteTop Output as BLOCKs M MaskTop C Output as separate entities H sikTop Do not output i Component Solder ADXF uniti f0 fich E SilkBot f MaskBot i PasteBot AssemblyBot Select All SMTAssemblyBot DS nnn ul Clear All 2 Define the layers to be included in the output You can e select one or more layers individually e click the Select All button to select all layers e click the Clear All button to clear all selected layers If you want to select only a few layers from a list of many clearing all layers and then selecting the few is a convenient method 3 In the Output Text As frame choose the method for outputting text entitites e The TEXT Entities option maintains text as editiable entities in the DXF file e The LINE SEGMENTS option coverts text into individual line segments in the DXF file 14 42 Postprocessing 4 In the Rounded Line Ends
187. g the centerpoint graphically Graphic Objects 3 13 Arc by Coord amp Radius om Radius 500mil Angle Start 0 000000 End 45 000000 a 3 14 Defining the Circuit Board To draw an Arc Center amp Radius arc 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Arc Arc by Center amp Radius Center amp Radius Radius s00mil 2 Type a radius value pale Type the start and end angle values Start 0 000000 End 45 000000 The start and end angles are measured counter clockwise starting at zero degrees from the positive X axis 4 Move the cursor to the desired centerpoint position in the work area As you move the cursor the arc also moves relative to the cursor position separated by the radius distance 5 Click to place the arc 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to place additional arcs 7 Click right to end draw mode After placing an arc s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Line coord Line Coord lets you draw a line by specifying the start and end coordinates To draw a Line Coord line 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select First End Point Line Coord EJ 2 Type the x y coordinates for the startpoint omit REO 3 Type the x y coordinates for the endpoint Note All coordinate values are measured from the layout origin 0 0 4 Click OK to exit and draw the line x 1000 il ok Y
188. h Areafills When working with areafills it is very important that you be aware of how they associate with other electrical elements of the design An areafill is always either physically connected to a net that A physical connection to an appears in the design netlist or else it is floating For an areafill areafill can only be established to be physically connected there must be an unbroken at the site of a pin or via conductive path between the interior of the areafill to a pin or via that appears in the design netlist PCBoards determines to which net the areafill should be connected at the time the areafill is defined It is therefore important that you establish a suitable pin or via site for the correct net and on the proper layer before you create a new areafill It is also vitally important that you establish the correct net assignments for all areafills in the design before using the autorouter This is especially true for areafills that are used to form internal planes SMT Considerations In designs that make heavy or exclusive use of SMT components it may actually be necessary to partially route traces from pins and drop vias to or through layers where areafills reside Split Power and Grounds You can define multiple areafills on a single layer and associate each areafill with a different net such as PWR and GND 6 20 Routing Interactively The default value of 80 can be changed by modifying the CCTPLANEP
189. hapter Modifying the Layer Configuration on page 5 2 reviews how to modify the layer configuration Drawing and Editing Areafills for Plane Layers on page 5 8 discusses areafills and their uses Adding a Keepout on page 5 15 explains how to add areas where electrical objects cannot be placed Using Design Rule Check DRC on page 5 16 gives a detailed discussion of DRC 5 2 Preparing the Layout for Routing Modifying the Layer Configuration You can modify the set of system defined and user defined layers comprising a given layout Every layout is comprised of one instance of each system defined layer type These are described in Table 3 1 on page 3 29 The configuration order for system defined layers is fixed The twelve layers tagged BoundaryTop through BoundaryBottom are also characterized by having a partner layer thus forming a layer pair that reflects an implicit association between upper and lower surfaces of the board e g SilkTop and SilkBottom A complete list of implicit layer pairs is shown in Table 3 3 on page 3 34 Creating a User Defined Layer Though the configuration order for system defined layers is fixed you can insert user defined signal layers between the Component and Solder layers and graphics layers anywhere To create a user defined layer 1 From the Configure menu select Layers Modifying the Layer Configuration 5 3 Layer Name System Layer Ta
190. he Corner board where you want to start reannotating e Column when chosen steps 3 Click the Row or Column option button to choose the through the board column by direction of sweep column always starting each column sweep from the top or 4 Select the reference designator families you want PCBoards bottom edge as defined by to reannotate Starting Corner 5 Click OK Ref Des Family is used to select one or more families of reference designators to be resequenced 13 4 Finalizing the Design Shortcut or Editing REFDES and Type_Name Attribute Text Display To edit the REFDES and Type_Name displays 1 Select Attributes from the Edit menu Name REFDES ALD1701 AL DIP8 Delete Component 1300mil 600mil NO For a detailed explanation of the Attributes dialog box see Changing Object Attributes on page 1 44 Select REFDES or TYPE NAME Click the Display button Display allows the currently selected attribute to be customized for e the layer s on which the attribute value is to be visible e the display parameters of the text on each given layer Editing REFDES and Type_Name Attribute Text Display 13 5 Display Parameters Attribute REFDES Parameters Styles Assign to Layer a Height 62 5mil TEXT_STD Clear from Layer Component Angle 90 Solder gt SilkBot Weight 5mil BdryBot Justification OOO Oe O ODO Select a layer from the Layer list box Set the tex
191. he Hints and Tips then experiment with each of the techniques using the file eval_lr pca Guidelines 1 PCBoards supports an object action paradigm select one or more objects and then choose an action A common action for trace editing is movement Movement of selected trace elements is typically invoked by one of four methods The two most common ways to move trace elements are dragging with the mouse and nudging with the cursor keys Move Delta and Rotate from the Edit menu are other ways to move selected elements of the design All selected elements will respond equally to whatever movement command is invoked The most useful method of object selection during trace editing is region selection Select vertices by dragging a rectangle around endpoints of segments rather than by clicking on or near the endpoints of the segments Avoid using a small snap grid spacing especially while using Draw Trace The grid space value is used to control automatic suppression of segment stubs for orthogonal and ortho 45 trace placement modes In these modes PCBoards is designed to suppress the second segment if it is less than one half of the current grid space value If the grid space is very small say less than 10mil unwanted stubs are not effectively suppressed Tutorial 6 Editing traces in PCBoards B 21 Leave the grid spacing set to a value that reflects the nominal center to center trace spacing for the design you are working on
192. he dialog box Understanding the Smart Functions 8 5 Using Automatic Loop Removal A simple path is a contiguous chain of trace segments and possibly vias between two distinct vertices If existing trace segments and vias create a single simple path and you create an alternate single simple path between the same two vertices you create a loop Automatic loop removal removes the original path in favor of the alternate path Segment with which a loop will be made Intended new trace segment L00p removed automatically before looping trace segment after looping trace segment To activate Automatic Loop Removal 1 Select Options from the Tools menu Options x Interaction Preferences gt Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold fi Smil C mm Rotation Increment 30 Deg T Best Rep Y Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC JT DRC Sound E Fill Y Crosshair IV Auto Netlist Check C Outline I Optimize Rats I Auto Loop Remove One Pass Zoom Pan Delta Formal Scale a Coarse 25 V Current Last Fit so Fine fi Autopan Autosave TN Enable TM Enable Sensitivity fi 000 ms Every fi 5 Min Hot Zone fi T Save Settings 2 Select Auto Loop Removal 8 6 Editing Traces 3 Click OK to exit the dialog box Understanding Smart Select When you move an individual trace segment or the vertex of multiple segments o
193. he minimum manufacturing clearance is the smallest value used see Setting minimum manufacturing values on page 5 16 Setting pad clearances Individual pad clearance requirements are initialized within padstack definitions Padstack definitions are created using New in the Padstacks dialog box in the Configure menu Within each definition pad clearances can be defined for each signal layer in the design Every component pin or via is set up with a default association to a padstack definition Thus when either a component or via is added to the design the appropriate padstack definition is automatically applied The default padstack association is defined as follows e For component pins padstack associations are defined within footprint definitions see Assigning a Padstack on page 10 12 e For vias padstack associations are defined in two ways e when routing from trace style definitions or e when placing vias using Add Via from the Draw menu by the current via style defined in the Style box in the toolbar See Vias on page 6 16 for further information 5 20 Preparing the Layout for Routing To change pad clearances for all pins and vias referencing a given padstack definition Note Every pin or via Edit the padstack definition changing the pad clearance value as instance is associated with a needed for each layer see Editing Padstacks on page 9 17 padstack definition Thus changes to the definition
194. he schematic are communicated to PCBoards through the schematic netlist file The netlist file must be deliberately written to disk from within Schematics to make sure it is up to date If the Auto Netlist Check feature is enabled Options in the Configure menu when you invoke PCBoards or bring it to the foreground it automatically compares the latest schematic netlist to the current layout and displays the differences the pending forward annotations flg Log File An audit trail of ECO decisions whether changes are incorporated or ignored is maintained in the forward ECO log file 19 Applying Forward ECOs The following procedure assumes that Schematics and PCBoards are run from the same installation and that the schematic and layout are in the same directory Note Auto Netlist Check must be enabled in the Options dialog box from the Tools menu in PCBoards When you modify a schematic and create a netlist that reflects those changes a forward ECO condition exists To process forward ECOs 1 Activate Schematics if it is not activated 12 8 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs Note Step 2 is a critical step Without updating the schematics netlist an outdated netlist is compared When you activate PCBoards or bring the layout editor to the foreground it automatically determines the differences between the schematic netlist and the current layout and displays the Forward ECO dialog box If Cancel is chose
195. horizontal move after horizontal move Oblique angle with a horizontal trace When you select and move a trace that is at an oblique angle and has a horizontal trace connected at either or both ends PCBoards maintains the y axis positions of both ends of the oblique trace even if the trace lies between grid points Understanding the Smart Functions 6 15 Y axis coordinates Oblique segment being maintained even moved horizontally though they lie between grid points Segment move completed gt im during oblique horizontal after oblique horizontal Oblique angle with a vertical trace When you select and move a trace that is at an oblique angle and has a vertical trace connected at either or both ends PCBoards maintains the x axis positions of both ends of the oblique trace even if the trace lies between grid points X axis coordinates maintained even though they lie HHH between grid ponen g Ymmi Oblique segment g Ymmi Segment move being moved completed vertically during oblique vertical move after oblique vertical move Note Note Ifyou select and move a trace that is at an oblique angle with a horizontal trace at one end and a vertical trace at the other PCBoards can only maintain the x axis and y axis positions at the ends of the oblique trace if the ends lie on a grid point If the ends lie between grid points PCBoards snaps them to the nearest grid point You can override Smart Move by moving a ho
196. ialog box click OK In the Configure Layers dialog box click OK To change layer display colors 1 2 3 4 6 From the Configure menu select Layers From the Layers list select a layer Click Color Choose a color from the color palette You can create custom colors by choosing the Define Custom Colors button and filling in the RGB hue saturation and luminosity values Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for more information In the Color dialog box click OK In the Configure Layers dialog box click OK To make a layer current 1 From the Configure menu select Layers 2 From the Layers list select a layer 3 Click the Current button 4 Click OK Configuring Layers 3 37 Layer Settings Lx Layer Name System Layer Tag SilkTop Layer Type Graphic Display Color E _ Set M Display I Protect _Cancel Shortcut Select a layer from the Layers drop down list in the toolbar 3 38 Defining the Circuit Board You cannot delete a system defined layer Repositioning User Defined Layers You can reposition user defined layers in the layer list after initial placement by using the 4 and 4 keys The following rules apply e position graphic layers anywhere in the list e position UserDefined signal layers between the Component and Solder layers To reposition a user defined layer 1 From the Configure menu select Layers 2 From the Layers list select a user defined layer
197. ich the areafill is assigned is not changeable in this dialog box However you can reassign it by using the Editing areafill boundaries procedures Options are Yes or No If you choose Yes PCBoards prevents the areafill and the rest of the net from being moved and the boundary from being resized DRC uses this value to check that any two areafills clear each other by at least the larger of the respective areafill clearance values Options are Draft and Solid Select Draft to display the areafill as a boundary without a fill pattern This avoids recalculation of internal geometries and the extra time it takes to redraw fill patterns Select Solid when creating output fabrication files Options are Yes and No If you choose No islands will not be displayed When islands are not displayed they will not be part of the output fabrication files Drawing and Editing Areafills for Plane Layers 5 11 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you are finished editing properties 5 Click OK to exit Fill_Layer displays the layer name on which the areafill resides It is not editable Editing areafill boundaries You can change the shape of an areafill by moving adding and deleting vertices Best results occur when the boundary forms a simple closed shape With a bit of strategy you can perform sophisticated editing To move a vertex Ensure no other objects are currently selected 1 Drag a selection rectangle around the vertex 2
198. ight to end draw mode Graphic Objects 3 9 3 10 Defining the Circuit Board After placing an arc s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Circle Circle from the Draw menu lets you draw a circle and define the centerpoint and radius To draw a circle 1 From the Draw menu select Circle 2 Click on a centerpoint 3 Move the cursor the distance of the desired radius A circle expands as you move away from the centerpoint 4 Click to establish the radius 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to place additional circles 6 Click right to end draw mode After placing a circle s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Line Line from the Draw menu lets you draw a line and define the startpoint and endpoint To draw a line From the Draw menu select Line Click on the startpoint position Move the cursor the desired length of the line A rubberband line appears from the startpoint to the cursor Click to establish the endpoint Repeat steps 2 through 4 to place additional lines Graphic Objects 3 11 6 Click right to end draw mode After placing a line s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Polyline Polyline in the Draw menu lets you draw a joined multi segment line and define the segment startpoint and endpoint To draw a polyline 1 From the Draw menu select Polyline 2 Click on the
199. in RS 274 D format filename dnn NC Drill file s required for operating automated drill machine filename dlg Descriptive log file for NC Drill file s filename hdr Hole definition report file containing drill quantities sizes etc in readable format 14 44 Postprocessing Files Required for Automated Assembly Table 14 3 Files for Automated Assembly File Name Description filename loc Component locations report listing the x y placement coordinates for each component filename bom Bill of Materials report for identifying and ordering parts In addition you may need to export certain images of the layout database into the DXF format for use in creating documentation drawings for fabrication and assembly These files have the name filename dxf and may need to be shipped along with the other deliverables Hints and Tips The Gerber files can be processed in two formats RS 274 D or RS 274 X The 274 D format is an earlier version and requires a separate aperture table file aaf The 274 X format includes the aperture definitions within the Gerber files themselves To confirm the accuracy of the Gerber output use the Gerber readin function in PCBoards Create a new graphics layer using Layers from the Configure menu and make that the current layer Then point to Photoplot from the File menu and select Import Graphics to read in a particular Gerber file This can then be superimposed on the corresponding lay
200. included in layout netlists created by Schematics A pin assignment list is a set of physical pin numbers for each gate Since a device may be available in several package types DIP14 LCC20 etc each of which may have different pin number assignments a single package definition can contain more than one pin assignment list Each pin assignment list is associated with a list of package types footprints for which the pin number assignments are valid 11 Note t is best if you save new package definitions to a user defined library rather than to libraries supplied by MicroSim Installation of new software versions overwrites the system supplied libraries 11 2 Creating and Editing Packages Package definitions are optional for some layout tools but required for PCBoards Package definitions should always be specified when the device has multiple gates and or multiple package types This chapter discusses package libraries and gives you procedures for working with package definitions Topics covered are Understanding the Library Structure on page 11 3 discusses the default package and user defined libraries Managing Package Libraries on page 11 5 explains how to set up the default library It also discusses how to load and export libraries Creating a New Package on page 11 8 describes how to create a new package if a definition you need doesn t exist Editing a Package Definition on page 11 16 explains how
201. ing existing tool definitions 14 29 Exporting tool definitions 0 000 14 29 Importing tool definitions s etcs esoe meor eS RG ee ee iis 14 30 Setting up the Format s ws goea s ea EO ae REE Se HES 14 30 Generating Reports s r 0 6 6 6 rai Fae ES axe HE ae aes e 14 32 Bill of Materials o s esa s a epa Re Re eR a ee a 14 33 Component Locations Report 4 26 2 Geek ea med ed ee wo 14 35 Aperture Information Report o oo 14 36 Hole Drill Schedule Report s i eose saa 2 lt a 14 36 Example 1 Drill schedule with normal vias 14 37 Example 2 Drill schedule with blind and buried vias 14 37 Footprint Statistics Report ss ses e ce arome re a a 14 39 Unrouted Nets Report s as ee caaan be bee PER DE aa OEY a 14 39 DRC Emors Reporte o reacia Be Bk aa p i a Pad Boos E 14 39 Attrib tes Report s to caes r we od ead wee ee aed as Oa a 14 39 Statistics REPOLL s esce s cr p mob m Beara a a a Ge ae 14 40 Testpoints Report ies ce be eee Peewee ERR Ee EOS ES 14 40 Autorouter Report ss ss sacred 64 e465 0404 Sa da 4 14 40 Exporting a DXP Elle 3 24 64 64 F864 BE CER AA DOR GS 14 41 Deliverables corso 0 24a wR eRe Ee Aa Oe 14 43 Files Required for Board Fabrication 14 43 Files Required for Automated Assembly 14 44 Hints and Tips sodas iia ake kida GES HAE amp OES B 14 45 Contents xiii Appendix AUsing the Keyboard Appendix BTutoria
202. ing layout on the first attempt at reading in the netlist If footprint errors are encountered when you are loading or importing a netlist Interactive Netlist Readin logs the errors to the Message Viewer and then takes action based on specific errors to complete reading in the netlist The result is a layout that you can use to correct the errors Typical footprint errors and the actions Interactive Netlist Readin takes are listed below Table 2 2 Typical Netlist Footprint Errors If you get this error The Interactive Netlist Readin does this Starting a New Layout And you do this Package name not found in Package library footprint not specified package name matches an existing footprint definition Package name not found in Package library footprint name not found in Footprint library Package name not found in Package library footprint not specified Package found in Package library Footprint name not found in Footprint library Package found in Package library Footprint found in Footprint library Footprint not listed as a valid alternate for specified package Creates a new package definition based on the existing footprint definition Creates a temporary package and footprint definition using the package and footprint names Creates a temporary package and footprint definition using the package name Uses the first footprint assigned in the package definition that exi
203. initions or changes to existing ones Creati ng a new footp ri nt Creating a New Footprint on page 10 8 1 Select Footprint Editor from the Library menu 2 Select the pin padstack a Select Padstacks context from the tool bar drop down list default rnd 040 020 a round 040 pad with a 020 drill b Scroll down and select rnd 065 035 ala PCBoards Reference Manual Padstack Naming Convention and Standard 3 Draw the pin configuration using Autocomplete List a Select Pins from the Draw menu b Enter 10 in the Number of Pins box in Autocomplete c Click OK d Click on coordinate 0 0 then on 100 0 then on 200 0 You can see the coordinate values on the status bar PCBoards places the remaining seven pins automatically B 24 aN aN Tutorial Changing Padstack Assignments on page 9 19 Graphic Objects on page 3 9 e Press to repeat the command f Click OK g Click on coordinates 900 300 800 300 700 300 PCBoards places pins 14 20 Change the PIN_PADSTACK attribute a Double click on pin 1 b Select the PIN_PADSTACK attribute c Type sq 065 035 in the Value text box d Click Change e Click OK Ensure the Layer drop down list shows SilkTop as the current layer Draw the component outline on the SilkTop layer Objects on the SilkTop layer are used for the silkscreen legend a Select Rectangle from the Draw menu b Click on coordinates 100 50 and 1000 250 C
204. int definition chosen for deletion e Current footprints lists the names of all footprint definitions available to the current editing session 4 Either type a footprint name in the Remove text box or select an entry from the Current Footprints list 5 Click OK to exit Note The footprint is not actually removed from the library until you save the library file 6 Save the library file or Ctr S a Select Save from the File menu Printing the Footprint You can output graphics and photoplot data for the footprint to the current printer or file device configured for the host environment You have a choice to print the entire job or just the current view To print a job 1 Select Print from the File menu A EA Current View Fit O 1to1 X Black amp White Print the Job 2 Select the job that you want to print from the Job Description list box 3 Click the Job Setup button if you have not already set up the job See Setting up Jobs on page 14 3 Click the Printer button to set the output device you want Select or clear Black amp White Selecting Black amp White generates monochrome output 6 Choose the print method To print the entire job a click the Print The Job button Printing the Footprint 10 35 Printer activates the standard Printer Select dialog box used to choose the current output device for the host environment Selecting Setup from this dialog box invokes the standard Printe
205. int editor environment should be configured to have appropriate values for grid spacing text styles and default padstacks e Pins graphics and other physical properties of the footprint must be defined using drawing techniques e Refine the footprint for custom padstacks and mounting holes Footprint properties are derived from component specifications provided in standard data books Figure 10 2 shows a diagram of a completed footprint and its constituent features orientation markpins footprint outline component type rererence designator name template template footprint center machine placement footprint origin footprint boundary Figure 10 2 Footprint Diagram Starting the Footprint Editor To start the footprint editor 1 Select Footprint Editor in the Library menu A new footprint editor window is displayed for footprint editing l at ot Figure 10 3 Footprint Editor Window Multiple footprint editor windows can be created from a layout editor window in this manner You can also select Open or New in the File menu from within a footprint editor window Terminate a footprint editor window by selecting Close from the Window menu Setting the Name of the Footprint Definition To set the name of the footprint definition Select Set Name from the Footprint menu 2 Enter the footprint definition name in the Enter Name Text box 3 Click OK Creating a New Footprint 10 9
206. int method entire job or current view To print the entire job a Click the Print The Job button 14 14 Postprocessing To print only the current view a Click either the Fit or 1 to 1 button from the Current View section Fit scales the work area to fit the output page 1 to 1 prints the work area with the same scale as shown on the display b Click the Print View button Photoplotting 14 15 Photoplotting Gerber formatted jobs You can configure and generate photoplot output jobs which produce Gerber formatted data files containing statements to control photoplotter devices Gerber statements include Draft Codes DCodes corresponding to aperture shapes coordinate positions plot mechanism drawn flashed or both and other instructions to generate photoplots for board fabrication Separate files for each job A separate file is output for each page in the job in the same directory as the layout database File names are of the form layout database name gnn where nn is the page number within the job definition For example the first page of a photoplot job for a layout database named MyDesign pca would be MyDesign g01 glg file An additional g1g file is created which contains a description of the job job name number of pages layers included on each page etc This file is not in Gerber format as are the others The g1g file is in ASCII format and can be browsed for information Do not try to import this file To
207. inued Shortcut Key s Equivalent Menu Item Function F7 Configure Styles Trace Change current trace style Layout Editor F7 Configure Styles Pin Change current pin padstack association Footprint Editor F8 Tools Options Set global editing controls F9 Library Footprint Editor Activate the Footprint Editor Layout Editor F9 File New Activate a new Footprint Editor windows Footprint Editor F10 File View Messages Display the message log for browsing F11 Edit Attributes Edit the properties of the current selection F12 View Pan New Center Change the center of the visible portion of the layout Ctri A View Area Magnify the items bounded by the ROI box Ctri C Edit Copy Copy current selection to the paste buffer Ctri Insert Ctri D Edit Move Delta Reposition the current selection by a relative change in coordinates from their current position Ctri E Edit Move By RefDes Select a component by specifying its reference designator Ctri F Edit Flip Sides Flip current component selection to opposite side of the board Ctri G Draw Add Component Add a component Layout Editor Ctri 1 View In Magnify the items around the center point of the work area Ctri 1 View Redraw Refresh the work area display Table A 1 Keyboard Shortcuts continued A 3 Shortcut Key s Equivalent Menu Item Function Ctri N View Fit
208. ion must take place Format is Y coordinate units 3 Select or clear Rotate 90 1 Rotate 90 causes all pages to be reoriented 90 degrees in a counter clockwise direction Enter a scale value in the Scale text box Scale defines a percentage scale factor for enlarging or reducing the presentation of layout objects on all pages Format is scale factor in percent Configuring Job Pages In the Job Pages frame configure the pages for the job Job Pages manages page configuration associated with a given job including the layout objects to appear on each page a Click New to begin a new page definition The next available page number is automatically added to the list When defining a new job the Page list box is blank and the number added is 1 b Choose the layers to be included on the new page from the Layers list box Layers lists all of the current design layers available for output To select multiple layers for output click on each entry highlight To deselect a layer click again C In the Filter frame select the layout objects you want included on the new page d Repeat Steps a through c to define as many pages as you need Finishing the Job Setup Click OK to exit the Job Setup dialog box Setting up Jobs 14 7 Note You must define the pages for the job The job will not print if you don t define the pages 14 8 Postprocessing Adding New Jobs from an Existing Job Definition To
209. is chapter gives you procedures for defining the circuit board in preparation for placing components by loading a netlist or by doing it on the fly This chapter has the following sections Setting the Unit of Measure on page 3 3 describes how to set the unit of measure to mils or mm Setting Styles on page 3 4 describes how to define and modify line arc text trace and padstack styles as part of board definition Defining Grids on page 3 6 discusses grid spacing and other options as well as turning the Snap function on and off Graphic Objects on page 3 9 explains the various drawing objects available to you and how to use them Text Objects on page 3 17 explains how to add text as an object onto layers 3 2 Defining the Circuit Board Creating the Board Outline on page 3 18 describes how to draw a board outline Adding Holes on page 3 24 discusses what a hole is in PCBoards and how to place them Configuring Layers on page 3 28 discusses PCBoards layers and how to configure them for your design Changing the Layer Display on page 3 41 describes how you can change the layer display to see only the specific layers you want Hints and Tips on page 3 43 gives you suggestions concerning material covered in this chapter Setting the Unit of Measure 3 3 Setting the Unit of Measure To set the unit of measure 1 From the Tools menu select Options Shortcut 2 Click either the mil or
210. izes you with editing padstacks The Evaluation software does not support new padstack definitions or changes to existing ones You can configure padstacks in either the layout editor or the footprint editor For this exercise we ll use the layout editor 1 Select Padstacks from the Configure menu 2 Select the rnd 060 030 padstack You may have to scroll through the listing Click on Edit Change the Pad Clearance from 8mil to 10mil Select the Solder layer from the On Layer list Change the Pad Clearance from 8mil to 10mil Select the Template from the On Layer list Change the Pad Clearance from 8mil to 10mil Click OK to exit the Padstack Definition dialog box O 0 N OORO 0 Click OK to save the changes and exit the Configure Padstacks dialog box Hints and Tips A e When drawing graphics be sure the appropriate layer is current For instance if you are drawing silkscreen outlines the SilkTop layer should be the current layer e If you don t see what you expect to see on the screen select Layer Display from the Configure menu and turn off all unnecessary layers Objects on other layers may be masking out the image you are working with on the current layer B 28 Tutorial Pressing repeats nearly any command in both the footprint editor and the layout editor In the footprint editor to append a new footprint definition to an existing library use Save to Library from the Footprint menu To save the definiti
211. l OVEIVIEW 2 5 4 hg bw IRE ARA OG COS we eS B 1 Tutorial secr ek o eae eh ens She A See eh Se ahd Sos amp Seas RS B 3 Loading a Netlist from Schematics into PCBoards B 3 Hints and Tips ss sorco 0 5 6 0605 648 4504 9 doo a ae noe B 3 Totoni olores sua iede OR OS SG EOE DE SEEN B 4 Defining the Circuit Board seess mos aie as HS Bae HOS LONE aS B 4 Hints and TPS e es idad B 5 Tutorial 3 eos s ran ro a e a a A a I A B 7 Arranging Components sors miras a ee a Sa B 7 Moving components using selection techniques B 7 Moving components by deltaincrements B 9 Moving components by RefDes B 9 Copying Components ecse cs rt ds a A RE eG B 9 Hints and Tipsene e arse a bee o Se OS a He B 10 Tutorial 4 Routing Interactively o o B 12 Routing Traces 450 horse B 12 Creating amp Editing Areafills o o B 15 Hintsand TIPS e 26002 bs DD IDA SRS B 17 Tutorial 5 Autorouting with CCT SPECCTRA B 18 nts an Tipse sot rd os a eee nH ale aww e B 18 Tutorial 6 Editing traces in PCBoards o o B 20 Guidelines p 4 pica be po is es ee we Sa B 20 Hintsand TIPS 3 ss ORY Bh we SERED a OES Bae B 22 Tutorial 7 Creating A Footprint and Editing Padstack Definitions B 23 Creating anew f00tprint cerradas BRE HAE ESR ARMAS B 23 Editing a padstack 6 4 6 24 4 0 4 4 a G5 ra He Hn eas B 27 Hints and TIPS ec dca it Sale
212. lacement in the search list is important If there are duplicate package names PCBoards uses only the first one it encounters 11 6 Creating and Editing Packages 4 gt Library Setup Package Libraries Library Path CAMSIMILIB Padstack Library std psl Setup Package Libraries Setup Footprint Libraries Library Path defines the directory path containing the library files Click the Setup Package Libraries button Setup Package Libraries Lx Library Name M Symbol File Extension slb IV Package File Extension Lolo Add Prange paete Browse OK Cancel EWE LL Select the position in the list above where the new library file should be located To append to the end of the list click on the blank entry after the last file name in the list Either e type the name of the package library file no p1b extension in the Library Name text box e click the Browse button and select the package library file name from the list Managing Package Libraries 11 7 Select Symbol if there is a corresponding symbol library file Select Package Click the Add button The library file is added to the PART LIBS section of msim ini Click OK to exit the Setup Package Libraries dialog box Click OK again to return to the layout editor Rearranging the Search Order When adding a package placement in the search list is important If there are duplicate package names PCBoards u
213. late the X Y coordinates for the cornerpoint of the footprint boundary rectangle nearest to the footprint origin which is usually with coordinates 0 0 See the example that follows this procedure 4 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Rect Coord amp Deltas Enter the values computed for Corner X and Y coordinates Enter the values computed for Delta X and Y distances rectangle width and height respectively 7 Click OK Example Computing Footprint Boundary Parameters for the S08 SOIC Component Placement Grid 12x16 Grid Element 0 5x0 5 mm C 5mm D 3 81 mm lt D gt gt Placem Courtyard Height BY c Computed C r Reference X Y Width DX Figure 10 8 Subset of the SO8 SOIC Figure 10 8 shows the S08 SOIC component dimensions that are relevant to computing the footprint boundary Measurements are taken from the IPC SM 782A standard The boundary rectangle dimensions are computed from the placement grid and grid element values as follows AX boundary AX placement grid AX grid element 12 0 5 6 mm AY boundary AY placement grid AY grid element 16 0 5 8 mm These are the values entered into the Delta X and Y controls of the Rect Coord amp Deltas dialog box The corner reference is the lower left hand corner of the boundary rectangle which is proximal to pin 1 Using the outside
214. lation in the current layout error type layer on which the error occurred the X Y location of the DRC marker and the two objects involved in the error Objects are identified as reference designator pin Or net name segment via areaFill Or Keepin Or Keepout If needed a full board DRC is run before the report is generated All DRC errors are graphically reflected on the DRC layer The DRC post processor is also automatically invoked see Verifying Design Rules on page 13 11 Attributes Report Attributes at r file extension lists for each component and net instance its user defined attributes and corresponding values 14 40 Postprocessing Statistics Report Statistics sta file extension lists general information about the layout database such as layer name board dimensions and description and quantity of object types in the design Testpoints Report Testpoints tpt file extension lists all testpoints the nets they are associated with their XY coordinates their type via or component pin and the layer s from which they are accessible This report is used for bare board test setup and post layout documentation Autorouter Report Autorouter ru1 file extension lists all the routing rules defined for use with the CCT SPECCTRA autorouter This report allows you to verify the rules used for your layout and can also be used for post layout documentation Exporting a DXF File 14 41 Exportin
215. layer PCBoards automatically makes the changes necessary when you flip an instance of the component to the Bottom board surface Only when designing edge connectors should pins be designated SMTBottom Edge connectors are a special case because they effectively have SMT pins on both surfaces of the board simultaneously To Draw individual pins 1 In the Starting Pin text box specify the pin number for the first pin Starting Pin defines the pin number for the first pin in the sequence Any alphanumeric value is valid Click OK to exit the dialog box Click on the desired pin position in the footprint editor Repeat step 3 for as many pins as need positioning As new pins are positioned pin numbers are automatically incremented even if they are alphabetic a Ra W N Click right to end placement mode 10 14 Creating and Editing Footprints To Draw pins in a simple pattern automatically 1 Select Enable in the Auto Complete section 2 Specify the total pin count in the Number of Pins text box Number of Pins defines the total pin count for automatic generation of the pins This count includes the three pins which must be interactively positioned 3 Manually position three pins to define sequence and pattern The Auto Complete feature replicates the pattern until pins totaling the specified Number of Pins is reached Figure 10 2 illustrates how the first three pins can be positioned to generate different pin patterns
216. le relates PADS component names to MicroSim library package and footprint names The pads ypk file relates PADS decal names to MicroSim footprint names Starting a New Layout 2 5 Importing a Netlist from MicroSim Schematics The simplest way to begin a layout is to load the components and connections specified in a MicroSim Schematics design into a two layer board design PCBoards default To prepare and generate a netlist from Schematics Prepare the drawing for layout in Schematics refer to the MicroSim Schematics User s Guide In the schematics editor 1 Define layout rules on components location and rotation attributes where desired 2 Define layout rules on nets trace width and clearance attributes 3 From the Tools menu package the schematic by selecting Note f you are importing a the Package command Schematics netlist and you add symbols after initializing the layout you can repackage PCBoards loads the netlist into the layout It positions those only the new symbols components with location and rotation attributes defined in Schematics into the layout accordingly It places components lacking location or rotation definition in a matrix for easy identification and selection It also displays logical connections rats 4 From the Tools menu select Run PCBoards 1 From the Tools menu select Package 2 Inthe Package dialog box select Only Unpackaged in the Set Values for frame If your netlist re
217. lect Close from the File menu to close the footprint editor and return to the layout editor Creating a New Package 11 9 Defining the New Package To define the new package 1 Open a package library file Note PCBoards saves new a Select Packaging from the Library menu aro ano me current layout If you want to b Select the file to be opened use them in other layouts you You can add the definition to an existing file by must Save them into a library selecting a library file from the list or create a new itis best 4 Ty OU Save MEM ioa library file by typing in a new name with the plb user defined library rather extension in the File Name text box than fo libraries sup plied by MicroSim Installation of new c Click OK software versions overwrites ZEY n the system supplied libraries ee Definitions ae fas oo Copy Edit Import Delete Export k F Entire Library 54L00 a C File Printer ancel 2 Choose the New button New Package Definition DAMSIM71LIB1741 plb Package Name AKO Change AKO Hof Gates 1 of Gate Types 1 Edit Gate Types Package Types DIP14 Edit Package Types m Pin Assignments Gates Gate T ype 1 Edit Pins Edit Shared Pins Edit Pin Swaps Shared Pins Print 7 Help Pin Swaps Cancel 3 Enter a name in the Package Name text box 11 10 Creating and Editing Packages A package may have alterna
218. lected To select a subset of changes a Click Unselect All b Click on highlight the entries in the Delete Add and Change lists that are to be applied to the layout Cancel closes the dialog box aborts the backward ECO process and returns to the schematic Output parameters direct the back annotation summary either to disk File chosen or to a hard copy device Printer chosen Note Print generates the output summary to the specified device When File is chosen a standard Open dialog box prompts for the name of the output file 12 6 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs The log file can be redisplayed at any time using Browse Back Annotation Log in the Tools menu Note Step 7 is critical Without updating the schematics netlist an outdated netlist is compared 5 Click Apply to have Schematics make all of the selected changes that can be completed automatically All unselected changes are discarded When done Schematics displays the backward ECO log file which lists the completed changes together with the changes that must be manually applied Edit the schematic to satisfy the manual changes specified in the backward ECO log if any Select Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu to create an updated netlist Save the schematic to ensure that the changes are saved to disk Start PCBoards and compare netlists again Working with Forward ECOs 12 7 Working with Forward ECOs Changes made to t
219. ls menu and enter a new angle in the Rotation Increment box Any value is allowed including decimals To facilitate the selection of components in a crowded design one recommendation is to change the settings in the Selection Filter Click on Selection Filter from the Configure menu or press F5 click on Exclude All check only Pins and enable Auto extend Selection This will allow you to pick up a component by merely clicking on any pin of that component Remember to reset the Selection Filter if you need to select other objects later You can add or delete components to the group of selected items by holding down the Shift key while clicking with the left mouse button Components can be placed by snapping their placement center to the grid or by snapping the pick point to the grid The default is set to pick up components by their placement center To change this select Selection Filter from the Configure menu or press F5 and clear Placement Center Remember that PCBoards offers full unlimited Undo and Redo functions These are accessible three ways the curved left and right arrow toolbar buttons Undo and Redo in the Edit menu hotkeys Ctrl Z amp Ctrl Y These functions can be very helpful when experimenting with different placement configurations To improve the display of the ratsnest connections click on Optimize Rats from the Tools menu after relocating parts This simplifies the ratsnest display If you wish to have
220. lts boxes PCBoards outputs the report to the monitor and or the printer Formatting Drill Symbols 13 15 Formatting Drill Symbols For every physical hole instance a corresponding drill symbol appears on the DrillSymbol layer Drill symbols are a composite of a crosshair symbol and a letter where the crosshair symbol is one of the following T plated holes A D unplated holes You can use the crosshair symbol without a letter for a given hole diameter and represent other hole diameters with unique combinations and placement of the symbol letter pair To establish the symbol letter relationship 1 a A W N Select Drill Symbols from the Configure menu Drill Symbol Display Format Lx Symbol Text Height 50mi Position cor e eee The Display Format dialog box allows you to define the location of the letter symbol relative to the sign You can also define the scale and weight of the sign and the height of the letter symbol Style Scale 1 Weight 1 mil Cancel Define a text height Select the relationship of the letter to the sign Define the scale of the sign If the scale of the sign is 1 it appears on the drill layer the exact size of the specified drill diameter Any scale size you enter changes the size of the sign by that scale factor Define the weight of the sign Weight defines the stroke width for the lines used to draw the sign Postproce
221. m e Unselect All deselects all of the forward ECOs in the Delete Add and Change list boxes Subsequent clicks on highlighted entries reselect them e Output parameters direct the forward annotation summary either to disk File chosen or to a hard copy device Printer chosen Print generates the output summary to the specified device When File is chosen a standard Open dialog box prompts for the name of the output file e View PCB Changes when chosen invokes the configured editor and lists the changes that have been made in the layout since the last save Working with Forward ECOs 12 9 4 Accept all the highlighted changes or select a subset By default all of the changes are selected To select a subset of changes a Click the Unselect All button b Click on highlight the entries in the Delete Add and Change lists that are to be applied to the layout 5 Click Apply to have PCBoards make all of the selected You can view the flg log file at changes any time by selecting Browse Forward ECO Log from the Tools When done PCBoards displays the forward ECO log file which lists the completed changes menu 12 10 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs Comparing Netlists If you don t have the Auto Netlist Check command enabled you can still compare the schematic netlist for an out of sync condition and use the ECO process manually To compare the layout to the netlist 1 Select Compare to Netli
222. mil B 18 T2 34mil A 20 T3 35mil 90 T4 40mil C 10 T5 125mil D 3 Totals 138 3 Example 2 Drill schedule with blind and buried vias Layers Component to Solder Tool Diamet Symbo Feed Spee Pit NP er l d t Tl 21mil B T2 35mil 320 T3 40mil A 80 T4 125mil C 4 Totals 403 4 Layers Component to Inner Tool Diamet Symbo Feed Spee Pit NP er l d t Tl 21mil B 7 Totals 7 Layers Inner1 to Solder Generating Reports 14 37 Total 18 20 90 10 141 Total 320 407 Total 14 38 Postprocessing Diamet Symbo Tool er l T1 21mil B Totals Layers Component to Inner2 Tool Diamet Symbo Feed er l Tl 21mil B Totals Layers Inner2 to Solder Tool Diamet Symbo Feed er l Tl 21mil B Totals Layers Innerl to Inner2 Tool Diamet Symbo Feed er l Tl 21mil B Totals Totals for all layers Tool Diamet Symbo Feed er l Tl 21mil B T2 35mil T3 40mil T4 125mil Totals Feed Spee Spee Spee Spee Spee d Pit Pit Pit Pit 45 320 80 445 Pit Total 14 Total Total Total 45 320 80 449 Generating Reports 14 39 Footprint Statistics Report Footprint Statistics fpr file extension lists pin properties for each footprint used in the design Unrouted Nets Report Unrouted Nets ucr file extension lists any net names and pins which are physically unconnected floating DRC Errors Report DRC Errors drc file extension lists for every design rule vio
223. movement when clicking on the up down or right left arrow keys in the scroll bar by specifying a Fine Delta value in the Pan section To Pan to a New Centerpoint 1 From the View menu select Pan New Center Shortcut 2 Select the point within the work area you want at the center of the display This makes the point you selected move to the center of the screen 1 20 Using the Layout Editor Turn Autopanning on or off and set the sensitivity and width of the hot zone by using Options in the Tools menu The default setting is Off or Cr or CHA To Autopan 1 Move the cursor to the work area border on the side to which you would like to shift The cursor changes to a straight arrow 2 Use Options in the Tools menu to configure Autopan properties You can specify how far the visible portion shifts when you trigger autopan and the sensitivity and width of the hot zone along the work area border Zooming Reduce or enlarge objects in the work area using the commands in the View menu Table 1 4 Zoom Commands Zoom Command Function In View menu Magnifies objects while maintaining the position of the objects relative to the work area centerpoint Select Options from the Tools menu and change the Zoom Scale value to set the magnification factor Area View menu Magnifies objects using an outline border The layout editor positions the centerpoint of the outline border in the center of the screen
224. n forward ECOs are not incorporated and are still pending If only forward annotations are pending i e there are no new layout changes the Forward ECO dialog box reappears the next time the layout is loaded or brought to the foreground and every time thereafter until Apply is chosen Conversely if there are only backward annotations pending the Back Annotation dialog box automatically reappears until Save is chosen If there are changes in both the schematic and layout the Compare to Netlist dialog box appears automatically The View PCB Changes button is only available when there are unprocessed backward changes 2 Note Select Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu to generate the latest schematic netlist Select Run PCBoards from the Tools menu to start the layout editor if it is not already active Forward ECO Cancel Help Select All Unselect All r Output Print Change Attributes Refdes Footprint C Printer File Delete Components Nets Pins from Nets Add Components Nets Pins to Nets Add pin U11 1 to net N Add pin U11 2 to net NN_O e Apply when chosen updates the layout database with the pending forward ECO changes e Cancel when chosen closes the dialog box and returns to the layout editor e Select All selects all of the forward ECOs in the Delete Add and Change list boxes Subsequent clicks on highlighted entries deselect the
225. n that the layout editor applies when the trace routes between layers Add or modify the definition by e clicking the Add button to add a new style e clicking the Change button to modify an existing style When exiting the definition in the Styles text box becomes the current style for traces 1 28 Using the Layout Editor Note If a trace doesn t have a NETTRACE_WIDTH attribute the current trace style determines the width If a net does t have a NET_CLEARANCE attribute the current style determines clearances assigned to trace segments as they are drawn However DRC flags any trace width less than the manufacturing minimum trace width and any electrical object closer than the manufacturing minimum copper clearance to a trace segment Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles 1 29 To Delete 1 Point to Styles from the Configure menu and select Trace 2 In the Styles text box type the name of the trace style or select a name from the list 3 Click the Delete button Padstack Styles See Chapter 9 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks 1 30 Using the Layout Editor E or En REFDES Adding and Changing Object Attributes Objects have attributes that when placed in the layout are initialized with values based on current styles e g line width and library file definitions e g footprint After you place an object you can update its attributes For example a component pin has a
226. n you save the layout To maintain the integrity of the sta ps1 library make a copy of it and save the copy with a different name Use the new name as the default library Subsequent definition changes then affect only the copied library You should do the same for other imported libraries that you want to remain unchanged Setting Up the Padstack Library Use Setup in the Library menu to specify and order the files contained in the Package and Footprint Libraries and to specify the one default padstack library The layout editor searches these library files in configuration order whenever a new component type is placed in the layout If found it copies the package footprint and padstack definitions to the layout database To specify the default padstack library 1 Select Setup from the Library menu 9 8 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Padstack Library defines the library file ps1 extension to be searched for padstack definitions This library appears in the msim ini file in the PCBOARDS PADSTACKS section Library Setup Package Libraries Library Path CAMSIMILIB Padstack Library std psl Setup Package Libraries Setup Footprint Libraries 2 Type the directory path to the padstack library in the Library Path text box or append a path using a semicolon as a separator 3 Type the name of the new padstack library file including the ps1 extension in the Padstack Library tex
227. nd experiment with the various rules for refining the autorouting process Hints and Tips The Evaluation software comes with all four advanced routing options ADV DFM HYB FST and the EditRoute Tutorial 5 Autorouting with CCT SPECCTRA B 19 option These allow for the definition of more advanced routing rules and are offered at extra cost for the production software ADV ADVanced provides more rigorous and detailed rule definition on a net by net or layer by layer basis DFM Design For Manufacturability provides mitering of trace corners addition of test points and improved cleanup of final routing patterns HYB HYBrid provides use of blind and buried vias FST FaST provides noise parallelism and delay rules definition on a net by net or layer by layer basis for use in high speed circuit design EditRoute interactive autorouting functions for manual routing using the power of the autorouter algorithms When autorouting is completed the routing information will be read back into PCBoards automatically To disable this feature select Options from the Tools menu and clear Auto complete CCT If this is disabled you must use CCT Read Routes from the Tools menu to read in the routes after SPECCTRA is finished B 20 Tutorial Afa Chapter 8 Editing Traces Tutorial 6 Editing traces in PCBoards Tutorial 6 gives guidelines on how to edit traces manually in PCBoards Review the following guidelines and t
228. ndent of the connections The action of maintaining the connections is called rubberbanding and you can turn it on or off by selecting Options from the Tools menu When Rubberbanding is selected you can see the traces stretch Logical connections rats are and move on the display as you move the object or trace When always rubberbanded it is cleared the objects and traces move independently and the connections are broken Options Lx a Interaction Prefe Units of Mi To turn on Rubberbanding a aa Snap to pin Threshold ism C mm 1 Select Options from the Tools menu SS E IV Rubberbanding Auto complete CCT Repaint Online DRC F DAC Sound A 2 Select Rubberbanding rra T Optimize Rats M Auto ve Bas x i One Pass 3 Click OK to exit Ea Formal Scale 2 Coarse 25 F Curent Last Fit 90 Fine 1 gt r Autopan Autosave T Enable T Enable Sensitivity 000 ms Every 15 Min Hot Zone I Save Settings Cancel 8 8 Editing Traces Note You must select in the middle of the trace you are moving Understanding Smart Move Smart Move lets you move trace elements orthogonally without losing the x axis or y axis positions of the trace ends depending on trace orientation and direction of movement This is true even if the snap grid is enabled and the trace you selected lies between grid points There are four situations in which smart move is effective when
229. ne in the vicinity of pin 1 Creating a New Footprint 10 19 ooo0oo0g00 Figure 10 7 Marking the Footprint Orientation Identifying the Footprint Origin The footprint origin defines the footprint s 0 0 coordinate reference point All footprints provided in the standard footprint library have pin 1 designated as the origin To identify the footprint origin 1 Select Footprint Origin from the Draw menu 2 Click on pin 1 The origin crosshair repositions on pin 1 Drawing the Footprint Boundary The footprint boundary defines the physical extent of the component on the board This requires calculating the placement grid or maximum boundary dimensions from information given in the data book Then a boundary rectangle can be drawn with the specified proximity to the footprint Footprint boundary graphics are placed on the BoundaryTop layer 10 20 Creating and Editing Footprints There are many ways to draw a boundary rectangle The following procedure describes how to do so by starting from corner coordinates and establishing the rectangle sides using AX and AY values Using data book information compute corner coordinates width and height for the boundary rectangle To calculate boundary parameters 1 Select the BoundaryTop layer from the Layer drop down list in the toolbar 2 Calculate the footprint boundary rectangle width AX and height AY from the placement grid or other dimension information 3 Calcu
230. ne style is shown in the Style drop down list This same Style drop down list is used to select trace and text styles as well as the padstack type for placing pins depending on the current mode e By definition holes are non plated drills passing through all layers of the design To place a plated through hole with an annular ring you must place a specific padstack using Add Via from the Draw menu or the Add Via toolbar button second from the left on the bottom toolbar e You can draw complex board outlines using any combination of Circle Arc Rectangle or More Graphics from the Draw menu Arranging Components Overview This chapter discusses issues relevant to arranging your components into the layout that satisfies the board requirements It has the following sections Understanding Connectivity on page 4 3 describes connectivity as it pertains to PCBoards Managing Rats on page 4 8 discusses logical connections Cross Probing on page 4 11 discusses techniques for cross probing between PCBoards and Schematics Moving Objects on page 4 12 explains how to move objects around the board design Adding Components on page 4 15 describes how to add components on the fly Cutting Copying and Pasting Components on page 4 18 explains how to perform these functions as they are implemented in PCBoards 4 2 Arranging Components Deleting Components on page 4 20 describes how to delete components in the layout
231. nections If you are creating your layout without loading a netlist or if you are adding components you may want to add connections to the components To add connections 1 Set the current board layer You must use a signal layer such as Component Solder or a user defined signal layer for routing 2 Select Connection from the Draw menu The cursor changes shapes to resemble a pencil 3 Select the first pin to which you want to connect A rubberbanding rat appears Select the second pin to which you want to connect Assign a net name e If the connection is to a single existing net the existing net name is used e If the connection is for a new net a system generated name is provided You can change the name but the name you assign must be unique e If the connection joins two nets net names are listed Choose one of these names as the new name for the net Adding Connections 8 15 Net Names IN25 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to place as many connections as required 7 Click right to end draw mode 8 16 Editing Traces Deleting Connections You cannot delete a connection rat You must select a pin and disconnect it from the net PCBoards removes the pin from its corresponding net If there were only two pins on the net PCBoards also removes the net To disconnect a pin 1 Select one or more pins from which you want to remove connections 2 Select Disconnect from the Edit menu Hints and Tips 50
232. ng e X and Y coordinates of the current cursor position displayed at far left e instructions for example when drawing graphic objects e the last executed command You can repeat the last You can repeat the last command by pressing Spacebar command by pressing Spacebar 1 12 Using the Layout Editor Cursor Styles The mouse pointer shape changes depending upon the function being performed Table 1 3 Cursor Styles Cursor Function selecting menu or dialog items objects in the design ING drawing commands h dragging selected objects in any direction no smart move behavior h dragging trace vertex in any direction no Ez smart move behavior h dragging segment in any direction horizontal smart move assistance h dragging segment in any direction vertical F smart move assistance drawing or placement commands that include object snap drawing commands for graphic objects Autopan cursor Displays in one of eight directions depending on direction of autopan horizontal vertical diagonal Full screen crosshair When editing or moving objects the layout editor displays a full screen crosshair at the reference point for positioning You have a choice of turning the crosshair on or off The Layout Editor Window 1 13 To turn the full screen crosshair on 1 From the Tools menu select Options Shortcut 2 Select Crosshair 1 14 Using the Layout Editor Selecting Objects P
233. ng aperture change statements in the photoplot output file 7 Select or clear Include Comment Blocks G04 14 22 Postprocessing Include Comment Blocks G04 when selected incorporates comments reflecting the specified formatting properties into the photoplot output file 8 Select or clear Use Metric Units Use Metric Units governs which units of measure will be used to represent numerical values When selected numerical values are in mm When cleared numerical values are in inches 9 Click the Save Settings button Clicking the Save Settings button writes the current formatting selections to the msim ini initialization file Verifying Gerber Output Photoplot output can be loaded back into the layout to verify that the Gerber graphics match the metal on the surface layer s To verify photoplot output 1 Create a graphic layer for the imported graphics a Select Layers from the Configure menu b Choose New c Enter Layer Name e g Gerber d Set color to something different than the surface layers e g magenta o Choose Graphic in the Layer Type section f Click OK 2 Hide all layers except the new photoplot layer and the surface layer s a Select Layer Display from the Configure menu b Click Clear All C Select the photoplot layer and the surface layer s named Component and or Solder by default Click OK Set the Layer drop down list in the toolbar to the new photoplot layer 5 Point
234. nges to an AKO package definition only first unlink it from the base definition This creates a stand alone instance of the AKO definition You can then edit the new stand alone definition as required To edit an AKO package definition 1 2 3 Select Packaging from the Library menu and open a package library file for editing Package Definitions Package New aDs48a Copy Select the appropriate AKO part Choose Edit AD648A Package Definition Opamp plb x Package Name 4D6484 AKO 2D8C8 Change AKO of Gates 2 of Gate Types 1 Package Types DIP8 T0 99 z r Pin Assignments Gates AB Gate Type 5 Hi Edit AKO 26 Create Instance OUT 1 7 Shared Pins V 8 Weed Print Hel Pin Swaps En Cancel Click Create Instance Edit the package properties as needed Click OK to save the edits and return to the Package Library dialog box Click OK to save the library file Creating a New Package 11 15 11 16 Creating and Editing Packages Editing a Package Definition To edit a package definition 1 Open a package library file a Select Packaging from the Library menu b Select the file to be edited c Click OK 2 Click Edit 74AL529828 Package Definition 74als_plb P48LS29928 3 Follow the same procedures listed for creating a new package definition see Creating a New Package on page 11 8 Hints and Tips 0 Hints and Tips 11 17
235. ns PCBoards disconnects the pins from their nets PCBoards also creates backward ECO entries for the part deletion and connectivity changes See Working with Backward ECOs on page 12 4 for an explanation of the backward ECO file To delete a component 1 Select the component you want to delete 2 From the Edit menu select Delete Adding Connections If you are creating your layout without loading a netlist or if you are adding components you will want to add connections to the components To add connections 1 Set the current board layer You must use a signal layer such as Top Bottom or an inner layer for routing From the Draw menu select Connection The cursor changes shapes to resemble a pencil Select the first pin to which you want to connect A rubberbanding rat appears Select the second pin to which you want to connect Assign a net name e If the connection is to a single existing net the existing net name is used e Ifthe connection is for a new net a system generated name is provided You can change the name but the name you assign must be unique e If the connection joins two nets both net names are listed Choose one of these names as the new name for the net Repeat steps 3 through 5 to place as many connections as required Click right to end draw mode Adding Connections 4 21 Connections rats are logical connections between two pins Shortcut Ctri w Connec
236. nt Padstack Library Library Library plb flb psl symbol name gt package name gt footprint name gt padstack name part a pkg type pin no pkg type pin name pin no padstack pin name NOUR WN 22O0008 Figure 11 1 MicroSim Library Structure Managing Package Libraries When a component is placed in a layout the layout editor searches through the package library files for a corresponding package definition A new package library file is not automatically available to the layout editor until it is configured Note n general installations running both PCBoards and Schematics should have a new symbol library file corresponding to the new package library file File name prefixes are the same only the extensions differ sib for symbol library files p1b for package library files Adding a Package Library To add package library files to the search list 1 Select Setup from the Library menu The Library Setup dialog box is used to specify and order the files contained in the Package and Footprint Libraries and to specify the one Padstack Library file available to the layout editor when searching for component information The layout editor searches these library files in configuration order whenever a new component type is placed in the layout If found the package and footprint definitions are copied to the layout database Managing Package Libraries 11 5 Note When adding a package p
237. nt design to be copied to an external aperture file adf extension An aperture file must first be designated as the recipient for the exported definitions A standard Save As dialog box allows either a new file or an existing file to be opened To export an aperture definition 1 Select the aperture definition you want to export 2 Click Export 14 20 Postprocessing An imported aperture definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the layout database Before copying over the definition a prompt will request confirmation of the import operation 3 Enter an aperture file name PCBoards assigns the ad extension automatically 4 Define the directory where you want the aperture file to reside 5 Click Save Importing aperture definitions Import allows aperture definitions that you have previously exported to be copied into the layout database for the current design Definitions are selected from an aperture file job extension which is opened via a standard Open dialog box An imported aperture definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the layout database Before copying over the definition a prompt will request confirmation of the import operation To import an aperture definition Click Import Choose the directory where the aperture file resides Enter a file name Click Open Pb WO N Setting up the Format Setting up the format
238. nted Circuit Board typically composed of thin sheets of fiberglass clad with copper or other metal foil on one or both surfaces Rigid construction supports the mounting of electronic components and hardware metal foil is used to create conductive path patterns for the electrical connection between all of the components Pin Grid Array type of through hole package for high density ICs Artwork transparencies used for PCB fabrication A computer controlled imaging machine that reproduces the layout from a CAD database one layer at a time by exposing photographic film with a focused light source Laser plotters use a laser beam as the light source to produce higher resolution images in less time Device terminal defining a point of electrical and physical connection When pasting objects the reference point used to position the object s relative to the cursor position and snap grid Glossary 6 plating protected net rat ratsnest reannotation reference designator region select ROI box routing RS 274D RS 274X rubberbanding selection filter shape shrink signal keepin signal layer silk screen layer single select Electrochemical process of applying metal to features on the PCB such as through holes When autorouting a net whose routed portions cannot be moved but to which other segments can be routed Routing can also be completed on the unrouted portions of the protected net An electrical conne
239. nts and Tips 6 25 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter Overview PCBoards provides an integrated interface to Cooper amp Chyan Technology s CCT SPECCTRA autorouter The number of board layers and autorouting features available to you depends on the package you purchased MicroSim PCBoards with Autorouter is available in four configurations 2 layer 1000 pins 4 layer 4000 pins 6 layer unlimited pins unlimited layers unlimited pins Note Layers refers to routing signal layers only Any number of plane layers may be defined Pins refers to component pins only These layer and pin restrictions apply only to the SPECCTRA Autorouter not to the PCBoards layout editor 7 2 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter You can run an autorouting session directly from PCBoards without additional setup You can also define layout rules that constrain SPECCTRA s operation This chapter covers setting up and running the autorouter and contains the following sections Setting up for Autorouting on page 7 3 discusses the board wide default rules parameters Verifying Advanced Net Rules on page 7 6 explains how to define layout rules specific to nets and groups of nets Starting the Autorouter on page 7 8 describes how to start the autorouter and read the subsequent routing file into PCBoards Setting up for Autorouting 7 3 Setting up for Autorouting This section describes the board wide default rules
240. nu or press Ctrl E Select R6 by highlighting its RefDes in the list or by typing R6 in the Reference Designator box Click OK PCBoards highlights R6 and attaches it to the cursor for relocation Move the cursor to a new position and click to place R6 Press to repeat Move by RefDes and type in the next refdes Copying components 1 Window select U1 U4 Tutorial3 B 9 9 Moving components by delta values on page 4 13 Ar Moving Components by Reference Designator on page 4 14 lala Copying Components on page 4 18 B 10 Tutorial 6 Click on the Copy toolbar button Click on the Paste toolbar button The new pasted components are ghosted to assist you in placing them at a new location Click to place the new components at a new location Right click to end the Paste function Note that the netlist connections are not copied with the new components and the new components all have new reference designators assigned to them automatically Click Undo to remove the copied components Continue to place the parts in this design file until the ratsnest connections are optimized as best as possible to permit efficient trace routing Verify your placement by comparing it to the layout eval_lp pca shown at the beginning of this tutorial 7 Select Save As from the file menu and type in the filename tutorlp pca Hints and Tips To change the rotation angle click on Options from the Too
241. o make a layer current 1 From the Configure menu select Layers Shortcut Select a layer from the Layers drop down list in the From the Layers list select a layer toolbar 2 3 Click the Current button 4 Click OK Repositioning User Defined Layers You can reposition user defined layers in the layer list after initial placement by using the f and 4 keys The following rules apply e position graphic layers anywhere in the list e position UserDefined signal layers between the Component and Solder layers To reposition a user defined layer From the Configure menu select Layers From the Layers list select a user defined layer Use the Up or Down buttons to reposition the layer Click OK bb WO N a 5 6 Preparing the Layout for Routing Deleting a User Defined Layer To delete a user defined layer From the Configure menu select Layers Select the user defined layer that you want to delete Click the Delete button Click OK You cannot delete a system defined layer bb O N a Creating a Layer Pair To create a layer pair 1 From the Configure menu select Layer Pairs Configure Layer Pairs Layer Pair Upper Lower Component Solder Component Solder Component Add OK Cancel The way in which layers can be paired is dependent upon the configuration order of the layers in the Layers dialog box in the Configure menu A layer that is selected as an upper layer
242. o make it active 10 Click Apply in the Back Annotate Preview dialog box 11 Close the text editor showing the Backward ECO Report Hints and Tips e All ECOs made in Schematics and applied to PCBoards forward annotation will be made automatically to the layout ECOs made in PCBoards and applied to Schematics back annotation must be made manually based on the report file that is generated The only ECOs that are made automatically to the schematic are resequencing of the reference designators and updates to the component values e The ECO annotation process is based on the netlist file n1 generated from Schematics Any time a change is made to the schematic you must select Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu in order to update the netlist file with the new information Once in PCBoards the netlist comparison function will determine what if any differences exist between the current layout and the current netlist file Changes made to the layout are continually recorded in a log file b1g which is then checked by Schematics e To disable the automatic netlist comparison function in PCBoards select Options from the Tools menu and clear Auto Netlist Check Tutorial 9 Post Processing in PCBoards B 31 Tutorial 9 Post Processing in PCBoards Tutorial 9 demonstrates how to prepare a finished layout for post processing and generate laserplot files and manufacturing reports Gerber RS 274 X format ial
243. o that the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the moved segment endpoint nearest to the center of the snap ring at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Segment selected tobe moved End nearest snap ring when dragged HHI Trace segment moved to new position D Hl Intended new al ks position MANI before moving trace segment after moving trace segment 6 10 Routing Interactively The snap ring radius graphically indicates the SnapThreshold setting Place or drag a via When you place a new via or drag an existing via so that the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the center of the via at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Snap ring above existing trace in preparation to add via Existing trace is between grid points Grid Snap is On New via added before adding new via after adding new via Note Ifthe snap grid is active and an active grid point also falls within the snap ring then the imaginary line passes through the grid point rather than the center point of the snap ring Snap threshold The SnapThreshold defines the maximum distance at which a connection is automaticall
244. oards automatically save your layout Figure 2 1 shows the PCB design flow when using PCBoards with MicroSim Schematics 2 2 Starting a New Layout Add layout rules to schematic Create missing component package amp footprint definitions Read schematic netlist Draw or import a DXF PCB outline amp signal keepin component changes Place components Q Verify design integrity Design Rules Check DRC Verify layout and schematic consistency apply ECOs Produce fabrication artwork amp documentation Figure 2 1 PCB Design Flow Using PCBoards with Schematics Starting the Layout Editor When you activate PCBoards it opens a layout editor window The various methods by which to start PCBoards are described below From within Schematics Select Run PCBoards from the Tools menu Stand alone 1 On the Task bar click Start 2 Point to Programs 3 Point to your MicroSim program entry 4 Select MicroSim PCBoards Opening Additional Layouts After you open a PCBoards layout layout database you can open additional layouts by selecting the Open or New option from the File menu Note PCBoards does not support multiple windows for one layout Close an active layout editor window by selecting the Close option from the Window menu Starting the Layout Editor 2 3 Note f Schematics is not yet configured for PCBoards menu selection reads Tools Run Layout Editor do so by selecting Config
245. objects selected 8 Click OK to report the total number of objects satisfying the search in the status bar at the bottom of the display To perform related searches by modifying attributes used in the previous search 1 Select existing attribute name value pairs 2 Change their values 3 Click Change To delete attribute name value pairs 1 Select the attribute name value pairs you want to delete 2 Click Delete Using the Keyboard PCBoards provides keyboard shortcuts for many of the layout editor commands In this guide many of them appear in the side bar area for your convenience For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts see Appendix A Using the Keyboard Changing Views 1 19 Changing Views You can assign the work area to any portion of the design by panning and you can change the size of the work area by zooming in or out Panning Panning moves the work area vertically or horizontally There are three methods for panning To Pan with the Scrollbar 1 Click on the horizontal or vertical scrollbar on either side of the slider to make a coarse larger movement 2 Click on the up down or right left arrows to make a fine smaller movement To Tailor the Scrollbar Movement 1 From the Tools menu select Options 2 Define the percentage of axis movement when clicking on the scroll bar on either side of the slider by specifying a Coarse Delta value in the Pan section 3 Define the percentage of axis
246. of the new segment at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring sai Trace startpoint Startpoint to the left of existing p t Existing t la b t Smart Snapped oe a pon B a to existing trace grid points Grid Snap is enabled endpoint before starting new trace segment after starting new trace segment Understanding the Smart Functions 8 3 End a segment When you end a trace segment so that the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the endpoint of the new segment at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Endpoint to the left of existing trace Existing trace is between grid points Grid Snap is enabled HHI SI 11111 Stubless end of new trace TT TT Sh mm mm before ending new trace segment after ending new trace segment Drag a segment When you drag a trace segment and complete the move so that the center line of an existing segment passes through the snap ring PCBoards locates the moved segment endpoint nearest to the center of the snap ring at the intersection of the existing segment and an imaginary line that is normal to the existing segment and passes through the center of the snap ring Segment selected to be moved Trace segment moved End n
247. oints to the source of the message This allows you to go to the location in the design that caused the message to be generated To locate the source of a message Double click the message in the Message Viewer window Understanding the Indicated Severity Each message is preceded by a marker The color of the marker indicates the severity of the message Table 1 5 Indicated Severity Color Indication blue informational message no user action is required yellow warning message may require user action red error message indicates non fatal errors e g syntax errors that prevent the program from producing intended results black fatal error message indicates a non recoverable error condition Additional Information By default the Message Viewer displays the first line of each message If a message includes more than one line the Message Viewer displays a plus sign within the severity marker preceding the line The More Info toolbar icon is also active Using the Message Viewer 1 35 To view additional information about a message 1 Click the plus sign in the line of text Or use the icon in the Ibar 2 Click OK aaa 1 36 Using the Layout Editor Another way to view additional information is 1 Right click the message line to display a drop down menu 2 Click Additional Info to display the Additional Info dialog box Closing the Message Viewer To close the Message Viewer do one of the following e
248. on on specific topics Tutorial 1 Loading a Netlist from Schematics into PCBoards Tutorial 1 demonstrates how to generate a netlist in Schematics and load it directly into PCBoards 1 Double click on the Schematics icon 2 Select Open from the File menu 3 Select the file path eval examples pcboards in your working directory Select filename eval_1 sch Select Run PCBoards from the Tools menu Select Save As from the File menu and type in the filename tutorl pca Hints and Tips e You can load any circuit diagram drawn in Schematics into PCBoards provided that the corresponding package and footprint definitions are available for each symbol e To generate a netlist from Schematics for a pcb layout system other than PCBoards click on Configure Layout Editor from the Tools menu and select the appropriate file format Then click on Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu e You can import netlists from other schematic capture programs into PCBoards provided they are in the PADS format To load a PADS netlist in PCBoards point to Netlist from the File menu and select Import PADS Tutorial 1 B 3 lala Starting a New Layout on page 2 4 xt Z gt B 4 Tutorial Tutorial 2 Defining the Circuit Board 2 Chapter 3 Defining the Tutorial 2 demonstrates how to set up the work environment and Circuit Board the layering stackup for the layout If you did not continue from Tutorial 1 and exited PCBoards
249. on to an entirely new file use Save As from the File menu Using Save from the File menu overwrites the existing footprint library file 15 with whatever happens to be in the current editing session Tutorial 8 ECOs Between Schematics and PCBoards B 29 Tutorial 8 ECOs Between Schematics and PCBoards Tutorial 8 demonstrates how to incorporate ECOs from the schematic to the layout and how to back annotate the renumbering of reference designators Forward Annotation 1 In PCBoards select Open from the File menu and select eval_2 pca Af Working with Forward ECOs on page 12 7 2 In Schematics select Open from the File menu and select eval_2 sch Select R2 and R5 use for multiple select Select Delete from the Edit menu Select Create Layout Netlist from the Tools menu Click in the PCBoards window to make it active Click Preview in the Compare Netlist dialog box In the Forward ECO dialog box click Apply OO JO O OQ Close the text editor showing the Forward ECO Report Backward An notation PA Working with Backward ECOs on page 12 4 In PCBoards select Reannotate from the Tools menu Click on upper left Starting Corner Deselect Ref Des Family P Click OK a A O N a Select Compare to Netlist from the Tools menu B 30 Tutorial Enter the filename eval_2 nl1f Click on Preview in the Compare to Netlist dialog box Click Save O N O 9 Click in the Schematics window t
250. onents by properties or by using a wildcard a In the No Pins box type the number of pins for the footprint you want to find b Inthe Technology box select the mounting technology used for the footprint c Doone of the following Corresponding footprint graphics are displayed in the graphics eTo search by properites click the Search button area of the footprint browser eTo search by wildcard in the Footprint Name box type You can also see statistics for an asterisk and press Enter each footprint definition by Use the commands available in the Edit Draw and clicking the Statistics button Footprint menus to modify the footprint Save the edited footprint definition to the library a Select Save from the File menu to save the footprint to or Ctrl S an existing library If the library file has not yet been created the Save As dialog box is displayed 10 32 Creating and Editing Footprints Copying Footprints You can copy an existing footprint definition to be used as the starting point for a new definition To copy a footprint 1 Select Copy from the Footprint menu New Footprint Name DIP40 650 sm socket Existing Footprint Name DIP46 650 sm sockel New Footprint Name Library AMPDIP FLB DIP28 350 sm socket DIP28 650 sm socket DIP32 650 sm socket ie DIP40 650 sm socket DIP6 300 thru socket DIP8 300 thru socket Library shows the name of the currently opened footprint lib
251. or WS ya different ways to do things Related Documentation XXV Related Documentation Documentation for MicroSim products is available in both hard copy and online To access an online manual instantly you can select it from the Help menu in its respective program for example access the Schematics User s Guide from the Help menu in Schematics Note The documentation you receive depends on the software configuration you have purchased The following table provides a brief description of those manuals available in both hardcopy and online Manual Name Description MicroSim Schematics User s Guide MicroSim PCBoards User s Guide MicroSim PSpice A D amp Basics User s Guide MicroSim PSpice amp Basics User s Guide MicroSim PSpice Optimizer User s Guide MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide MicroSim FPGA User s Guide MicroSim Filter Designer User s Guide Provides information about how to use MicroSim Schematics which is a schematic capture front end program with a direct interface to other MicroSim programs and options Provides information about MicroSim PCBoards which is a PCB layout editor that allows you to specify printed circuit board structure as well as the components metal and graphics required for fabrication Describes the capabilities of PSpice A D Probe Stimulus Editor and Parts utility which are circuit analysis programs that allow you to create simulate and test circui
252. or modify the definition by Shortcut Configure Text Style Lx Height 60mil Add Angle 0 Change Weight mil Delete Justification gt eee eae see Cancel 1 26 Using the Layout Editor e clicking Add to add a new style e clicking Change to modify an existing style When exiting the definition in the Styles text box becomes the current style for text To Delete 1 Point to Styles in the Configure menu and select Text 2 In the Styles text box type the name of the text style or select a name from the list 3 Click Delete Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles 1 27 Trace Styles To Define or Modify 1 2 Point to Styles in the Configure menu and select Trace Shortcut In the Styles text box type the name of the trace style or select a name from the list Trace Width 8rnil In the Trace Width text box enter a dimension DRC am Trace Width defines the trace thickness The format is width valuel units In the DRC text box enter a dimension DRC defines the required clearance between the trace and other layout objects The format is clearance valuel units Choose a padstack definition by e selecting Padstacks from the Configure menu where Note Only round padstacks you define padstacks suitable for vias are listed e selecting Load Padstacks from the Library menu where you import padstack definitions Note The Via Padstack property dictates the padstack 6 definitio
253. ose a width value and establish a length somewhat larger than the pad plus clearance dimensions so as to provide a reasonable overlap with the surrounding areafill Creating Plane Layers By default plane layers are defined as signal layers that are 80 or more covered by areafills This can be modified by updating the CCTPlanePCT line in the msim ini file see PCBoards Reference Manual To create a plane layer 1 If not already defined create a signal layer specifically for this plane Be sure to choose Signal in the Layer Type section see Creating a User Defined Layer on page 5 2 2 Create one or more areafills to cover the msim ini defined minimum amount of area required for plane layers by default 80 of the board signal keepin area For each areafill a Select Areafill from the Draw menu to define the metal area on the layer Drawing Areafills on page 5 8 b Ifthe areafill contains nets select a net name from the Net Names list in the Choose Nets dialog box to define which net the areafill connects to For example a power plane could connect to a net named 5v a ground plane could connect to a net named GND 5 14 Preparing the Layout for Routing c Click Close Note While editing set the d Double click on any boundary segment of the areafill to FILL_DISPLAY_MODE display the Attributes dialog box attribute to DRAFT This reduces the redraw time by skipping the recalculation of internal geometries and
254. oth correctness and consistency of the layout e Design Rule Check DRC verifies the layout adheres to specified metal clearances and board outline constraints e Engineering Change Orders ECO manages back annotation of layout changes to the schematic and forward annotation of schematic changes to the layout e Netlist Comparison checks for consistency between the layout netlist output by the layout editor and the latest version of the schematic netlist Library Editing of Package Footprint and Padstack Definitions The layout editor provides facilities to create and edit the component package and padstack definitions maintained in the package and padstack libraries see Chapter 9 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks and Chapter 11 Creating and Editing Packages You can also activate the footprint editor from the layout editor to edit footprint definitions in the footprint library see Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Footprints The definitions contained in these libraries are available to any PCBoards layout When you create a layout the layout editor saves a local copy of all library definitions used Thus if you change a library definition after using it to create layouts those layouts are not directly affected Producing Manufacturing Output The final result of any layout editor must be the necessary deliverables to a manufacturer The layout editor provides commands to simply and quickly produc
255. ou can draw oddly shaped board outlines using Circle Arc Rectangle or More Graphics from the Draw menu Tutorial3 B 7 Tutorial 3 Arranging Components Tutorial 3 demonstrates how to place parts and copy and paste groups of parts Chapter 4 Arrangin Components If you did not continue from Tutorial 2 and exited PCBoards select Open from the File menu and select tutorl pca Use the figure below as a guide to component arrangement Though the tutorial doesn t lead you step by step into this arrangement you should use the techniques given to arrange the components to approximate this layout O O ooo0oo0oo0o0o 0 C30 o o o o o o o o ooooooon O Moving components using selection techniques 1 Select Options from the Tools menu B 8 Tutorial Shortcut 10 Select Optimize Rats Click OK Click and drag U1 to a new location To rotate the component press R while the component is attached to the cursor To flip it to the opposite side press F To see components on the Solder side turn on the SilkBot layer by selecting it in the Layer drop down list Continue to pick up components and relocate them using the rotation and flip functions until you feel comfortable moving the parts around Select Selection Filter from the Configure menu a Click the Exclude All button b Select Pins c Select Auto Extend d Click OK Select Out from the View menu Rotating each one
256. ou click on a displayed attribute Using Alt click to make selections momentarily reverses the current setting of Auto Extend Selection as follows e With Auto Extend Selection disabled Alt click extends the selection as described earlier e With Auto Extend Selection selected using Alt J click selects only the constituent object which is the focus of the action Select or clear Limit to Current Layer Limit to Current Layer constrains object selection to the current layer When disabled you can select objects from any visible layer Using Ctrl click to make selections momentarily reverses the current setting of Limit to Current Layer as follows e When Limit to Current Layer is disabled Ctri click selects objects from the current layer e When Limit to Current Layer is selected using Ctri click selects only the objects on any displayed layer Enable the selection filter by clicking Enable Enable turns the selection filter function on and off Using Enable as an on off switch allows you to maintain your filter arrangement but makes it effective only at appropriate times Click OK Using the Find Command Using Find in the Edit menu allows you to select layout objects whose attributes match a listed search criteria You can narrow the search by defining as many attribute name value pairs as needed All conditions must be true for an object to be found To select objects using Find 1 2 From th
257. p layer b Press R to rotate the RefDes 90 degrees c Drag the RefDes to coordinate 150 150 d Click the Redraw tool bar button Rotate and move the BI RefDes on the AssemblyTop layer a Select the RefDes on the AssemblyTop layer Press R to rotate the RefDes 90 degrees c Drag the RefDes to coordinate 150 150 B 26 an Tutorial Saving the Footprint Definition to a Footprint Library File on page 10 28 13 Draw the component boundary a d Click on the Layer drop down list and make the BoundaryTop layer current Objects on the BoundaryTop layer are used for guidance in placing the footprints Select Rectangle from the Draw menu Click on the coordinates 150 50 and 1050 350 to draw the boundary Right click to end the Draw mode 14 Identify the Machine Placement Center a b Select Machine Placement Center from the Draw menu Click on coordinate 450 150 15 Save the footprint a b c d Note Select Save As from the File menu Type DIP20 for the footprint name Click OK Enter the filename user1 f1b The file is saved but you cannot configure the new footprint for use in the Eval program 16 Close footprint editor window a b Select Close from the File menu Answer Yes to the prompt Save all changes to DIP20 Tutorial 7 Creating A Footprint and Editing Padstack Definitions B 27 Editing a padstack lala Editing Padstacks on page 9 17 Note This exercise familiar
258. pies all padstack definitions into the layout database and they become local copies When you place an object in the layout the local definition is used Figure 9 1 shows how the MicroSim libraries relate to each other and to the programs that use them Every pin of every component and every via references a padstack definition 9 6 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks Layout Netlist PCBoards package name footprint name nets Package Footprint Padstack Library Library Library plb flb psl aa aa symbol name package name footprint name padstack name part gt pkg type LS pin no Ea pkg type a pin name pin no padstack pin name UTA Figure 9 1 MicroSim Library Structure Managing Padstack Libraries 9 7 Managing Padstack Libraries You can configure only one default padstack library for global access This library is specified through the Setup dialog box in the Library menu and loaded into the layout database when the An imported padstack definition design is first created You can import other padstack library will replace any identically files into the layout database using Load Padstacks from the named definition that previously Library menu existed in the layout database eee os e g that was read in from the Note Ifyou change a padstack definition in your layout global padstack library file PCBoards overwrites the original library definition with your changes whe
259. r Setup dialog box used to configure new or existing printers for output Attributes can include resolution paper size paper source memory cartridges paper orientation number of copies and fonts Changes made within the Printer Select and Printer Setup dialog boxes affect other applications running under Microsoft Windows Please refer to the Control Panel printer configuration discussion in the Microsoft Windows User s Guide 10 36 Creating and Editing Footprints To print only the current view a Click either the Fit or 1 to 1 button from the Current View section Fit scales the work area to fit the output page 1 to 1 prints the work area with the same scale as shown on the display b Click the Print View button Updating Placed Footprints 10 37 Updating Placed Footprints After editing footprints and returning to your layout you may want to update footprints you already placed on the board To update footprints already placed in the layout 1 Select Update Footprints from the Library menu in the layout editor Update Footprints This dialog box lists all of the footprint definitions contained in the current layout Entries can be selected and deselected by clicking on them e Select All selects highlights all of the definitions in the list box Subsequent clicks on entries will deselect them e Clear All deselects all of the definitions in the list box Subsequent clicks on entries will reselect
260. r display when you select it for a color change it is automatically deselected and you must reselect it to make it eligible for display Click the Color button From the color palette choose a color Click OK to return to the Layer Display dialog box Click OK to exit and make the color change effective Making a Layer Current To make a layer current 1 2 3 From the Configure menu select Layer Display Select the layer you want to be current Click the Make Current button An asterisk appears to the left of the layer name in the list Click OK to exit and make the change effective Hints and Tips 3 43 Hints and Tips v e Use Layers from the Configure menu to add or delete layers To turn a specific layer display on or off use Layer Display from the Configure menu You can change layer color in either dialog box If you simply want to change to a different layer and make it the current layer click on the Layer drop down list and select the desired layer e The autorouter uses the Signal Keepin boundary to contain trace routing within the board outline The autorouter will not start if the Signal Keepin is missing Any traces or components outside the Signal Keepin generate DRC errors e The thickness of a line or circle comes from the current style shown in the Style box You can change or add style thicknesses by pointing to Styles in the Configure menu and selecting Lines amp Arcs The current li
261. r other objects Smart Select automatically extends selection to all traces and objects affected by the move There are two distinct behaviors depending on the object you select and where you select it Single trace selected in the middle When you select a single trace element in the middle of the trace and move it to a new location PCBoards automatically selects all traces and other objects attached to either end of the selected trace and moves or stretches them accordingly Segment selected in the middle Segment connecting for dragging traces and objects moved to the new location AH gt All connecting traces SS and objects are highlighted also during trace segment move after trace segment move Trace or object selected at vertex When you select a trace or object at a vertex where multiple traces or objects converge and perform a move operation PCBoards automatically selects all traces and objects connected to the vertex and moves or stretches them accordingly Understanding the Smart Functions 8 7 All converging traces and objects are selected Converging move complete ee M BERLARI HIHI ive 2 N Converging traces N gt Ymmi and objects being gt moved during trace segment move after trace segment move Understanding Rubberbanding When objects and traces are connected and you want to move one or the other you have a choice to either maintain the connections or move the objects and traces indepe
262. raphic layers Layers such as the silkscreen paste and mask layers are graphic layers You can place graphic objects and text on graphic layers but you cannot place electrical objects on them If you attempt to place an electrical object you are warned that electrical objects cannot be placed on a non signal layer Layer Tag Assignments PCBoards identifies layers with a tag such as Top Bottom UserDefined etc These are system generated names that are used for processing There are 20 layer tags that PCBoards applies to every board layout Layer tags are different than layer names Where you cannot change a layer tag you can assign any name to a layer that you want For instance Top is the system defined tag for the top signal layer The default name for that layer is Component You can change the default name and name user defined layers whatever you like Table 3 1 lists the layer tag assignments and gives a functional description of each layer Table 3 1 Layer Tag Assignments System Layer Tag Description UserDefined Either graphic objects graphic layer or electrically significant layout objects for signal routing signal layer There may be zero or more UserDefined layers per layout BoundaryTop Physical extent of the component footprint on the top surface of the PCB SMTAssyDrwTop Surface mount component graphics for the top surface of the PCB SMT components can be defined su
263. rary file 2 Click the Select Lib button to select the appropriate library if it is not already open Select Lib displays a dialog box where you can open a new footprint library file 3 Enter the name of the footprint to be copied by either typing an existing footprint name into the text box or selecting an entry from the New Footprint Name list 4 Enter a new footprint name either by typing a unique name or selecting an entry in the New Footprint Name list and modifying the text The New Footprint Name listbox lists the footprint definitions existing in the currently opened library file Copying Footprints 10 33 5 Click OK to exit Note The footprint does not actually reside in the library until you save the library file 6 Save the copied footprint definition to the a library a Select Save from the File menu to save the footprint to or Ctrl S an existing library If the library file has not yet been created the Save As dialog box is displayed 10 34 Creating and Editing Footprints Removing Footprints You can delete footprint definitions from the currently open footprint library file To remove a footprint from a library Select Open from the File menu 2 Select the library that contains the footprint you want to remove 3 Select Remove from the footprint menu Remove Footprint Lx Remove Footprint o IPSME Current Footprints DIPSM20 a fos e Remove defines the name of the footpr
264. re not critical and can be set up automatically For mechanical photoplotters the DCode assignments are critical and cannot be set up automatically To automatically create aperture definitions 1 Click Auto 2 Click OK Resulting DCodes are arbitrary and you can assign them to objects in the layout database Interactively creating new aperture definitions If you have a pre existing list from a company standard or photoplotting vendor you may want to create aperture definitions interactively You can interactively create them using one of two methods e Create them first using the Auto button and then modifying each DCode assignment as needed e Do not use the Auto button first Instead select each entry individually and enter the aperture data manually 14 18 Postprocessing Note Itis the user s responsibility to ensure that entered Dcodes are accepted by the target plotter To set up DCode definitions using the Auto button 1 Click Auto 2 Select individual entries and modify the DCodes as needed 3 Click Change for each modification 4 Click OK when all modifications are complete To individually not using the Auto button map layout objects in the design to the aperture definitions 1 Select an entry item in the Layout Items Assignments section Set corresponding Usage Usage defines the mechanism used to generate the shape in a photoplot for the current aperture definition Valid values are FLASHED DR
265. remainder When you have made a decision on all changes PCBoards marks the bco file as complete and considers it up to date When you apply the changes Schematics handles certain changes automatically but you must manually apply others blg Log File The b1g log file provides an audit trail of the decisions you made when applying the bco changes It keeps a record of e changes made e changes ignored e pending changes no decision made Working with Backward ECOs 12 5 Applying Backward ECOs The following procedure assumes that Schematics and PCBoards are run from the same installation and that the schematic and layout are in the same directory To apply backward ECOs 1 Select Save from the File menu to save the design and write changes to the backward ECO file 2 Select Schematics from the Tools menu to start the Schematic Editor if it is not already active 3 Activate the appropriate schematic file Schematics detects the bco file as it opens the schematic and displays the Back Annotate Preview dialog box This dialog box lists all of the part and connectivity changes made to the layout Back Annotate Preview Lx Delete Components Nets Pins from Nets A Discard All Cancel Help Select All Unselect All Output Change Attributes Refdes Footprint Print C Printer File 4 Accept all the highlighted changes or select a subset By default all of the changes are se
266. rint library to the layout search list placement in the list is important If there are duplicate footprint names the footprint editor uses only the first one it encounters Always define standard SMT components as they would appear on the Top layer PCBoards automatically makes the changes necessary when you flip an instance of the component to the Bottom board surface Only when designing edge connectors should pins be designated SMTBottom Edge connectors are a special case because they effectively have SMT pins on both surfaces of the board simultaneously When drawing graphics ensure the appropriate layer is current For instance if you are drawing silkscreen outlines the SilkTop layer should be the current layer If you don t see what you expect to see on the screen select Layer Display from the Configure menu and turn off all unnecessary layers Objects on other layers may be masking out the image you are working with on the current layer Pressing the repeats nearly any command in both the footprint editor and the layout editor Creating and Editing Packages Overview When a design requires a component that is not provided in the standard libraries both a package and corresponding footprint definition must be created Package definitions contain the list of gates that comprise each device one or more pin assignment lists and gate and pin swapping information This information is used for PCB layout and
267. rizontally oriented trace in a horizontal direction a distance approximately equal to the current grid setting or a vertically oriented trace in a vertical direction the same distance 6 16 Routing Interactively The underlying properties of the padstack definition associated with the via and the current layer pair determine the extent of the layer transition whether through hole blind or buried Understanding Pins and Vias Pins Pins are defined within the footprint editor and are always associated with a particular footprint definition see Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Footprints They are identified with a number which is used to define the specific connectivity in the netlist They are compound objects that always have an associated padstack definition When you place a pin PCBoards generates pad and mask graphics on their own respective layers Pins are plated holes used to connect traces between layers They are designated as either surface mount or through hole Pins can e extend from one surface to another through hole pin e begin on one surface and end at an internal layer Vias Vias are plated holes used to connect traces between layers Vias can e extend from one surface to another through hole via e begin on one surface and end at an internal layer blind via e begin and end on internal layers buried via You can place vias e directly by positioning a via object on a board layer e indir
268. rocess Changes made to PCBoards after the Schematics netlist was input are tracked and applied back to Schematics through the backward ECO process Changes that qualify for the ECO process include e addition and deletion of components and nets connections e addition and deletion of pins from nets e renaming of nets and reference designators e modification of component packaging attributes You can have PCBoards automatically track changes or have it check for changes only when you tell it to To have PCBoards automatically track changes 1 Select Options from the Tools menu Understanding the ECO Process 12 3 2 Select Auto Netlist 3 Click OK to exit If you turn Auto Netlist off you can still compare netlists and use the ECO process manually See Comparing Netlists on page 12 10 for procedures 12 4 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs Working with Backward ECOs The backward ECO employs two files bco file e blg log file bco File Every time changes are made to the layout that affects the list of parts in the design or changes connections PCBoards writes them to the backward ECO file bco when you save the layout The next time you run Schematics it reads the bco file and 1f there are differences between the schematic and the layout starts the back annotation process You can apply all changes back to the schematic or you can selectively apply some changes and tell Schematics to ignore the
269. rrent net If no current net is established PCBoards assigns the trace to the terminating pin s net Repeat steps 3 through 7 to place additional traces Click right to end the draw trace mode Once routed you can interactively edit traces by selecting the desired trace trace segments or segment vertices and either dragging them to a new location or reshaping them You can also change the following trace segment properties see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Table 6 1 Trace Attributes Available for Edit Attribute Syntax SEG_WIDTH thickness for trace segment units SEG_CLEARANCE DRC clearance for trace segment units SEG_PROTECTED lt YES NO gt Routing Traces 6 7 Trace Placement Mode You have control over how to place the next trace segment when routing A rubberband display reflects the current trace placement mode Table 6 2 Trace Placement Modes Shortc Mode Action ut orthogonal 9 constrains trace segments to horizontal or vertical placement ortho 45 4 constrains trace segments to orthogonal or 45 degree placement any angle 0 allows traces to be placed at any angle 6 8 Routing Interactively Understanding the Smart Functions Understanding Smart Snap In addition to snapping to vertices pins and vias Smart Snap allows you to create stubless precise junctions when routing to or from an existing trace segment This is true even if th
270. rrored and placed on the SilkBottom layer Graphic layout objects for the bottom surface of the PCB Components can be defined such that placement of the component on the Bottom layer will cause the footprint graphics to be mirrored and placed on the AssyDrwBottom layer Surface mount component graphics for the bottom surface of the PCB SMT components can be defined such that placement of the component on the Bottom layer will cause the footprint graphics to be placed on the SMTAssyDrwBottom layer Physical extent of the component footprint on the bottom surface of the PCB PCB outline graphics Graphic objects placed on this layer define the perimeter of the board Area defining where electrical objects traces vias and areafills are allowed 3 32 Defining the Circuit Board Table 3 1 Layer Tag Assignments System Layer Tag Description DrillSymbol Ratsnest DRC Drill hole graphics Layout objects cannot be placed directly on this layer The information on this layer is derived from component pins holes and vias placed in the design as well as derived padstack positions Different graphic symbols represent drill holes of varying diameter Logical electrical connections rats Layout objects cannot be placed directly on this layer The information on this layer is derived from connections or rats placed in the design Design Rule Check violations Layout objects cannot be place
271. rsor at the center of U1 pin 2 f Right click to end the Draw mode 5 Copy traces for U2 pins 3 and 4 to U1 pins 3 and 4 a Select Selection Filter from the Configure menu Shortcut b Click Exclude All Cc Select Trace Segments d Select Auto Extend Selection e Click OK f Window select the two traces at U2 pins amp 2 All the trace segments should be highlighted g Click on the Copy toolbar button then on the Paste button h Click at U2 pin 4 to paste the traces at pins 3 amp 4 i Click at U2 pin 7 to paste traces at pins 6 and 7 j Right click to end the Paste mode 6 Select Selection Filter from the Configure menu Shortcut a Clear Auto Extend b Click Include All c Click OK Draw a trace from R2 pin 2 on the Component layer to R1 pin 1 on the Solder layer the Component and Solder layers are a default layer pair a b Ensure the Component layer is current Click the Trace draw toolbar button lo B 14 Tutorial c Click R2 pin 2 bottom pin Draw a horizontal trace towards the right through the pins of U2 starting diagonally up to 600 600 then across horizontally e Click at coordinate 1150 600 in vertical alignment with the bottom pin pin 1 of R1 f Press to switch to the Solder layer g Click on R1 pin 1 to complete the trace Note that the via is inserted automatically Experiment with additional trace routing and stitching between the two routing layers Select Save A
272. s e After you identify the net to which you want the areafill connected PCBoard makes connections between the areafill and affected component pads as defined in the padstack definition using the padstack thermal relief settings e When new objects or traces are introduced PCBoards automatically readjusts the areafills to provide necessary clearances and pad connections e PCBoards automatically detects floating conductive regions or islands where the areafill is divided and a portion of it is not connected to its net You can then redesign the area and reconnect the areafill You define the shape of an areafill by drawing a border with segments and vertices Initially PCBoard uses the clearance value for the current trace style as the clearance value for the areafill boundary segment After you place the areafill however you can edit the boundary clearance and other areafill properties using Attributes from the Edit menu You can also modify the boundary shape see Editing areafill boundaries on page 5 11 Drawing and Editing Areafills for Plane Layers 5 9 To draw an areafill 1 Make the layer where you want the areafill the current layer From the Draw menu select Areafill Click on the first vertex position 4 Move the cursor to the location for the second vertex A rubberband polygon appears Click to establish the second vertex point Repeat steps 3 through 5 to place additional sides of the polygon 7 Cli
273. s Test points can be established in two ways Using the PCBoards layout editor to define test point attributes on existing pins and vias using Attributes from the Edit menu described in this section Using the SPECCTRA autorouter to establish an optimal set of test points according to specified constraints See the Autorouter User s Guide To establish test points using the PCBoards layout editor 1 Double click on one or more existing pins or vias Name Value REFDES New Change TYPE_NAME ALDI701 AL FOOTPRINT DIP8 Delete COMP_LAYER Component L petete J COMP_ANGLE 0 COMP_X 1300mil COMP_Y 600mil Display FIXED NO The Attributes dialog box is displayed Choose New New Attribute Lx Name Value Cancel Enter one of the following attribute names in the Name text box e Fora pin enter PIN_TESTPOINT e Fora via enter VIA_TESTPOINT Enter BOTTOM TOP or BOTH in the Value text box to indicate the probing side of the board Click OK to add the attribute Setting Up Test Points 13 9 6 Click OK again to exit the dialog box 13 10 Finalizing the Design Checking for Unrouted Nets and Pins You can run a report listing all net names and pins that are physically unconnected 1 Select Reports from the File menu Available Reports F Bilof Materials Stun vu I Component Locations E ole Errors J Aperture Information TT Attributes
274. s from the file menu and type in the filename tutorlr pca Tutorial 4 Routing Interactively B 15 Creating amp Editing Areafills lala Creating Plane Layers on page 5 13 1 Create a new layer named GND Click on the View Fit toolbar button a Select Layers from the Configure menu Select the COMPONENT layer Click New Change the layer name to GND 0QO lt xJ Click Set to change the color Click OK to exit the color dialog box Click OK to save J Q 2 Create a new layer named PWR a Repeat Step 1 name the layer PWR and use a different color b Click OK to exit the Configure Layers dialog box 3 Create an areafill on the PWR layer a Make the PWR layer current b Select Layer Display from the Configure menu Shortcut c Click Unselect All d Select only the BOARDOUTLINE BOARDSIGKEEPIN and PWR layers Click OK D f Select Areafill from the Draw menu g Digitize the boundary 50mils inside the Signal Keepin boundary h Click the right mouse button to close the boundary i Select the net DIG_PWR in the Choose Net dialog box to assign to the areafill j Click Close to exit the dialog box k Click OK l Right click to end the Draw Areafill process B 16 Tutorial Shortcut 18 8 Shortcut m Double click on the areafill boundary If you cannot select the areafill boundary check the settings in Selection Filter from the Configure menu Select the attribute FILL_DISPLA
275. s involved the via is either blind inner to surface buried inner to inner or through hole surface to surface Creating Padstacks 9 15 Defining Mask Properties To define mask properties 1 Define SolderMask Swell a Enter a SolderMask Swell value in the Masks frame Solder Swell defines the amount that the pad shape on the Top or Bottom layer should be expanded when applied to corresponding mask shapes on layers tagged SolderMaskTop and SolderMaskBottom respectively Format is swell value units Pins always have an image on the SolderMaskTop and or SolderMaskBottom layer s Vias only do if they are used as test points VIA_TESTPOINT attribute set to either TOP BOTTOM or BOTH 2 Define the PasteMask Shrink a Enter a PasteMask Shrink value in the Masks frame Paste Shrink defines the amount that the pad shape on the Top or Bottom layer should be reduced when applied to corresponding mask shapes on layers tagged PasteMaskTop and Paste MaskBottom respectively Format is shrink value units Removing Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers To remove non functional pads on inner layers Select or clear Remove Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers When selected Remove Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers causes pads on layers where the pads do not connect to other metal to be removed Holes will still exist This setting affects how areafills will clear around such a pad When selected and th
276. s placed on signal layers are treated as keepouts Pressing incrementally deletes vertex points in reverse placement order You must define at least three vertices to complete a keepout 5 16 Preparing the Layout for Routing Using Design Rule Check DRC The electrical integrity of a design can be checked at any time using Design Rules Check DRC DRC scans the design for e short circuits e clearance violations between two electrical objects trace segments pins vias areafills and between an electrical object and a hole or text e signal keepout violations trace segments vias and areafills that are totally or partially inside e signal keepin violations trace segments vias and areafills that are totally or partially outside e trace width violations e minimum manufacturing requirement violations As violations are detected PCBoards displays informative messages in the status bar and an X at the location where the violation is detected Later violation messages can be browsed and corrected Electrical Rules Handling PCBoards accepts two levels of design rules e board wide manufacturing minimums DFM rules e per layout object rules individual trace segments areafills and vias DFM rules take precedence Setting minimum manufacturing values PCBoards allows you to set minimum clearances trace widths and other values compatible with manufacturing limitations the DFM rules Using De
277. ses only the first one it encounters To rearrange the search order for files 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 as shown in Adding a Package Library on page 11 5 Select the entry to be moved and click the Delete button to remove it Select the position in the list above which the library file should be located Type the file name in the Package text box or use Browse Click the Add button 11 8 Creating and Editing Packages Creating a New Package New package definitions are usually created from scratch but before you create the new package you can search the footprint library for footprints package types that are matching or equivalent to the footprint name in the data book Checking the MicroSim Footprint Library To check the MicroSim Footprint Library 1 2 O NO 11 12 Select Footprint Editor from the Library menu Select Open from the File menu to open the appropriate library file File names are representative of the types of footprints contained in the file Double click on the appropriate library file name in the File Name list Select Reports from the File menu to generate a listing of all footprints Select Footprint Statistics Select Entire Library Select View Results Click OK to generate the report A file named footprint library file name fpr is always written regardless of the enabled output device Browse the report for relevant footprints Make note of them Se
278. set up tool assignments 1 Point to NC Drill from the File menu and select Tools NCD Tool Definitions Diameter TCode Feed Speed Count Symbol Symbol Assignments Order by y Count O Diameter O Tool Code X Reverse IX Start with Automatically creating new tool definitions To automatically create tool definitions TADE AL EP Symbol i i Order by Function 1 Define the drill symbol assignment order count orders by Assign symbols to drill sizes tool codes based on the quantity information contained in Table 14 1 lo orders by d 2 Select or clear Reverse Bee Selecting Reverse makes the order descending tool sede orders by topl code tool codes 3 Select or clear Start with are assigned simultaneously Selecting Start with forces the drill symbol to be with the assigned to the first hole size in the sorted list without a symbols letter symbol Assignments to the remainder of the hole sizes will include a letter A through Z with a drill symbol 14 26 Postprocessing s 4 Click the Format button Symbol Text E Style Format allows you to define the location of the letter symbol Height Soni Scale relative to the sign You can also define the scale and oi TZ weight of the sign and the height of the letter symbol Ce 7 A ess a Define a text height _Cancel b Select the relationship of the letter to the sign c Define the scale of the sign If
279. sets and rotation properties Each page is also described by one or more PCB layers and the layout objects to be included in the output Select Job Setup from the File menu If you have not created jobs for this design previously Job Setup creates them automatically Job Setup Lx Job Selection r Job Settings Curren Job Name pa Plot Origin mil Center of Rotation mil OK Auto Photoplot Job Proa E x J0 jo T Rotate 90 Cancel es yo 0 y 0 Scale 1 hotoplo m Job Pages Page Gii 1 Auto j E 3 4 Filter 3 E er m E Trace Segment Copy BRE 9 ih I Areafils Delete New H Tas EHe Tn JEE port Jobs Dalis M Graphics athe AER Ss Export Jobs Automatically Adding New Jobs If you have previously created jobs for the current design but you want to create a new set of jobs you can have PCBoards do it automatically The following procedures describe how to automatically add print NC drill and photoplot jobs You can add all three or any combination of the three 14 4 Postprocessing To automatically add a new job definition to the jobs list 1 Click Auto Auto adds default print NC drill and photoplot jobs to the jobs list The output jobs default to the following page combinations Print jobs e a separate page per layer Board Outline NC drill jobs e one page containing all signal layers Photoplot jobs e AssemblyTop BoardOutline e SMTAssemblyTop Board
280. sign Rule Check DRC 5 17 To set minimum manufacturing values 1 From the Configure menu select Mfg Minimum Rules 2 Enter values for the text boxes as follows Table 5 2 Minimum Manufacturing Values DFM Setting Meaning drill to copper clearance copper to copper clearance trace width annular ring drill diameter spoke width 3 Click OK minimum clearance between a hole and any metal trace segment areafill or pad minimum clearance between any metal from different nets minimum trace segment width minimum thickness of the annular ring around a through pin or a via minimum hole diameter for a through pin or via minimum thickness of the metal connecting to a thermal pad Setting Clearance Values PCBoards supports several methods to initialize required clearance values for trace elements Once initialized these values can be edited for individual trace segments areafills and holes 5 18 Preparing the Layout for Routing Setting trace segment clearances When you draw trace segments their clearance requirements are initialized from on of two sources e If aclearance has been set for the net either from Schematics or the CCT Net Rule dialog box the segment values will take on the net value Net clearances override the e If noclearance has been set for the net clearances are set current trace style showing in the according to the current trace style showing in the Styles Style
281. signator is typically placed to the left of the footprint boundary Once placed the reference designator attribute for character width REFDES_TEMPLATE can be modified To do so either double click on the reference designator template or select the template and select Attributes from the Edit menu Note fnot already done so it is advisable to create a text style called REFDES see Defining Modifying and Deleting Styles on page 1 24 prior to placing the reference designator template In the standard footprint library the text style is usually rotated 90 degrees and the text bounding box is center justified on the snap grid when enabled To position the REFDES template 1 Change the current layer to SilkTop using the Layer drop down list in the toolbar 2 Change the current text style to REFDES using the Style drop down list in the toolbar Select REFDES Template from the Draw menu Drag the text box to the left side of the footprint just outside of the footprint boundary and near pin 1 5 Click to position the template TYPE NAME Template The component type name is placed either on the top of the footprint boundary or centered within the footprint boundary Once placed the component type name attribute for character width TYPE_NAME_TEMPLATE can be modified To do so either double click on the component type name template or select the template and select Attributes from the Edit menu 10 26 Creating and
282. sing these values or change them as appropriate to the design requirements For detailed explanation of the various parameters see the online MicroSim PCBoards Autorouter User s Guide 3 Click OK to accept the rules you defined 7 6 Routing with the CCT SPECCTRA Autorouter Verifying Advanced Net Rules Use CCT Net Rules to define layout rules specific to nets and groups of nets classes The rules that you can set are similar to the board wide defaults provided in the CCT Setup dialog box in the Tools menu The values for trace width trace clearance whether or not traces are fixed and whether or not they are protected may reflect routing rules defined previously in MicroSim Schematics or the layout editor To review the default values for advanced net rules 1 Select CCT NetRules from the Tools menu CCT Net Rules Apply Rules To ADV DFM HYB FST Rules Net s net G rule width 0 020000 Delete net G rule clearance 0 015000 Net Attributes PinfYia Control SS E gt C Segments Connect at Pins 2 Vias aa Segments Connect at Any Copper Set Clearance C Any Copper for Star Not for Daisy C On Max Stub Out From Pin Set Fixed off Max Vias per Connection Set Priority Max Vias C Net Class Routing Control per Net Set Rules Set Routing style Net Control Max Bends per Connection starburst a O Mid Driven Max Crossings per Connection O Balanced Max
283. sition individual components in one operation is by using Move By RefDes from the Edit menu This is especially useful on complex boards where components are not easily found To move components by reference designator From the Edit menu select Move by RefDes 2 Inthe Reference Designator text box enter a reference designator or in the Components list box double click on an entry This selects the component and positions it at the current cursor location Drag the component to the new location Click to place it Press to redisplay the Move By RefDes dialog box and repeat steps 2 through 5 until all components have been positioned Adding Components 4 15 Adding Components You can place components on the component Top or solder Bottom layers by specifying either a component package or a footprint name You can also Rotate and Flip Sides when placing components However connections to the components are not created See Adding Connections on page 4 21 for procedures to add connections To select the component 1 Set the current board layer to Component or Solder 2 From the Draw menu select Component Shortcut Cirl G Component Name Close fi N3064 Statistics In Library Footprints for this Component DIODE plb In Library notstd4 flb Select All Edit Package Edit Footprint Unselect All List Components List Footprints 3
284. ssign a padstack style 1 Point to Styles from the Configure menu and select Padstacks 2 Click on the appropriate padstack definition in the list The Current Padstack text box is updated accordingly 3 Click OK to exit If the padstack you need does not exist create a new definition see Creating Padstacks on page 9 10 Drawing Pins You can position pins interactively or have the footprint editor assist you By default pins are positioned on the Top layer Note Itis important to place pins accurately If the pin placement is incorrect the physical part s will not fit on the board after it is fabricated You can draw pins using the following methods e individually e simple patterns e pin arrays e radial pins After placing pins you can change the PIN_PADSTACK assignment using Attributes from the Edit menu see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Creating a New Footprint 10 13 Drawing pins individually or automatically Choose Pins from the Draw menu e SMT when enabled defines all pins as surface mount pins a which reside on only the Top board layer If disabled all Bottom pins are through hole which extend through all layers of the jAuto Complete board Number of 7 I Enable e Top Bottom Governs on which board surface top or bottom pins are connected In general the Top default is used Note Always define standard SMT components as they would appear on the Top
285. ssing 14 Overview This chapter discusses the artwork control files and reports associated with PCBoards output The following sections are in this chapter Setting up Jobs on page 14 3 explains how to set up print photoplot and NC drill files for output Printing on page 14 12 describes the procedures for outputting a print a job Photoplotting on page 14 15 gives you the procedures for outputting a photoplot job Generating NC Drill Files on page 14 24 describes the procedures to output an NC drill file Generating Reports on page 14 32 explains the types of reports you can produce and how to generate them Exporting a DXF File on page 14 41 describes how to export an AutoCAD DXF file 14 2 Postprocessing Deliverables on page 14 43 gives you a listing of the output files generated by PCBoards that should be sent to the fabrication shop when the board is ready to be built Hints and Tips on page 14 45 gives you helpful suggestions concerning material covered in this chapter Setting up Jobs 14 3 Setting up Jobs Output tasks or jobs print photoplot NC drill can be defined either through dialog boxes or imported from external job files Once defined job definitions are maintained in the layout database These can be exported to external job files for use in other designs Each job consists of one or more pages All pages in a job are described by the same set of scale coordinate off
286. st from the Tools menu 2 Enter the netlist file to be compared in response to the standard Open dialog box When the comparison is complete the Compare to Netlist dialog box is displayed summarizing the results of the comparison Compare to Netlist Layout Database CAPCBTUT ECOEX pca Created Fri Sep 22 06 59 26 1995 Cancel Layout Netlist Hel CAPCBTUT ECOEX nif Her Created Fri Sep 22 07 00 20 1995 Comparison Results The layout and schematic are out of sync Output Perspective Apply Schematic changes to PCB O Printer File Apply PCB changes to Schematic If differences are found this dialog box provides the starting point for regaining consistency between the layout and schematic Note fPCBoards when first brought to the foreground detects that the schematic netlist has changed it automatically initiates the Compare to Netlist command Tools menu e Use the Preview button to inspect ECOs If there are changes to both the schematic and layout you can decide the best approach for synchronization apply changes to the layout or to the schematic Comparing Netlists 12 11 e Layout Database section shows the name of the layout database file and the date and time of the last save e Layout Netlist section shows the name of the netlist file generated from Schematics and the date and time of the last save e Comparison Results section describes the relative state
287. startpoint position 3 Move the cursor the desired length of the first line segment A rubberband line appears 4 Click to establish the vertex endpoint of the first segment and startpoint of the second segment 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to place additional joined line segments 6 Click right to end draw mode Note Pressing incrementally deletes the line segments in reverse placement order After placing a polyline s you can change the line width see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 3 12 Defining the Circuit Board Rectangle Rectangle from the Draw menu lets you draw a rectangle and define the startpoint and endpoint To draw a rectangle From the Draw menu select Rectangle Click on the first vertex startpoint position Move the cursor diagonally from the startpoint to the terminating vertex endpoint position A rubberband box appears 4 Click to establish the endpoint 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to place additional rectangles 6 Click right to end draw mode Note Rectangles are treated as four individual line segments After placing a rectangle s you can change the line width of all four lines individually or as a group if you group select them see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 More Graphics More Graphics from the Draw menu provides alternate methods of defining and drawing arcs lines and rectangles Arc Thru 3 points Arc Thru 3 Points lets you draw
288. sts in the Footprint library Uses the first footprint assigned in the package definition that exists in the Footprint library Accept the new definition or browse for a different one Browse for an existing valid footprint or create a new one Browse for an existing valid footprint or create a new one Accept the default footprint or browse for a different one Accept the default footprint or browse for a different one Temporary package and footprint definitions are synthesized by the system to complete the netlist readin You must choose the correct definitions to replace these temporary assignments Tf no footprints assigned in the package can be found in the Footprint library a temporary package and footprint are created You can browse for an existing valid footprint or create a new one 2 7 2 8 Starting a New Layout To use Interactive Netlist Readin 1 Activate the Message Viewer Eile Edit View Tools Window Help B x 213 ale 218 2 WARNING PCBoards ERROR PCBoards WARNING PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards ERROR PCBoards 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 364M 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 36AM 10 36AM 11 Messages 9 Error 2 Waring 0 Info Message Text Footprint used is not listed for this package component 7407 footprint abe Cannotfind specified foo
289. t 2 9 Modifying an Existing Layout If you have an existing design that is close in structure and design to the new layout you need to create you may want to modify the existing design and rename it To modify and rename an existing design 1 Open the existing design you want to modify a From the File menu select the Open option b Select the file name 2 Save the layout using a new name a From the File menu select the Save As command b Type in a new name c Click Save Modify the structure and content as needed Save the layout Creating a Layout On the Fly If a schematic netlist is not available you can design a board layout from scratch The following chapters lead you through defining the board placing and arranging components and connections routing and generating output files and reports 2 10 Starting a New Layout Shortcut Saving Your Layout Automatically It is a good idea to save your layout frequently as the design progresses You can have PCBoards automatically save it for you at an interval you specify When PCBoards saves the layout it saves it to a file named layout name pcv When you open a layout PCBoards searches for a pcv file having the selected layout name If it detects that a pcv file was automatically saved with a more recent date than the manually saved version it asks you if you want to open the pcv version To automatically save your layout 1 From the Tools menu select Options
290. t Copy I seats s En F Text a Ta Holes 1 Graphics iter AE Export Jobs 1 Select the existing job from which you want to create a new definition 2 Enter job settings if needed see Entering Job Settings on page 14 6 for procedures 3 Configure job pages if needed see Configuring Job Pages on page 14 7 4 Click OK to exit the Job Setup dialog box Exporting Job Definitions Export allows job definitions maintained in the layout database of the current design to be copied to an external jobs file job extension A job file must first be designated as the recipient for the exported definitions A standard Save As dialog box allows either a new file or an existing file to be opened To export a job file 1 From the File menu select Job Setup 14 10 Postprocessing An imported job definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the layout database Before copying over the definition a prompt will request confirmation of the import operation Job Selection p Job Settings Current Job Name Plot Origin mil Center of Rotation mil Job Type Ex T Rotate 90 auto Photoplot Job Photoplot 0 0 3 Scale 1 Job Pages P o Layer Danna Ron 10 255 5 ba feria le ea an e 230 2 Select the job you want to export in the Job Setup dialog box 3 Click Export A standard Export Job Definitions dialog box is displ
291. t box A Click OK to return to the layout editor The next time the layout editor is enabled it loads the padstack definitions contained in this file Loading Padstacks After setting up the padstack library that is searched when placing components you can load other padstack definitions residing in external files into the layout database Load Padstacks in the Library menu allows padstack definitions maintained in an external file to be copied into the layout database for the current design Definitions are selected from a padstack library file ps1 extension which is opened using a standard Open dialog box An imported padstack definition replaces any identically named definition that previously existed in the footprint editor session Managing Padstack Libraries 9 9 Before copying over a definition a prompt requests confirmation of the import operation Exporting Padstacks Export Padstacks in the Library menu allows new or changed padstack definitions maintained locally with the current design to be copied to an external padstack library file ps1 extension A padstack library file must first be designated as the recipient for the exported definitions A standard Save As dialog box allows either a new file or an existing file to be opened Care must be taken when opening an existing file The contents of the file will be replaced by the new definitions thus destroying all of the pre existing definitions An e
292. t designs It provides examples for demonstrating the process of specifying simulation parameters analyzing simulation data results editing device stimuli and creating models Provides information on MicroSim PSpice amp MicroSim PSpice Basics which are circuit analysis programs that allow you to create simulate and test circuit designs containing analog components Provides information for using the PSpice Optimizer for analog performance optimization Provides information for using programmable logic synthesis Provides information for using MicroSim FPGA the interface between MicroSim Schematics and XACTstep with MicroSim PSpice A D to enter designs for Xilinx field programmable gate array devices Provides information about designing electronic frequency selective filters xxvi Before You Begin The following table provides a brief description of those manuals available online only Manual Name Description MicroSim PSpice A D Online Reference Manual MicroSim Application Notes Online Manual Online Library List MicroSim PCBoards Online Reference Manual MicroSim PCBoards Autorouter Online User s Guide Provides reference material for PSpice A D Also included detailed descriptions of the simulation controls and analysis specifications start up option definitions and a list of device types in the analog and digital model libraries User interface commands are provided to instruct you on each of
293. t display parameters a Select a Style The Styles list displays all of the style names configured using Styles and Text from the Configure menu Selecting an entry initializes the Height Angle Weight and Justification parameters accordingly b Enter a Height value if you want a different value than the one displayed c Enter an angle value if you want a different value than the one displayed d Enter a Weight value if you want a different value than the one displayed e Select a Justification if you want a different value than the one displayed Choose to assign the text properties to a layer or prevent it from displaying e Click Assign to Layer to assign the current text properties to the current layer selection e Click Clear from Layer to prevent the indicated text properties from appearing on the selected layer Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for each layer that you want the changes to be effective Click OK 13 6 Finalizing the Design Areafills must be set with the appropriate fill pattern and island properties before generating fabrication artwork Shortcut Shortcut Setting Areafill Fill and Island Properties Before generating fabrication artwork areafills must be set with the appropriate fill pattern and island properties To use the same fill pattern and remove islands for all areafills in the design 1 Ensure all signal layers that contain areafills are displayed a Select Layer Display from th
294. t function 6 8 8 2 snap to pin threshold 6 10 8 4 SolderMaskBottom layer 3 31 SolderMaskTop 3 30 SolderMaskTop layer 3 30 specifying 5 9 split power and ground areafills 6 19 spoke removal 6 24 spokes See thermal relief Statistics report sta 14 40 status bar 1 11 styles Configure Styles command 3 4 line and arc defining or modifying 1 24 deleting 1 25 padstacks 1 29 setting 3 4 text defining or modifying 1 25 deleting 1 26 trace defining or modifying 1 27 deleting 1 29 styles toolbar drop down list 1 10 T tag assignments layer 3 29 TCode 14 24 test points 6 18 9 15 setting 13 8 text objects adding 3 17 text styles defining or modifying 3 4 thermal relief 5 13 threshold snap to pin 6 10 8 4 through hole via 6 16 tool assignments 14 25 tool codes 14 24 tool definitions creating automatically 14 25 Index 11 creating interactively 14 27 deleting 14 29 exporting 14 29 importing 14 30 modifying 14 29 toolbar 1 8 Top layer 3 30 trace placement mode Any Angle 6 7 Ortho 45 6 7 Orthogonal 6 7 traces attribute SEG_CLEARANCE 6 6 attribute SEG_PROTECTED 6 6 attribute SEG_WIDTH 6 6 copying 8 11 cutting 8 11 deleting 8 13 pasting 8 12 routing interactively 6 5 setting clearance values 5 18 tutorials B 1 Type_Name positioning the template 10 25 style 10 23 text display editing 13 4 types of layers 3 28 U unit of measure setting 3 3 _10 10
295. t of attributes and descriptive text to be included in the bill of materials report for each component type Report Setup Bill of Materials Format PKGTYPE VALUE Component Description File Print Output Format Text C Database 4 Specify attributes you want displayed in the report in the Format text box Specify each attribute using the syntax descriptive text attribute name where the report prints descriptive text verbatim and substitutes the sign with the value for the named attribute Generating Reports 14 35 Specify multiple attributes using the above syntax in a comma separated list For example to specify that the standard VALUE attribute and the user defined attributes COST and ADDR be reported enter the following into the Format text box value VALUE cost COST address ADDR 5 Enter the name of the component description file cdf that PCBoards should use in the Component Description File box 6 Specify how you want the report to be output in the Print Output Format section e Text formats the bill of materials list in ASCII format with one entry per component type e Database formats the bill of materials list with one attribute name value pair per entry thus there will be multiple entries for component types with multiple attributes Click OK to exit the Report Setup dialog box Choose to View and or Print the report in the Reports
296. tart and end with x dl provides a complete listing of all parts contained in the selected libraries Editing either a package or footprint definition affects only library definitions To change the package or footprint in a layout first modify the library definition then use the Update Packaging or Update Note You view see statistics for selected footprints by clicking the Statistics button Statistics for the footprint are immediately displayed in the MicroSim Text Editor x is any letter or number contained in component and footprint names Press after typing the wildcard pattern to view the list of components Note facomponent or footprint has parentheses around it it indicates it is a duplicate and would be loaded from an unselected library Available footprint names are listed in the Footprints for This Component box The footprint library is listed in the In Library box in the footprint area of the dialog box The graphics box displays the footprint Adding Components 4 17 To place the component 1 Click Place and Close to place the component or footprint If needed flip or rotate the component instance e Ctri F or F to flip e Ctri R or R to rotate Click within the work area to position the object Repeat steps and 2 to place as many instances of the component as required To add a different component press Spacebar to display the Add Component dialog box Click right to en
297. te footprints so more than one can be defined To define additional package types click the Add button Specifying package definition properties To define packages with one gate type 1 2 Define the package type footprint a Click Edit Package Types Edit Package Types Lx Configured Package Types DIPS Packages Type s per Pin Assigment Add DIP14 EA x Select the default DIP14 name Type the new package type name or select it from the drop down list d Click Change A package may have alternate footprints so more than one can be defined To define additional package types click the Add button e Click OK Define pin assignments a Click Edit Pins Pin Assignments x Package Types piP 4 Gate Pin Name Pin No Delete OK Cancel b Type the pin name in the Pin Name text box Note 0 Qa 0 Creating a New Package 11 11 If you are using MicroSim Schematics netlist as the input to PCBoards the pin name in the package definition must match the pin name used in the symbol Type the pin number in the Pin No text box Click Save Assignment Repeat steps b through d for each pin in the footprint Click OK To define packages with more than one gate type Normally packages consist of a number of gates of the same type However for packages that consist of more than one type of gate do the following 1 Define the gate types a Click Edit Gate Types
298. teger defines the number of digits 1 to 5 to the left Note t is advisable to set integer portion Select the appropriate numeric value Integer to 3 or higher when from the drop down list using metric units e Decimal defines the number of digits 1 to 5 to the right fractional portion Select the appropriate value from the drop down list Set the zero suppression parameter Zero Suppression excludes leading or trailing zeros or includes all zeros in the output Select Leading Trailing or None respectively from the drop down list Select or clear Use Metric Units Use Metric Units governs which units of measure will be used to represent numerical values When selected numerical values are in mm When cleared numerical values are in inches Select or clear Sort By X Before Y Sort By X Before Y governs the vertical horizontal order in which drill holes are made When selected holes are drilled ina vertical progression column by column When cleared holes are drilled in a horizontal progression row by row Select or clear Save Setting Save Settings writes the current formatting selections to the msim ini initialization file Click OK 14 32 Postprocessing Generating Reports You can generate reports for all the items listed in the dialog box below Each report is written to a single file named layout database name report extension in the same directory as the layout database You can output repor
299. template 10 25 Type_Name template 10 25 print method 14 13 printing a footprint 10 35 job definitions 14 12 properties areafill 5 10 areafill Fill and Island setting 13 6 assigning default padstack 9 12 editing layer 3 37 5 4 layer 3 32 Protect check box 3 36 _5 4 R radial pins 10 17 rats 4 3 managing 4 8 optimizing 4 8 ratsnest 4 3 display changing 4 9 Ratsnest layer 3 32 Ratsnet Display command 4 9 reading the route file automatically 7 8 interactively 7 9 rectangle drawing 3 12 rect coord amp deltas drawing 3 15 rect coord drawing 3 15 Index 10 rect corner amp deltas drawing 3 16 Redraw command 1 21 redrawing setting options 1 21 the display 1 21 REFDES text display editing 13 4 reference designator moving objects 4 14 positioning the template 10 25 reannotating 13 3 style 10 23 Remove Non Functional Pads on Inner Layers check box 9 15 removing a footprint from a library 10 34 spokes automatically 6 24 reorienting objects while dragging 4 12 static objects 4 12 report Aperture Information 14 36 Attributes 14 39 Bill of Materials running 14 34 Component Locations 14 35 DRC Errors 14 39 Footprint Statistics 14 39 generating 14 32 Hole Drill Schedule 14 36 Statistics 14 40 Unrouted Nets 14 39 repositioning User Defined layers 3 38 5 5 resistors and capacitors Bill of Materials user defined properties 14 33 rotating objects while draggin
300. terprises All other company product names are trademarks registered trademarks of their respective holders Copyright Notice Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976 no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means or stored in a data base or retrieval system without the prior written permission of MicroSim Corporation As described in the license agreement you are permitted to run one copy of the MicroSim software on one computer at a time Unauthorized duplication of the software or documentation is prohibited by law Corporate Program Licensing and multiple copy discounts are available Technical Support Internet Tech Support microsim com Phone 714 837 0790 FAX 714 455 0554 WWW http www microsim com Customer Service Internet Sales MicroSim com Phone 714 770 3022 Contents Chapter 1 Before You Begin Welcome to MicroSim 2 2 atipe akira Xix MicroSim PCBoards Overview aoaaa ee XX What Is MicroSim PCBoards 000 000 eee ee ee XX Standard Features penu em o OS AAA OG dae Ze Xx1 How to Use this Guide 2 2 a a ee XXIV Typographical Conventions 0 00000 0204 ee XX1V Related Documentation sa secre a Boke 6 OS Seow ES eS XXV Online Help Biar tia EROS SG OSE DE OS OGD xxvi What s Newin Releases 4 5 4 044 84 4 Soba 86 4 Sore Oak Sa E XXvil Using the Layout Editor OVERVIEW A E Ge ee ee Eg el 1 1 Layout Editor s
301. th components pins and vias placed in the layout Paste mask for the top surface of the PCB The information on this layer is determined by 1 graphic objects placed directly on the layer and 2 mask shapes derived from padstack definitions associated with components pins and vias placed in the layout Top surface of the PCB This layer is a signal layer Bottom surface of the PCB This layer is a signal layer Note that components positioned on the Bottom layer are mirrored when placed Paste mask for the bottom surface of the PCB The information on this layer is determined by 1 graphic objects placed directly on the layer and 2 mask shapes derived from padstack definitions associated with components pins and vias placed in the layout Configuring Layers 3 31 Table 3 1 Layer Tag Assignments System Layer Tag Description SolderMaskBottom SilkBottom AssyDrwBottom SMTAssyDrwBottom BoundaryBottom BoardOutline BoardSiglKeepin Solder mask for the bottom surface of the PCB The information on this layer is determined by 1 graphic objects placed directly on the layer and 2 mask shapes derived from padstack definitions associated with components pins and vias placed in the layout Silk screen graphics for the bottom surface of the PCB Components can be defined such that placement of the component on the Bottom layer will cause the footprint graphics to be mi
302. the screen commands Provides a variety of articles that show you how a particular task can be accomplished using MicroSim s products and examples that demonstrate a new or different approach to solving an engineering problem Provides a complete list of the analog and digital parts in the model and symbol libraries Provides reference information for MicroSim PCBoards such as file name extensions padstack naming conventions and standards footprint naming conventions the netlist file format the layout file format and library expansion and compression utilities Provides information on the integrated interface to Cooper amp Chyan Technology s CCT SPECCTRA autorouter in MicroSim PCBoards Online Help Selecting Search for Help On from the Help menu brings up an extensive online help system The online help includes e step by step instructions on how to use PCBoards features e reference information about PCBoards e Technical Support information If you are not familiar with the Windows NT or 95 Help System select How to Use Help from the Help menu What s New in Release 8 xxvii What s New in Release 8 New features for this release are e editable boundaries for all polygonal types e DXF import for mechanical outlines e part browser in the layout and footprint editors e Interactive Netlist Readin for resolving netlist problems e floating copper identification e autorouting rules report Using the L
303. this function enabled permanently click on Options from the Tools menu and select the Optimize Rats box This is the recommended setting during parts placement Move Delta is ideal for placing off grid components such as critical connector locations or mounting holes Select the component place it at the origin 0 0 click on Move Delta from the Edit menu then type in the exact placement coordinate for that part Tutorial 3 B 11 B 12 Tutorial sf Chapter 6 Routing EN Interactively Tutorial 4 Routing Interactively Tutorial 4 demonstrates how to route traces interactively and how to create areafills for plane layers Routing Traces 1 Select Open from the File menu and select eval_ip pca 2 Click on the View Area toolbar button and zoom in on the area around U1 amp U2 lower left corner 3 Draw a trace between U2 pin 1 and U1 pin 1 a Click on the Draw Trace toolbar button b Click on U2 pinl c Drag the cursor to 350 1050 and click once d Drag and click at 400 1000 to make a diagonal segment e Drag and click the cursor at the center of U1 pin 1 The trace runs between the pins of R2 amp R3 Tutorial 4 Routing Interactively B 13 4 Draw a trace between U2 pin 2 and U1 pin 2 a Click on the Draw Trace toolbar button NN b Click on U2 pin2 c Drag the cursor to 350 950 and click once d Drag and click at 400 900 to make a diagonal segment e Drag and click the cu
304. tion x Net Name Mam Cancel I Temporarily Suppress This Dialog Net Names IN25 4 22 Arranging Components Deleting Connections You cannot delete a connection rat You must select a pin and disconnect it from the net PCBoards removes the pin from its corresponding net If there were only two pins on the net PCBoards removes the net To disconnect a pin 1 Select one or more pins from which you want to remove connections 2 From the Edit menu select Disconnect Hints and Tips 4 23 Hints and Tips 50 e Adding and deleting components affects connectivity See Chapter 12 Applying Forward and Backward ECOs for methods of handling connectivity changes e To change the rotation angle click on Options from the Tools menu and enter a new angle in the Rotation Increment box Any value is allowed including decimals e To facilitate the selection of components in a crowded design one recommendation is to change the settings in the Selection Filter Click on Selection Filter from the Configure menu or press F5 click on Exclude All select only Pins and enable Auto extend Selection This will allow you to pick up a component by merely clicking on any pin of that component Remember to reset the Selection Filter if you need to select other objects later e You can add or delete components to the group of selected items by holding down while clicking with left mouse button e Components can be placed by
305. to Plot where n is the sequence number Click OK to exit the Automatic Job Generation dialog box Click OK to exit the Job Setup dialog box Setting up Jobs 14 5 14 6 Postprocessing Interactively Adding New Jobs To interactively add a new job definition to the jobs list 1 On the right side of the dialog box click the New button Job Setup Job Selection Job Settings Current Job Name Plot Origin mil Center of Rotation mil New Job eg sfo Ap I Rotate 90 y o y fo Scale 1 Auto NCD Job Drill Auto Photoplot Job Photoplot Auto Print Job Print E tales In the Current Job Name box type the name of the job Indicate the type of job in the Type box Type defines the job type either Print graphics Photo photoplot or Drill Entering Job Settings 1 Enter the plot origin in the X and Y text boxes e Plot Origin X defines the horizontal distance to shift the printable area of each page using the format horizontal delta units e Plot Origin Y defines the vertical distance to shift the printable area of each page Format is vertical delta units 2 Enter a center of rotation in the X and Y text boxes e Center of Rotation X defines the X coordinate value around which a rotate page and or mirror page operation must take place Format is X coordinate units e Center of Rotation Y defines the Y coordinate value around which a rotate page and or mirror page operat
306. to draw arcs and lines See Graphic Objects on page 3 9 for drawing functions Importing a DXF File You can import DXF files to define the outline of a printed circuit board Any source capable of producing a DXF file including PCBoards can be used Layer control and association To set up importing a DXF file into PCBoards you must select which DXF layers will be processed and associate a those layers with a PCBoards destination layer This is done through the DXF Layer Assignment dialog box DXF Layer Assignment Lx Destination Layer Fabrication DXF Source Layer ern Cancel DIMENSIONS A Fabrication CONNECTOR Mechanical Hep BOARDOUTLINE BoardOutline MTG_HOLES 8 Fabrication FRONT_PANEL NONE Select All Clear All 4 DXF unit is 1 0 inch gt Initially all destination layers are named NONE unless a layer in the current PCBoards layout matches a DXF layer name being imported If there are matching names the PCBoards destination layer assumes that name Note f you want to associate a DXF layer with a destination layer you mustchange the destination layer name so it is no longer NONE Any DXF layer that is associated with a PCBoards destination layer named NONE is not imported Entity Considerations Types PCBoards supports six DXF entity types e arc e circle e line e polyline e text e insert and block endblock All other entity types are ignored and processing
307. to edit an existing package definition Hints and Tips on page 11 17 gives you helpful suggestion concerning material covered in this chapter Understanding the Library Structure 11 3 Understanding the Library Structure A component package is the parent object describing the functional elements of a component object The package library is the repository for both system defined and user defined package definitions Each package definition is characterized by component name e package type footprint name defined in the footprint library e gate names e pin names and numbers e shared pins e gate and pin swapping information Library Definitions Library definitions for packages are maintained in the package libraries When a component is placed the layout editor copies each uniquely referenced package definition into the layout database If another object is placed that references the same definition the local copy is used Package library files normally have the same name as the corresponding symbol library files used by Schematics but with a different file extension p1b Package library files must be configured into the list of library files that are searched by the layout editor Figure 11 1 shows how the MicroSim libraries relate to each other and to the programs that use them 11 4 Creating and Editing Packages Layout Netlist PCBoards package name footprint name nets Package Footpri
308. to route to SMT components from signal layers other than the surface on which components reside A trace that cannot be moved when autorouting it cannot be modified Operation to move and mirror an object from one surface of the board to the other The definition of the mechanical outline pad pattern identifiers and physical extent boundary for a given component type see clearance An industry standard code for supplying data to a photoplotter Two common variations of the format are RS 274D and RS 274X A layer which accepts only graphic and text based objects Traces and areafills cannot be placed on a graphic layer Action of selecting more than one layout object for edit using an ROI box see below or by extending an existing selection using lt Shift gt click to add objects one at a time or lt Shift gt drag and drop to form an ROI box to add multiple objects A physical through hole in the design with a corresponding drill symbol hole information is used to set up NC drill output files A standard used for defining footprints in the MicroSim library IPC SM 782A specifications provide pad dimensions Disconnected piece of areafill that can capacitively charge Glossary 4 JEDEC 95 job keepin keepout laser plotter layer layer pairs layer tag Layout Database logical connection Manhattan length mil mirror NC drill device netlist A standard used for defining footprints in th
309. tprint abc Footprint used is not listed for this package component 7407 footprint 123 Footprint for package CDIP24X is not assigned matching footprint name exists Cannotfind specified footprint etal Cannot find specified footprint eta Cannotfind specified footprint ever Footprint for package newPk is not assigned No pin match found in package deffor abc pin 12 in netlist net NN_0008 in File le No pin match found in package deffor abc pin 9 in netlist net NIN_0008 in File Net Single pin netfound during file readin net NN_0008 fin File Netlist Load 2 Double click on the error that you want to correct Interactive Netlist Readin presents a dialog box based on the specific error explaining the problem and the options for resolving the problem 3 Make choices and follow the instructions given for each error 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all errors are resolved If you are using the netlist from Schematics as input to PCBoards any changes or substitutions made during the netlist readin process are recorded as engineering changes for back annotation to the schematic bco file See Working with Backward ECOs on page 12 4 If the netlist was imported from a PADS format you can choose to have Interactive Netlist Readin update the PADS ymp mapping file By updating the ymp file fewer problems will be encountered when reading in similar netlists in the future Starting a New Layou
310. trace editing situations Understanding Pins and Vias on page 6 16 describes the differences between pins and vias as they pertain to PCBoards Working with Areafills on page 6 19 discusses how they associate with other electrical elements and other considerations for their use 6 2 Routing Interactively Hints and Tips on page 6 25 gives you helpful suggestions concerning material covered in this chapter Highlighting Nets 6 3 Highlighting Nets You can highlight selected nets within the work area Highlighted nets are marked with a dashed line in the configured highlight color You can highlight nets in two ways e Select the net s or segment of the net s first then select the menu command e Select the menu command then choose the net s from a list Selecting the Net s First To select the net s first 1 Select rats and or trace segments within the design 2 Select Highlight Net s from the View menu Selecting the Net s Last To select the net s last 1 Select Highlight Net s from the View menu A dialog box displays a listing all of the nets within the layout database 6 4 Routing Interactively The Highlight Nets dialog box Net Names list and buttons perform as follows Net Names lists the complete set of nets contained in the layout database You can select one or more nets Select All selects all of the nets in the Net Names list box Subsequent clicks on highlighted entri
311. ts 1 Select one or more objects of the appropriate type 2 Perform the reorientation option of your choice as follows a To flip SMT components select Flip Sides from the Edit menu Components are repositioned and mirrored onto the opposite surface of the board b Torotate any objects select Rotate from the Edit menu Objects are turned counter clockwise about the center of the object or object set in an increment specified under Options dialog box from the Tools menu c To mirror text or graphic select Mirror from the Edit menu Text and or graphics are reflected about a vertical axis To reorient objects while dragging Select one or more objects of the appropriate type 2 Drag the object s and perform the reorientation option of your choice as follows a To flip SMT components while dragging press Ctri F or F Components are repositioned and mirrored onto the opposite surface of the board Moving Objects 4 13 b To rotate components or text while dragging press Ctrl R or R Objects are turned counter clockwise about the center of the object or object set in a degree increment specified in the Options dialog box under the Tools menu Moving Components This section provides some tips when selecting and moving components e When moving a component a long distance with trace segments connected to its pins break physical electrical connections by disabling Rubberbanding in the Options dialog
312. ts in PCBoards Table 4 1 PCBoards Schematics Object Relationships when Cross Probing Select this PCBoards To highlight this Schematics object object component graphic whole component all gates in a multi gate part net segment rat via or entire net throughout hierarchy and areafill across schematic pages pin gate to which the pin belongs There are two methods for cross probing e select first selects one or more objects then activates the menu command e select last activates the menu command then selects one object To cross probe using the select first method 1 In the work area select one or more layout objects 2 From the Tools menu select Cross Probe Schematic Shortcut Cirl K 3 Switch to Schematics to view the highlighted corresponding object s To cross probe using the select last method 1 From the Tools menu select Cross Probe Schematic 2 In the work area select one layout object 3 Switch to Schematics to view the corresponding object 4 12 Arranging Components Shortcut Ctri F Shortcut Ctri R Moving Objects Changing Object Orientation Once placed objects can be selected and reoriented flipped to the opposite surface rotated or mirrored The keyboard controls for doing so depend on whether the objects are statically placed or are in the process of being dragged to a new location Also allowed operations depend on the object type To reorient static objec
313. ts to the monitor and or printer device To generate reports 1 Select Reports from the File menu Reports Lx Available Reports TF Unrouted Nets T DRC Errors TF Aperture Information T Attributes F Hole Drill Schedule T Statistics FP Footprint Statistics I Testpoints I Autorouter M View Results FT Print Results Cancel 2 Select the reports to be generated Note fyou are generating a Bill of Materials report see Bill of Materials on page 14 33 3 Select or clear View Results Selecting the View Results box causes the layout editor to display the report on the screen 4 Select or clear Print Results Selecting the Print Results box causes the layout editor to send the report to the designated printer 5 Click OK Each selected report type is written to a different file using the convention layout database name report type extension Generating Reports 14 33 Bill of Materials The default Bill of Materials bom file extension lists component type part number the quantity of each type and respective reference designators for each component in the layout You can specify that other part instance attribute values e g VALUE TOLERANCE be reported as well You can also edit the component description file aser cdf where you can specify any information you want such as cost supplier name in house order numbers etc PCBoards is shipped with a user caf file that you can e
314. two modes online or batch Running Online DRC When online DRC is enabled design rules are checked whenever an electrical object is placed or moved in the design All DRC errors are graphically reflected on the DRC layer The DRC post processor is also automatically invoked To enable online DRC 1 Select Options from the Tools menu Shortcut 13 12 Finalizing the Design Press to abort an in progress DRC Options Interaction Preferences Units of Measure mil Snap to pin Threshold E Smil C mm Rotation Increment 30 Deg I Best Rep I Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Repaint Y OnLine DRC TP DRC Sound E Fill IV Crosshair IV Auto Netlist Check C Outline I Optimize Rats Y Auto Loop Remove One Pass Zoom Pan Delta C Formal Scale 2 Coarse 25 V Current Last Fit so Fine fi Autopan pp Autosave T Enable I Enable Sensitivity fi 000 ms Every fi 5 Min Hot Zone fi FT Save Settings Cancel 2 Ensure Online DRC in the Interaction Preferences section is selected 3 Click OK DRC notifies you if a violation occurs as the design proceeds Running Batch DRC At any time batch DRC may be run on either the entire design or a selected subset of the design Batch DRC should be used when updating padstacks or footprints using Padstack from the Configure menu or Load Padstack and Update Footprint s from the Library
315. ue to accumulated noise The MicroSim Polaris option can also be used to predict and correct sources of crosstalk Grid spacing in use in the work area Value is set using the Grid drop down list in the toolbar Board layer selected for object placement drawing or edit Value is set using the Layer drop down list in the toolbar Set of layout objects selected for edit See also group select and single select Trace graphic text or pin properties used to initialize corresponding objects as they are added to the layout Styles are set using the Style drop down list and button in the toolbar decal DIP drill symbol DRC ECO etching fanout fixed trace flip sides footprint gap Gerber Format graphic layer group select hole IPC SM 782A island Glossary 3 PADS term for footprint Dual In line Package through hole leaded package for ICs Combined graphic and alphabetic representation of a hole in the layout Standard graphic symbols are for plated holes and 4 for unplated holes Design Rules Check which verifies the electrical and structural integrity of the design given clearance rules for trace segments pads holes and board outline Engineering Change Order containing schematic updates backward annotation or layout updates forward annotation Electrochemical process of removing metal from the PCB using a chemical bath Breakout trace segments and vias connecting to SMT pads Used
316. up from the Library menu When adding a footprint placement in the list is important If there are duplicate footprint names the footprint editor uses only the first one it encounters see Rearranging the Search Order on page 10 7 for procedures Adding a Footprint Library To add footprint library files to the search list 1 Select Setup from the Library menu The Library Setup dialog box is used to specify and order the files contained in the Package and footprint libraries and to specify the one Padstack Library file available to the layout editor when searching for component information The layout editor searches these library files in configuration order whenever a new component type is placed in the layout If found the component definition is copied to the layout database Note When adding a footprint placement in the search list is important If there are duplicate footprint names the footprint editor uses only the first one it encounters See Rearranging the Search Order on page 10 7 10 6 Creating and Editing Footprints Library Setup Package Libraries Library Path CAMSIMILIB Padstack Library std psl Setup Package Libraries Setup Footprint Libraries Library Path defines the directory path containing the library files 2 Click the Setup Footprint Libraries button Setup Footprint Libraries Footprint ampdip flb ampsimm flb ampzip flb cdipsm flb cfp flb
317. ur individual line segments After placing a rectangle s you can change the line width of all four lines individually or as a group 1f you group select them see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 3 16 Defining the Circuit Board Rect corner amp deltas Rect Corner amp Deltas lets you draw a rectangle by specifying the rectangle s width height and position To draw a Rect Corner amp Deltas rectangle 1 Point to More Graphics from the Draw menu and select Rect Corner amp Deltas Rectangle by Corner amp Delta Delta 2 Type the width X value x 1000mil 3 Type the height Y value v 1000mil Click OK to exit E The rectangle displays in the work space Move the cursor to the desired placement position Click to place the rectangle Repeat steps 2 through 6 to place additional rectangles 0 NJ O 0 Click right to end the placement mode Rectangles are treated as four individual line segments After placing a rectangle s you can change the line width of all four lines individually or as a group if you group select them see Adding and Changing Object Attributes on page 1 30 Text Objects Text objects can be placed on all signal and graphic layers except the DrillSymbol DRC BoardOutline and Ratsnest layers Text is characterized by height width weight alignment and angle Adding Text You can add one or more instances of a text string on a graphi
318. ure Layout Editor from the Tools menu and set the dialog controls as follows Table 2 1 Configure Layout Editor Commands in Schematics Command Setting Layout Netlist PCBoards Netlist File Extension nif ECO File Extension bco Layout Editor pcboards Command Line 2 4 Starting a New Layout Starting a New Layout There are several ways to begin a layout You can load a netlist MicroSim Schematics or PADS compatible into a default layout load a netlist MicroSim Schematics or PADS compatible into a structured layout template concept modify an existing layout and rename it place components and connections interactively on the fly Loading a Netlist Netlist files contain a collection of component and connectivity declarations and provide a convenient method for loading the layout The netlists that PCBoards allows for input are as follows MicroSim Schematics netlist n1 extension describes the parts and connectivity as defined in the functional design created in Schematics This file initializes component placement and connections in PCBoards PADS netlist pad extension describes the parts and connectivity of a design in the PADS compatible format generated by many external schematic capture and layout programs This file initializes component placement and connections in PCBoards Reading in a PADS netlist uses MicroSim s PADS mapping files pads ymp and pads ypk The pads ymp fi
319. ve not previously created a photoplot job for the current design PCBoards creates one automatically Job Description Current View Fit O 1to1 X Black amp White Print the Job 2 Select the job that you want to print from the Job Description list box Setting up the Job To set up a print job Click the Job Setup button if you have not already set up the job See Setting up Jobs on page 14 3 for procedures describing how to set up a job Printing 14 13 Choosing the Output Device To choose the output device Click the Printer button to set the output device you want Printer invokes the standard Printer Select dialog box used to choose the current output device for the host environment Selecting Setup from this dialog box invokes the standard Printer Setup dialog box used to configure new or existing printers for output Attributes can include resolution paper size paper source memory cartridges paper orientation number of copies and fonts Changes made within the Printer Select and Printer Setup dialog boxes affect other applications running under Microsoft Windows Refer to the Control Panel printer configuration discussion in the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Setting the Output for Color or Monochrome To set the output color Select or clear Black amp White Selecting Black amp White generates monochrome output Choosing the Print Method To choose the print method 1 Choose the pr
320. w Oke ewe Ree ODS 4 11 Moving Objects ae 0 ii boa e oO aa SER OH A EEE D SS 4 12 Changing Object Orientation 3 2 04 68 4 aida Soa See SGA a 4 12 Movine Components 42 64438484 44846544 08400 8 x 4 13 Moving components by delta values 4 13 Moving Components by Reference Designator 4 14 Adding Components se s a es based ee eee a ew as 4 15 Cutting Copying and Pasting Components 4 18 Cutting Components 2 0 o 4 18 Copying Components s s st a ear inm wok ae ide Go ae eee bas 4 18 Pastins Components e 4 ao o oo a od DOGS a A Sos 4 19 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Contents vii Deleting Components sa s pe a p Sa S Am ERED A Y oo 4 20 Adding Connections e sc o SS hn BGS Gi ER ah a 4 21 Deleting Connections 245 5648 OSG datai sa a a SO 4 22 Hints and Tips iese p e084 bo ee eo ede bo wo ed eee wae he eo 4 23 Preparing the Layout for Routing OVEIVICW Sos dc Bie Sens Behe nh do ts Bs Saw hs Sed Glad a 5 1 Modifying the Layer Configuration oaoa 5 2 Creating a User Defined Layer 0 0 000 5 2 Editing an Fxisting Layer si e o 2 OS eH ORG Gao ORS 5 4 Repositioning User Defined Layers 0 5 5 Deleting a User Defined Layer oo o 5 6 Creating 4 Layer Pair poc nb he ee Rew Re Ee a 5 6 Deleting a Layer Pal sos sack goede doe Gok a aca em Ge Rat eG 5 7 Drawing and Editing Areafills for Plane Layers
321. w jobs interactively 14 6 object attributes 1 30 package library 11 5 plated holes 10 28 text objects 3 17 unplated holes 10 28 AKO package definitions 11 13 aperture definitions creating automatically 14 17 exporting 14 19 importing 14 20 interactively creating 14 17 modifying or deleting 14 19 Aperture Information report apr 14 36 aperture table setting up 14 16 appending a footprint definition to a library 10 29 applying backward ECOs 12 5 applying forward ECOs 12 7 arc styles defining or modifying 3 4 arc drawing 3 9 arc center amp radius drawing 3 13 arc coord amp radius drawing 3 13 arc thru 3 points drawing 3 12 areafill drawing 5 8 editing attributes 5 9 editing boundaries 5 11 islands 6 23 net 5 9 setting clearance values 5 18 setting Fill and Island properties 13 6 SMT considerations 6 19 split power and ground 6 19 thermal relief voids drawing 6 20 working with 6 19 Index 2 areafill properties Fill_Clearance 5 10 Fill_Display_Mode 5 10 Fill_Show_Islands 5 10 Net_Fixed 5 10 NetName 5 10 artwork using AutoCAD 14 41 ASCII format job description file glg 14 15 assigning default padstack properties 9 12 AssyDrwBottom layer 3 31 AssyDrwTop layer 3 30 attributes adding 1 30 areafill editing 5 9 changing values 1 31 display parameters changing 1 31 objects 1 30 Attributes Report atr 14 39 attributes trace SEG_CLEARANCE 6 6 SEG_PROTECTED
322. xported padstack library file can be used in another design by either e importing the file using Load Padstacks e or configuring the file within msim ini for automatic search using Setup from the Library menu To make a new padstack definition automatically available to the layout and footprint editors 1 Select Export Padstacks from the Library menu to save the definition to a padstack library file A standard Open dialog box is displayed 2 Type in the name of a new file to contain all of the padstack definitions 3 Click OK The Export Padstacks dialog box is displayed 4 Select all of the padstack definitions you would like to include in the new file By default all definitions are selected 5 Click OK 9 10 Creating and Editing Pin and Via Padstacks For greatest efficiency you should create new definitions prior to adding board layers Thus as pin and via instances are added to the design PCBoards automatically creates pads for all user defined layers based on correct Template pad properties specified in the padstack definition Creating Padstacks When a design requires a padstack that is not provided in the standard library you must create a new padstack definition You should do this in the footprint editor for pin padstacks and in the layout editor for via padstacks Note PCBoards saves new definitions as local to the current layout If you want to use them in other layouts you must save them into
323. y Menu Bar You can access all PCBoards commands from the menu bar Many commands have keyboard shortcuts see Appendix A Using the Keyboard 1 8 Using the Layout Editor Note The toolbar is stationary and cannot be docked to the sides of the screen Toolbar Buttons Toolbar buttons provide shortcuts for initiating common layout and footprint editing activities Choosing a toolbar button initiates the same response as would selecting the corresponding menu item The toolbar buttons shown below apply to both the layout editor and the footprint editor except where noted Table 1 1 Toolbar Buttons Button Equivalent Menu Item or Action File New File Open File Save File Print x Edit Cut Edit Copy Edit Paste Edit Undo Edit Redo View Redraw View In a View Out View Area a View Fit Draw Polyline Draw Arc Table 1 1 Toolbar Buttons continued NN Draw Trace layout editor o Draw Via layout editor immediate pin placement footprint editor Edit Attributes Toolbar Drop Down Lists Drop down lists provide shortcuts for setting current layout properties and styles To change the setting of an property or style select a value from the applicable drop down list o 50mil Component gt Oftrace_8 Grid Layer Style The Layout Editor Window 1 9 As noted in the table the 6 icon serves two separate functions In the layout editor use itto add a via In the footprint
324. y completed when you locate a trace vertex near a pin or other electrical object on the current net To set the Snap Threshold Select Options from the Tools menu 2 Enter a value in the Snap to Pin text box located in the Interaction Preferences section of the dialog box The format for entering a value is threshold value units 3 Click OK to exit the dialog box Understanding the Smart Functions 6 11 Using Automatic Loop Removal Segment with which a loop will be made Intended new trace segment before looping trace segment A simple path is a contiguous chain of trace segments and possibly vias between two distinct vertices If existing trace segments and vias create a single simple path and you create an alternate single simple path between the same two vertices you create a loop Automatic loop removal removes the original path in favor of the alternate path Loop removed automatically after looping trace segment To activate Automatic Loop Removal Select Options from the Tools menu Options Snap to pin Threshold fi Smil Rotation Increment 390 Deg Interaction Preferences Units of Measure V Rubberbanding IV Auto complete CCT Y OnLine DRC JT DRC Sound Y Crosshair Y Auto Netlist Check I Optimize Rats Y Auto Loop Remove Pan Delta Coarse 25 Fine fi Autopan S Autosave I Enable TM Enable Sensitivity fi 000 ms Every fi 5 Min Hot Zone
325. ying diameter into the PCB Collection of formatted device declarations defining the components making up an electrical circuit and the electrical connections Layouts and schematics can each be represented by a netlist object object instance package pad pad template padstack paste mask PCB PGA photoplot photoplotter pin placement origin Glossary 5 An entity class from which an instance can be created in a layout Object classes include arcs circles lines rectangles text components holes areafills connections trace segments keepouts signal keepins and voids Physical representation of an object class within the layout There may be multiple instances of any given object class Component object instances each have a unique identifier reference designator nets each have net names The definition of the gates pin assignments and pin swapping information for a given component type Metal surrounding a pin or via Also referred to as a land Default pad properties assigned to pads on layers for which there is not an explicit assignment in the padstack definition Collection of pad and mask definitions each corresponding to a different board layer a padstack is always associated with a pin or via instance A stencil used during PCB fabrication with openings corresponding to the pads of SMT components Solder impregnated paste is applied through the openings in the paste mask Pri
326. yout objects in the upper portion and one the lower portion of the board i e the SilkTop and SilkBottom layers 3 34 Defining the Circuit Board The layout editor recognizes implicit pairing between layers with the system layer tags shown in Table 3 3 You can configure additional layer pairs when creating user defined layers Layers are configured as pairs and assigned a name in the format upper layer name lower layer name Table 3 3 Implicit Layer Pairs Top Surface Tag Bottom Surface Tag Top Bottom BoundaryTop BoundaryBottom AssyDrwTop AssyDrwBottom SMTAssyDrwTop SMTAssyDrwBottom SilkTop SilkBottom SolderMaskTop SolderMaskBottom PasteMaskTop PasteMaskBottom You can make specific use of signal and graphic layer pairs For instance 1f you placed a surface mount component on the Component layer its corresponding footprint graphics is on the SMTAssemblyTop layer and its reference designator is on the SilkTop layer you can change the mounting to the Bottom layer simply by choosing Flip Sides from the Edit menu The layout editor flips the footprint graphics and reference designator to their corresponding layer pair partners and mirrors the display Another use for layer pairs is to easily define the start and end layers of vias when you are routing traces interactively Using the Component Solder layer pair as an example you can start the trace on the Component layer and press to

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Samsung RT37GBSS User Manual  View Manual    2.2-2 CHRYSO Dem Aqua 80  ECHA - REACH-IT Industry User Manual: Part 06 Dossier Submission  MUSIC SYSTEM™ - Tivoli Audio  Cubiertas y Revestimientos - Ondulado 48  Original-Betriebsanleitung Original-Instruction  Philips 512MB Flash audio player  Philips Mini Vac FC6092  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file